Home

Encom Stratos User Guide

1. C Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data A VLAN ID 20 E VLAN Priority 5 High v Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 50 IP Address 1192 168 128 50 Network Mask 255 255 254 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 1 IP address used to access the radio via the Ethemet interface Pruning C Prune VLANs IP address used to access the radio via the wireless interfaces When Client Tagging is enabled the radio is assigned two IP addresses one address will be used by the radio s wireless interfaces and the other will be used for the radio s Ethernet port Both IP addresses can be used to manage the radio Only tagged network data packets using VLAN ID 20 are allowed on the Ethernet port Incoming packets associated with VLAN ID 20 are automatically untagged and forwarded to the client devices Outgoing packets sent by the client devices are automatically tagged with VLAN ID 20 The management and client IP addresses are assigned to the radio as shown in the following diagram Management Wireless Address IP Address 10 10 1 50 Network Mask 255 255 254 0 DefsultGstewsy 10 10 1 1 Client Ethernet Address IP Address 192 168 128 50 B Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The management IP address network mask and default gateway must be the compatible with the other radios in the wireless network F
2. Network Type C Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID ENCOM58 B Hide SSID C Using Repeater Radio Mode Master Ra C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive ml Channel 5210 MHz v Output Power Maximum v Because the wireless radio settings are somewhat involved the radio configuration tab is split up into three sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Radio Settings sub tab e WDS Setup sub tab e Wireless Security sub tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 183 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless radio settings tab for a broadband radio Radio Settings wos Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D B9 21 5B E0 Radio Network Setup Network Type Broadband C Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID ENCOM58 B Hide SSID C Using Repeater Radio Mode Master v C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz v 802 11 Client Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive v Channel 5210 MHz v Output Power Maximum v The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the wireless radi
3. Radio Name Enter a name used to identify the radio up to a maximum of 64 characters The name you enter will be displayed in the radio list and in all other places where a reference to the radio is made IP Address MAC Address Radio MAC Address Displays the MAC address assigned to the radio This is essentially the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet adapter For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 324 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELES Identification S USER MANUAL Feld Name Enter an optional description for the radio This field allows you to keep track of ad hoc information associated with the radio without adding clutter to the radio name The radio description is displayed in the radio properties panel Point to Multipoint Master Name Description Model Firmware Version Regulatory Domain Feld Name Country Name Select the country in which the radio is operating Certain countries have limitations on the radio power output allowed frequency ranges and frequency bands Failure to select the appropriate country can result ina radio that is operating outside of the legally allowed ranges If the radio is operating in the United States or Canada you can leave this setting to lt Not Set gt IP Address Settings Field Name Obtain an IP address Select this option if a DHCP server is available on your radio network and automatical
4. Note that the default gateway s IP address must be in the same subnet as the radio s IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 234 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Location Tab The following screen shot shows the location settings tab for a point to point radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Radio Location Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to choose a new location ve Latitude y 7 51 10533 7 y Dalhousie i Longitude x Dalhousie 114 15477 i Icon Color D Blue i Icon Style Varsity Estates Q Street Address Brentwood The following table describes the settings found in the location tab Field Name Get location from GPS Select this option if you want the radio to get its location from the built in GPS receiver This option is not available if the radio does not contain a GPS receiver Manually specify Select this option if you want to manually specify the location of the radio location Latitude Enter the latitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the northern hemisphere and negative in the southern hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Latitude f
5. Panels assirnennenninihenedesieimentmetnnnes Restore Original Layout Radio Menu Command Ssns saan erida iri aene dites Configure Change PASSW OP res tre eiaa paa aa a iaae er a aa Oda a Na a eS a nn IA Air 47 Add to FING WES TARA reee ns ne a a aE LES a E ee 48 RADIUS Monitor Termnal Connect rise retenir EE A E aided on dennis ona 51 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 3 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Terminal DiSCONNeC e e A r aa aA lt a cadenscsatusvets A E aa a aa e ae aA e e raana e Eaa aL Ean SE E Rer ARGA 51 Add C Eras E EE TE i 52 Find a a A a EEE Aa E E E 53 Delete adivtatcehicntaniiiniiadive ahaha dia E E Aaa Ea E Ea a AR A E e A akea eaa Aara 54 ASSIGN Statie P Addi eS S icas2 c4 cadens cece ocneiesutuscceesuscdatwessectadass KEA Aaaa aaraa E aia ne e Raae 55 Restore to Factory DetaulltS iriiria eieaa aiaia ea aa R Eea a ia A A EER AEREE 57 Upgrade FMW ALG artise aa da Ea aE A E anar l aa aan a AN aaea den Raman 59 Reboot erpe EAA A paaa ean aL Aaa Ea AREE Saa SEA E T A AE Aaaa tentait 61 Folder Menu GOMMMANGS 55 65 lt ssccncec4sscesensanxtncsacoehen lt ascsivaceasete es Aada e ra AA RAAS aaa col A aaraa a aaa A E eme end aatia 62 RENAME rdiciriraisnika yidi a r an Ea AERE SNEK ANEA ET ERA EEES KEE EAKA EAEE AA EAKR CRE Sa AEE REE Add Foldet sh a aeaa a EA aera ie eee atroce ERN Delete sa Tools Menu Commands System SCUiINGS siaii arnie Eiaa
6. 2 Click and hold down the mouse button and then drag the mouse in the desired direction 3 The panel on either side of the mouse pointer will be resized accordingly For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 32 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repositioning a Panel To reposition a panel 1 Select the panel by clicking and holding down the left mouse button on the panel s title bar Click and hold the left mouse NS button on the title bar If the panel is currently part of a tabbed group click and hold the left mouse button on the panel s tab Click and hold the left mouse button on the tab Network Traffic 2 Drag the panel with the mouse This action will detach the window s panel from its current location and allow you to select a new location for the panel When you have moved the panel to its desired location release the mouse button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 33 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL 3 While you are dragging the panel drop targets are displayed in the STRATOS main window amp Encem Stratos 5 sh Radia Meth Rado1 N 4 Howed love quete cst Tale Le CommoaLE SVZ Kasl t Crise 49 Sree 22 F Met Selaa i ARUBHCTP Pac 1235 Tue mune vs C62 MISO 161 1921681 250 gt bass COCD ES1632 4 5 8 GHz ISM B
7. For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 367 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL You would normally use this option if you want to use STP in your network Preferred Root Check this option if you want the radio to be preferred over other radios when the network is negotiating which radio to use as the STP root Bridge Priority The STP priority that is assigned to the radio This setting is managed by STRATOS and cannot be changed manually This information can be useful if you have other STP or RSTP enabled devices in your network such as switches and routers and you need to configure them to interact with the ENCOM radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 368 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Filter Settings The following screen shot shows the Network Filter tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP gos RADIUS VLAN Multicast Traffic To achieve better radio performance you may be able to reduce the amount of radio traffic by blocking out filtering unwanted multicast packets 1 Block incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 2 C Block outgoing multicast traffic on the Ethemet port 3 Block multicast traffic between wireless connections Wireless Connections oflte Ethernet Interface
8. For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 52 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Find Select Find from the Radio menu to find radios within a specified range of IP addresses This operation is also referred to as an IP sweep since it will probe all of the IP addresses in the range you specify This function is useful if the radios cannot be discovered by ENCOM STRATOS This situation can occur if a router or firewall is blocking the radio heartbeat packets Note In order for this function to work STRATOS must be able to communicate with the radios via IP protocols Any routers or firewalls found between the radio and STRATOS must be configured to let the appropriate services through see the Network Setup topic for more details To find the radios in a range of IP addresses In the Radio List panel select the folder in which the new radios will be added If you do not select a folder the new radios will be added to the Default folder 1 Select Add from the Radio menu The Find Radios form is displayed Find Radios IP Sweep Search Type Search the specified range of IP addresses Search the specified subnet Range to Search IP address start IP address end 2 Select the type of search you want to perform Two options are available If you select Search the specified range of IP addresses you need to enter the start and end
9. 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Upgrade Firmware USER MANUAL Select Upgrade Firmware from the Radio menu to upgrade or downgrade a radio s firmware Note Upgrading or downgrading a radio will not affect its configuration It is therefore safe to upgrade a radio that is installed in the field To upgrade a radio s firmware 1 Select the radio you want to upgrade from the Radio List panel 2 Select Upgrade Firmware from the Radio menu The Upgrade Firmware form is displayed EE Upgrade Firmware for Mesh Radio 1 Upgrade Firmware Folder that contains the firmware image files C Documents and Settings User My Documents Encom Wireless Firmware Select firmware for upgrade Version 2 9 51 3 13 3 20 3 24 3 25 3 28 3 30 43 L Note Radios with 8 character license IDs cannot be downgraded to firmware version 2 9 51 Radios with 8 character license IDs cannot be downgraded to firmware version 3 13 Radios with 8 character license IDs cannot be downgraded to firmware version 3 20 Radios with 8 character license IDs cannot be downgraded to firmware version 3 24 OK to downgrade OK to re apply OK to upgrade Firmware version 3 28 must be manually upgraded to version 4 3 The form will display a list of all firmware available in the specified folder Due to license restrictions enforced by the radio not all firmware versions can b
10. 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL VLAN enabled switch 1 is located in the Network Operations Center It is configured to support the management traffic monitoring and traffic control VLANs on the first three Ethernet ports respectively A fourth port located in the bottom row of Ethernet ports is configured as the trunk port Workstations connected to the first Ethernet port will only see network management data workstations connected to the second Ethernet port will only see traffic monitoring data and workstations connected to the third Ethernet port will only see traffic control data The bottom Ethernet port is configured as a trunk port and carries data from all VLANs VLAN enabled switch 2 is located in a traffic control cabinet The first Ethernet port is configured as a trunking port and carries data from all VLANs The bottom Ethernet ports are configured to allow traffic monitoring data to the cameras and traffic control data to the traffic controller The colored lines show the traffic that is present on the various network connections In this example data associated with the cameras control commands to the cameras and video streams from the cameras will be present in the green and black links The camera data will not be present in the blue and orange links For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 451 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL
11. ENCOM STRATOS plus encom USER MANUAL WIRELESS Master Radio 1 The first 2 4 GHz radio card of Master Radio 1 would be configured as follows Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification M Enable Radio Radio Model Wireless MAC Address 00 0D B9 16 82 B0 Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint B G N Clients v Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID 4859 JK WH Hide SSID Using Repeater Channel Mode 20 MHz M Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 2 4 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 2427 MHz v Output Power Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings j WDS mode is currently disabled Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and vel es Disabled M save the radio settings in order to enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm op For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 508 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal Pre Shared Key THIS SPACE FOR RENT WP42 Personal Pre Shared Key
12. ES Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description Point to Multipoint Master 00 0C 42 72 65 F2 192 168 128 135 House in low profile case For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 340 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings Aand B G Cards The following screen shot shows the wireless radio settings tab for a point to multipoint radio that is provisioned with an A 5 8 GHz or B G 2 4 GHz card Radio Settings wos Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D B9 21 5B E0 Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint C Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID ENCOM58 Hide SSID C Using Repeater Radio Mode Master v C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz v 802 11 Client Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive v Channel 5210 MHz v Output Power Maximum v The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the wireless radio settings tab Field Name Enable Radio Uncheck this option to disable the wireless radio card A disabled radio card will not be able to form wireless links with other radios If you uncheck this option all of the other options in the Radio Settings tab will be disabled Identifi
13. Hide SSID M Using Repeater Allow Clients C Enable Roaming C 802 11 Client Parent Radio MAC Address Wireless Link Rate Adaptive M Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Page 524 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL HEHE 38kMe70 at For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 525 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Adding Security to an Existing Network Securing an existing ENCOM broadband or mesh network requires that certain configuration changes be made to all of the radios in the network When these changes are made to a radio it will lose its wireless connection to other radios that have not yet been updated Because of this parts of your network will not be available while you carry out the updates Two strategies can be used to update the configuration of your radios local updates and remote updates Local Updates To perform local updates you need physical access to the radios This usually means driving to the site where a radio is installed connecting directly to the radio using an Ethernet cable and using STRATOS to update its configuration This process would be repeated for each radio in your network Local updates may be fine for small networks but could be impr
14. Radio 2 192 168 1 102 Radio Card 1 2 4 GHz 00 0D B9 86 14 BA Radio Card 2 5 8 GHz 04 CA 6D 45 3B 4D Radio 3 192 168 1 103 Radio Card 1 2 4 GHz 00 0D B9 17 51 43 Radio Card 2 5 8 GHz 04 CA 6D 23 04 53 Radio 4 192 168 1 104 Radio Card 1 2 4 GHz 00 0D B9 42 17 44 Radio Card 2 5 8 GHz 04 CA 6D 24 D3 2F Broadband Radio Network 2 Radio Card 1 5 8 GHz 00 0D F4 12 4A 3B Radio Card 1 5 8 GHz 00 0D F4 2A F3 4C Radio Card 1 5 8 GHz 00 0D F4 87 C4 13 Radio Card 1 5 8 GHz 00 0D F4 12 4A 4C Radio Card 1 5 8 GHz 00 0D F4 17 AC 35 The following topics provide guidance on securing the networks that are composed of ENCOM broadband radios e Securing Broadband Network 1 e Securing Broadband Network 2 Refer to the Encom PULSE Link User Guide for information on securing the PULSE radio network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 505 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Securing Broadband Network 1 In this example Broadband Radio Network 1 consists of 4 E Lite INT 24 58 dual radios A single master radio Radio 1 is directly connected to the Network Operations Center and is wirelessly connected to three remote radios Radio 2 Radio 3 and Radio 4 One of the remote radios Radio 4 is connected to a 900 MHz PULSE radio network that provides communications for the traffic controllers To Network Operations Center i Broadband Radio
15. Radio Settings Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D0 Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Point Network SSID ENCOMS58N Hide SSID Radio Mode Master v Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 5280 MHz v Output Power Maximum v The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the wireless radio settings tab Field Name Enable Radio Uncheck this option to disable the wireless radio card A disabled radio card will not be able to form wireless links with other radios If you uncheck this option all of the other options in the Radio Settings tab will be disabled Identification Radio Model Displays the model number of the wireless radio card This information is useful when troubleshooting issues with the radio Wireless MAC Displays the MAC address assigned to the wireless radio card For point Address to point radios the MAC address of the wireless radio card is different than the MAC address of the radio s Ethernet interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 239 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Feld Name Network Type Identifies the radio network ty
16. Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Request Upgrade Upgrade License Finish Manual Upgrade 7 Click the Close button to return to STRATOS The Radio List panel will be updated to reflect the new license 8 If the activation was not successful the following message will be displayed Perform manual activation Could not communicate with the license server If your computer is not connected to the Internet you should perform a manual activation If your computer is connected to the Internet please try again later and contact your Encom representative if the problem persists Do you wish to perform a manual activation 9 If the activation failed because your computer is not connected to the Internet but you are able to temporarily connect it to the Internet click on the No button to dismiss the message connect your computer to the Internet and then click on the Activate License button again Contact your IT department if you need help connecting your computer to the Internet For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 97 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 10 f the activation failed because your computer is not connected to the Internet and you are not able to connect it to the
17. The network filters are used to block multicast traffic from being forwarded by the radio This can enhance the performance of your radio network by eliminating unnecessary network traffic The following table describes the network filter settings Network Traffic Filtering Field Name Description Block incoming Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on the radio s multicast traffic on the Ethernet port from being forwarded to the radio s wireless interfaces Ethernet port Block outgoing Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on the radio s multicast traffic on the wireless interfaces from being forwarded to the radio s Ethernet port Ethernet port Block multicast traffic Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on one of the radio s between wireless physical radio cards WDS links or client wireless connections from being connections forwarded to the other radio cards WDS links or client wireless connections Note that some network protocols such as those used by traffic cameras use multicast packets to operate Because of this you must be careful when disabling these settings Refer to Appendix F Network Filters for more information on setting up the network filters For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 369 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings The following screen shot shows the DHC
18. e A Bandwidth Test panel that allows you to carry out performance tests against the radio that is currently selected in the radio list e A Network Traffic panel that allows you to visualize the traffic on the wired and wireless links of the radio that is currently selected in the radio list e A Ping Test panel that allows you to perform ping latency tests on selected radios e A Spectrum Scan panel that shows a profile of the wireless activity within the vicinity of the radio that is currently selected in the radio list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 29 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e A Task List panel that displays the status of long running tasks e An Alerts panel that displays the various alarm messages that can be generated by STRATOS e A Terminal panel that allows you to interact with the radio that is currently selected using a text based terminal interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 30 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Customizing the User Interface The ENCOM STRATOS user interface consists of panels that can be resized and repositioned independently This gives you the maximum flexibility to arrange the user interface to suit your needs The size and location of each panel is saved when the application is shut down and automatically restored when you run the applicat
19. Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The Management VLAN is enabled and set to VLAN ID 10 The IP address of the radio s wireless interface is set to a value that is compatible with the other radios in the network The radio s Ethernet port is connected to the trunk port on VLAN enabled switch 1 It is assigned an IP address that can be used for local on site access As configured the radio will carry network traffic from all VLANs For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 465 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio 2 VLAN Configuration The VLAN configuration for Radio 2 would be as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data C Tag Client Data VLANID fho Management Address Tagged Access Port Address Untagged IP Address 10 10 1 51 IP Address 192 168 1 51 Network Mask 2552552550 si Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning Prune VLANs VLAN IDs 20 The Management VLAN is enabled and set to VLAN ID 10 The IP address of the radio s wireless interface is set to a value that is compatible with the other radios in the network Although the radio s Ethernet interface is not used it is still assigned an IP address that can be used for local on site access To prevent traffic contr
20. Radio Mode Remote v C Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v 80211 Client Parent Radio MAC Address 00 05 F4 1D 3D 0F Enter the MAC address of the master or repeater to which the remote will connect in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 348 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 77 WIRELESS USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the parent from the list of radios that are connected to the current radio H Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description CompakBB 58 Single 00 0D B9 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 Mounted on north most light standard CommpakBB 58 24 Dual 00 0D B9 15 B0 34 192 168 1 250 Installed in gray steel cabinet For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 349 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL WDS Setup The following screen shot shows the WDS Setup tab for a point to multipoint radio Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode Dynamic v WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rix Strength dBm C 00 15 6D 84 32 71 192 168 128 50 Point to Multipoint Remote 2 Radio 1 35 4 37 C 0015 60 84 50 D0 1921
21. Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Antenna Chains Transmit Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 Receive Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 ENCOM offers Wireless N radio cards that support up to 3 antennas STRATOS will automatically display the number of antennas that are supported by your radio in the Antenna Chains group The following table describes the settings found in each group in the wireless N settings tab Antenna Chains Field Name Transmit Specify the antennas to use for transmitting data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio card Receive Specify the antennas to use for receiving data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio card For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 353 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings N Mode The following screen shot shows the wireless security settings tab for a point to multipoint radio when the Wireless Mode option in the Radio Settings tab is set to N Mode Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication T
22. Rename Folder Specify new folder name New folder name Point to Point Network _ Cancel 3 Enter the new folder name in the New Folder Name field 4 Press OK to save the new folder name For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 62 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus 72 encom USER MANUAL Add Folder Select Add Folder from the Folder menu to add a new folder to the Radio List To add a new folder 1 In the Radio List panel select an existing folder in which to place the new folder 2 Select Add Folder from the Folder menu lf you want to create a top level folder a folder that is not contained in a parent folder click the right mouse button outside of the radio list items and select Add Folder from the pop up menu that is displayed as shown in the following example Name IP Address Mac Address wl by Default H vba Mesh Network E Point to Point Network H E Point to Point Radio 1 amp i E Point to Point Radio 2 Add Folder Add Radio Find Radios The Add Folder form is displayed Add Folder Specify new folder name New folder name EME 3 Enter the appropriate name in the New Folder Name field 4 Press OK to create the new folder Delete Select Delete from the Folder menu to delete the folder that is selected in the Radio List panel Note You cannot delete a folder that contains radios you must delete the radios that
23. USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus RADIUS Settings The following screen shot shows the RADIUS settings tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP aos RADIUS vLAN Primary Server Backup Server Common Settings Default Access Rights Enable RADIUS Server Change Settings v Radius Server Settings Server Address 192 168 0 250 Shared Secret 888 RADIUS Accounting Authentication Port 1812 Domain Timeout 3000 ms Accounting Port 1813 gt lt gt Service Options Use RADIUS to login to the radio C Use RADIUS to login to the wireless network RADIUS is used to centralize the authentication of users that attempt to login to the radio and or to the network Refer to ENCOM STRATOS RADIUS Configuration Guide available separately for more information on setting up and using a RADIUS server with your radio network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the RADIUS settings tab Primary and Secondary Server Field Name Enable RADIUS Check this setting to enable the associated RADIUS server Primary or Server Backup If the radio cannot connect to the primary RADIUS server it will attempt to connect to the backup RADIUS server Server Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server Authentication Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS authentication requests are accepted The default is 1
24. USER MANUAL m Click the Grayscale button to toggle the map between color and grayscale modes Setting the map to grayscale can make it easier to discern the Grayscale radio state indicators and the wireless link lines Hold down the Shift key then left click and drag a radio icon to change the location of the ED amp OperStreetap Map cate 2013 OpenStreetilep Icon Size The icon size bar allows you to change the size of the icons displayed on the map OT A With the icon size bar you can e Use the button to decrease the size of the icons e Use the button to increase the size of the icons e Use the slider to change the icon sizes Le Click the Radio State button to show or hide the map radio state indicators Radio State The radio state indicators are displayed as a colored circle behind the radio icons The color of the indicators match the color of the state indicators in the Radio List panel In the following example the radio state indicators show that two radios are on line green and one is off line red For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 134 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Horizon i Whit Sunridge Vista Heights AN Note The radio state indicators are only displayed for radios that are licensed See the Licensing topic for more information on obtaining a license for your radio network Lin
25. 192 168 1 254 Power LED Always on Momentarily on when radio is powered up The configuration settings are logically grouped using a tabbed interface The following topics describe the settings found in each tab e Basic Settings tab e Location tab e Radio tab e Network tab e About tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 275 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc I P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus AI WIBELESS USER MANUAL Basic Settings Tab The following screen shot shows the basic configuration settings tab for a mesh radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Identification Radio Name Mesh Radio 1 Radio MAC Address 00 0D B9 16 74 14 Description Housed in low profile case Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set Le IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Power LED Always on Momentarily on when radio is powered up The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the basic settings tab Identification Field Name Descripti
26. 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 2 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Note that the wireless link between the repeater and remote is automatically re established since both radios are now configured with compatible wireless settings Finally you would update the master The wireless link between the master and repeater will be re established and STRATOS will again be able to communicate will all of the radios To Traffic J Management Center n TMC Master Repeater Remote For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 532 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Update Order Example The following diagram shows a simple system that consists of two stand alone broadband networks Traffic Management Center Wireless Network 10 1e Oo D i x Master Remote and Master Remote acting as a repeater nn S N E Workstation or laptop 9 O 9 a running ENCOM STRATOS F 3 Remote 3 i D D Vo O Sa ox Repeater Repeater Cal Master i ocd lt LL The numbered bullets show the order in which the radios should updated Note that all of the radios in the first stand alone network are configured first followed by all of the radios in the second stand alone network Also note that the radios farthest from the TMC are configured first followed by the radios that are
27. A and B G Cards 345 Repeater Radio Setup A and B G Cards 346 Remote Radio Setup A and B G Cards ss 348 VIDS SOUP sft TAST A ATA AE AEN A A E Re 350 Wireless N SettihgSiis ac aiani ika ear ia EEEa AAA aA vind adiaidetaielasiivsicianavvienaahiliaderehes 353 Wireless Security Settings N Mode iii 354 Dynamic Security Settings N Mode iii 356 Wireless Security Settings A and B G Modes 357 Static Security Settings A and B G Modes 359 Dynamic Security Settings A and B G Modes 361 Network Wal aiiis iisisti isedap payiea iaeiaiai aisiais iada iaiia aia dapada nt iiaia 364 Time S UNOS zerten ea aaa Eer ea E Oa Aaa aE din aaea aea Aan e a A AEA AEEA 365 Spanning Tree Protocol Settings sise 367 Network Filter Settings acanaire aaaea aee a aaaea inertie endes mettre etre tie dt ee intenses 369 DHCP Server Settings trs mn a an aE E EEEE ECARE AAA rai EE E REEE nrnienirnneie 370 SNNP Settings eos cz feds cat PP aeaea EEE EE 372 QoS Settings ieaiai dan dut das abs apa taaa RAA NAERA Naa Eana ee eines SASA aka Sra ra 374 Specifying a QoS Priority Rule ses 377 RADIUS Suing is setiecicescciecnivas rA Ea ae EER EEEREN ai ari EEEE a VERE ASAA E EARE 380 EEST E n E AE A N E AE E A AE ET AAE TAE 382 ADOUt An K o ME ET A E T 385 Export and Import Buttons wscsicsccccccscsstcercscicecctsastcacanscctectenstvencavecsccecscoscesentecteusensivetcascsusctenssestenvevacsnerstucrsetessssts 386 Exporting the Radio
28. Broadband Radio Network A broadband network consists of a single master radio that is connected to your private network and one or more remote radios The master radio handles the communication between the devices connected to the remote radios and the monitoring and control software installed in your network operations center If the network has to span long distances one or more repeaters are used to connect the master to the remote radios The following diagram shows a typical broadband radio network Private Network x or Internet re RSS e lt EN COM ENCOM N Broadband Broadband Master Repeater optional Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS For information on configuring ENCOM broadband radios refer to the following topic e Configuring Broadband Radios ENCOM Broadband Remote ENCOM Broadband Remote ENCOM Broadband Remote For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 12 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Point to Point Radio Network A point to point network provides a long distance high speed backhaul for communications between the devices connected to the remote radios and the monitoring and control software installed in your network operations center The following diagram shows a typical broadband radio network Private Network or Internet ENCOM ENCOM Point to Point Point to Point un Master Remote Workstation or l
29. CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus ENCOM Radio VLAN Support By default VLAN tagged data will flow through ENCOM radios If you plan to use the ENCOM radios solely as a carrier i e a wire between two VLAN enabled switches or routers you do not have to make any configuration changes If you need the radios to perform specific VLAN related operations you will need to set the appropriate configuration options in the VLAN sub tab of the radio configuration form s Network tab The following VLAN operations are supported by the ENCOM radios e Specifying a Management VLAN e Client tagging e Client Tagging with a Management VLAN e Pruning VLANs For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 452 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Specifying a Management VLAN By default ENCOM radios are assigned a single IP address This IP address is used to manage and configure the radio using the native untagged VLAN If you want to use a specific management VLAN to access the radios you will need to configure the Management VLAN Management Address and Access Port Address sections of the radio configuration form s VLAN sub tab 4 Client Tagging Tagged Management Data C Tag Client Data VLAN ID 10 E Management Address Tagged Access Port Address Untagged IP Address 10 10 1 50 IP Address 1192 168 128 50 Network Mask 255 255 254 0 Network Mask 255 255 2
30. Change the IP address of the radio that is still powered using the radio configuration form a Repeat steps a b for the remaining radios that are in conflict 3 If one or more of the radios that are in conflict are no longer present on the network e g they were being used for testing or were replaced by a new radio simply delete them from the radio list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 70 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL User Interface General The following screen shot shows the General panel of the System Settings form Radio List C Show firmware upgrade wamings Show folder checkboxes Audio Prompts Play a sound when a long running task has completed User Settings Allow user to change radio configurations The following table describes the individual user interface settings Radio List Field Name Description Show firmware If checked warning indicators small triangular icons are displayed in the upgrade warnings Radio List panel to let you know that a radio s firmware should be upgraded to the recommended version If not checked the warning indicators are only displayed if a radio s firmware must be upgraded in order to be compatible with ENCOM STRATOS Show folder If checked checkboxes will be displayed next to the folders in the radio list checkboxes panel as shown in the example below Radio icons will be displayed on the map
31. Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Power LED O Always on Momentarily on when radio is powered up The configuration settings are logically grouped using a tabbed interface The following topics describe the settings found in each tab e Basic Settings tab e Location tab e Radio tab e Network tab e About tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 323 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc I P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus AI WIBELESS USER MANUAL Basic Settings Tab The following screen shot shows the basic configuration settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Identification Radio Name Point to Multipoint Master Radio MAC Address 00 0C 42 72 65 F2 Description Housed in low profile case Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set gt M IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Power LED Always on Momentarily on when radio is powered up The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the basic settings tab
32. Destination Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets are being forwarded to You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 261 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value in the IP header that the rule will apply to You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all DSCP values Field Name Set priority to The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Set DSCP to Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified no change will be made to the packet s DSCP value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 262 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc
33. Encom Mesh Protocol Settings The following screen shot shows the Encom Mesh Protocol tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol gos RADIUS VLAN Gateway Setting Select the Gateway Radio option if the radio is connected to the Internet If the radio is not connected to the Internet select the Standard Mesh Radio option Standard Mesh Radio Gateway Radio The following table describes the Encom Mesh Protocol settings Gateway Settings Field Name Description Standard Mesh Radio Select this option of the radio is not physically connected to the Internet Gateway Radio Select this option if the radio is physically connected to the network operations center via its Ethernet port This setting is appropriate when data typically flows from deployed radios through the the gateway to the network operations center It is not recommended when most of the traffic is meant to flow from one deployed radio to another Note Do not select this option if the radio is not connected via its Ethernet port Doing so may cause severe network instabilities For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 304 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL QoS Settings The following screen shot shows the QoS Quality of Service settings tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Pri
34. Field Namo Always On The external power LED is on as long as the radio is powered Note This option is visible only if the radio supports an external power indicator LED Momentarily on when The external power LED is on for 1 minute after the radio is powered and radio is powered up is subsequently turned off Note This option is visible only if the radio supports an external power indicator LED For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 326 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Location Tab The following screen shot shows the location settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Radio Location Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to choose a new location Get location from GPS Manually specify location Google Map Server And Cache Tr v PTa Gi Latitude A ASTAC 51 09727 E yore ne Longitude Fi AE oO g Calgary Word 3 NE ty Of Faith Church QU Icon Color a i f o 9 Goddard Ave NE D Blue v 2 S 5 m Icon Style QB Street Address The following table describes the settings found in the location tab Field Name Get location from GPS Select this option if you want the radio to get its location from the built in GPS receiver This option is not available if the radio does not contain a GPS receiver
35. General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D F4 87 C4 13 Radio Network Setup Network Type Broadband Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID 9538 RCLP Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients Enable Roaming Channel Mode 802 11 Client Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Channel 5775 MHz Output Power Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security WDS Settings P Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and save the radio settings in order to WDS Mode enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Ax Strength dBm C 00 00 F4 12 48 3B 1921681105 Radio 5 C 00 00 F4 17 AC 35 192 168 1 109 Radio 9 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 520 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL HEHE 38kMe70 t For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 521 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS Remote Radio 8 ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remote Radio 8 would be configured as follows Radio Settings DS Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D F4 12 44 4C Radio Network Setup Network Type Broadband N
36. Select one or more links in the Dynamic WDS Links table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 15 6D 84 32 71 192 168 128 50 Point to Multipoint Remote 2 C 00 15 6D 84 50 00 192 168 128 35 Point to Multipoint Remote 1 2 Click on the Move button to convert the selected dynamic links to static links This list contains the list of WDS links that are allowed to form Click on the Add button to manually add the MAC address of a remote radio to the static WDS list When selected the following form is displayed Add MAC Address Add the following MAC address to the Static WDS Links MAC address 00 01 1C ED 8D 53 Specify the MAC address of the radio you want to allow and press the OK button The new MAC address will be added to the Static WDS Links list Note ff you add the MAC address of a radio that is not known to ENCOM STRATOS only the MAC address will be displayed in the disallowed list If the radio is known to STRATOS the associated IP Address and radio name will be included Both scenarios are shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 351 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Field Name MAC Address IP Address Radio Name C 00 15 60 84 32 71 192168128560 Point o Multipoint Remote 2 C 00 2E 34 DC 30
37. Server address smtp mycompany com Pott 485 Enable SSL Authentication Auto v User name stratos mycompany com Password le From address stratos mycompany com The following table describes the individual mail server settings Mail Server Settings Field Name Enable If checked STRATOS will attempt to send notification e mails to the a list of recipients when an alert is generated Recipients are defined in the Recipients panel of the System Settings form Alerts are configured in the Alerts panel of the System Settings form Server Address Enter the address of the SMTP server This can be specified as an IP address 192 168 1 100 or a DNS name smtp mycompany com Port Enter the IP port on which the SMTP server accepts connections for outgoing mail Enable SSL Check this setting if the SMTP server requires that connections be secured by SSL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 78 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Authentication Select the type of authentication required by the SMTP server One of the following options can be used None No authentication is required No user name or password are specified Automatically chooses the best authentication Auto method available Note that this option may not always work You may need to select a specific authentication type instead Plain PLAIN authentication is used the user name and pas
38. Starting with ENCOM STRATOS V1 4 0 map tile databases are identified with the gmdb file extension Previous versions of STRATOS used the s3db file extension The s3db map tile databases are no longer compatible with ENCOM STRATOS and attempts to import these files will fail Exit Select Exit from the File menu to shut down ENCOM STRATOS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 43 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL View Menu Commands Panels Selecting Panels from the View menu displays the list of available user interface panels Alerts Bandwidth Test ltem Properties Map View Network Traffic Ping Test Radio List Spectrum Scan Task List Wireless Link Status Selecting an item that is checked will hide the associated panel Conversely selecting an item that is not checked will show the associated panel The Alerts panel is normally hidden It is automatically displayed when an alert is generated by STRATOS See the System Settings form s Alerts topic for a list of alerts that can be generated by STRATOS The Task List panel is normally hidden It is automatically displayed when you use a function that triggers a long running task such as the Restore to Factory Default or Upgrade Firmware functions These tasks run in the background and display their progress in the task list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 44 2010 2015 Enco
39. The Target Radio Modules column lists the wireless radio modules that are present on the radio The Profile Radio Modules column shows the options that are available for each wireless interface that is present on the radio STRATOS will find the best match between the profile and target radio modules and will assign these by default You can change the default assignments by selecting the appropriate items from the list boxes In the example shown above STRATOS applied the matching radio modules from the profile to the target radio modules If you didn t want to disturb the configuration of the second radio module then you would select the Don t Copy option from the second list box as shown below Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 Radiol 2 4 GHz15M Band Don t Copy Fadio2 5 8 GHz ISM Band For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 320 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 The Settings to Copy options allow you to specify what settings to import from the configuration profile Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network These are described further in the following table Option Deseription o Copy all settings Use this option when you need to configure a radio so that it matches the configuration profile exactly This option i
40. Thorncliffe Repeater Model CommpakBB 58N3 58N3 PTHP IP Address 192 168 128 62 MAC Address 00 0C 42 BB C5 63 Status Online 4 ygton Hills Panning and Zooming To pan the map move it up down left or right click and hold the left mouse button on the map The mouse pointer will change to a directional cursor as shown in the following example Move the mouse to pan the map in the desired direction Release the mouse button when you are finished To zoom the map click the left mouse pointer on the map and then use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 138 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Selecting a Radio Click the left mouse button on the radio icon to select the radio A large circle larger than the state indicator circle is displayed behind the radio to highlight the fact that it has been selected The color of the highlight circle matches the color of the radio state indicator displayed in the Radio List panel Huntington Hills Selected Radio fe entwood Fe Charleswood ND SALES RAL When you select a radio the contents of the Radio List panel tem Properties panel Wireless Link Status panel and Network Traffic panel are automatically updated to reflect the newly selected radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 139 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc
41. VLAN IDs 200 300 VLANs Virtual LANs are used to improve the performance and possibly the security of a radio network Refer to Appendix E VLAN Support for more information on implementing a VLAN based network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the VLAN settings tab Management VLAN Field Name Description Tagged Management By default the radio can be managed by connections over the native Data non tagged VLAN To be able to manage the radio using a specific VLAN check this option and enter the appropriate management VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field Enter the ID of the management VLAN a number in the range 1 4095 is required Client Tagging Field Name Tag Client Data Normally all of the radio s interfaces wireless and Ethernet act as VLAN trunks i e they carry the network traffic for all VLANs If a normal non VLAN aware device is plugged into the radio s Ethernet port its network traffic will not be tagged and it will not be able to communicate with For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 382 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL devices that are part of a VLAN Check this option to set up the radio s Ethernet port as an access port for a specific VLAN This gives devices connected to the Ethernet port access to the other devices in the specified VLAN VLAN ID Enter the ID of the client VLAN to a
42. amp KgN8D4LjE H5D C WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Group Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time minutes 1 60 AES with CBC_MAC 8ES CCM AES with CBC_MAC 8ES CCM The second 5 8 GHz radio card of Master Radio 1 would be configured as follows Note that the WDS settings only allow the radio to connect to the three remotes that are part of the network Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint Network SSID 8759 KT BF Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 40 MHz Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Channel 5775 MHz For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 N Only Hide SSID Wireless Link Rate Output Power Page 509 Wireless MAC Address 04 C4 6D 45 E4 25 Enable eMax Protocol Using Repeater Adaptive Maximum 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL WIRELESS Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and save the radio settings in order to 3 enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup
43. connect to the network Common Settings Field Name Default Access Rights RADIUS Accounting Select the access rights to assign to the user if the RADIUS server is not configured to respond to an authentication request with the user s group name The following table describes the options that are available for this setting Option Deseripon View Settings The user will be able to inspect the radio s configuration settings but will not be able to make any changes Change Settings The user will be able to inspect and change the radio s configuration settings This setting is ignored if the RADIUS server responds to an authentication request with the user s group name Check this option to send RADIUS accounting packets to the RADIUS server This information is normally used for user billing and is not usually needed for typical ENCOM radio networks For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 264 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc SA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL VLAN Settings The following screen shot shows the VLAN settings tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP GoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data VLAN ID 400 s VLAN ID 600 VLAN Priority 5 High v Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 100 IP Address 192 168
44. video traffic received by the repeater would be forwarded to the devices connected to the repeater s Ethernet port In the example we do not want the video traffic from the Remote A2 and Remote A3 radios from being forwarded to camera connected to the repeater To MasterA Radio g 4 N Remote lt gt A2 N i 7 N Repeater Remote J A1 A1 Remote 4 P A3 mm Must block outgoing Ethernet traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 478 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e Multicast traffic entering one of the repeater radio s wireless interfaces must not be forwarded to the radio s other wireless interfaces This prevents the traffic from one downstream radio from being forwarded to another downstream radio To Master A Radio el px Remote lt nm UN ZS 7 Must block wireless ae T Repeater Remote i to wireless traffic A1 A1 ri ri t J i Blocking the wireless to wireless traffic will block multicast traffic between physical radio cards the WDS links that form between the master radio and its downstream radios and the wireless connections that form between wireless client devices such as laptops or wireless cameras and the radios In the case where the master radio contains a single radio card but has wireless connections to two remote radios blocking wireless to wireless traffic will pre
45. will be assigned to devices that use dynamic addressing IP addresses outside this range would be manually assigned to devices that do not use dynamic addressing For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 370 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings Field Name Network Mask Enter the network mask that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address Enter the IP Address of the default gateway that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 The default gateway is the radio or router that provides access to devices outside of the local network DNS Server Address Enter the IP Address of the DNS server that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example DNS Server Address 192 168 1 2 If there is no DNS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field WINS Server Address Enter the IP Address of the WINS server that will be
46. 1 100 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 378 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value in the IP header that the rule will apply to You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all DSCP values Field Name Set priority to The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Set DSCP to Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified no change will be made to the packet s DSCP value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 379 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL RADIUS Settings The following screen shot shows the RADIUS settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS R
47. 1 tab and the Wireless Security sub tab 5 Update the settings using the following guidelines Wireless Security Select the Dynamic option Type ds Static key based security especially WEP is no longer considered secure and should only be used if client devices that don t support WPA or WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Pre If the WPA Personal option is checked enter a strong password in Shared Key the WPA Personal Pre Shared Key field The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA2 Personal Check this option WPA2 is the most secure option that can be easily set up and managed WPA2 Personal If the WPA2 Personal option is checked enter a strong password in Pre Shared Key the WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key field The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA Enterprise Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA Enterprise leave this option unchecked For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 496 2010 2015 Encom
48. 128 70 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning Prune VLANs VLAN IDs 200 300 VLANs Virtual LANs are used to improve the performance and possibly the security of a radio network Refer to Appendix E VLAN Support for more information on implementing a VLAN based network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the VLAN settings tab Management VLAN Field Name Description Tagged Management By default the radio can be managed by connections over the native Data non tagged VLAN To be able to manage the radio using a specific VLAN check this option and enter the appropriate management VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field Enter the ID of the management VLAN a number in the range 1 4095 is required Client Tagging Field Name Tag Client Data Normally all of the radio s interfaces wireless and Ethernet act as VLAN trunks i e they carry the network traffic for all VLANs If a normal non VLAN aware device is plugged into the radio s Ethernet port its network traffic will not be tagged and it will not be able to communicate with For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 265 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL devices that are part of a VLAN Check this option to set up the radio s Ethernet port as an access port for a specific VLAN
49. 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 The configuration settings are logically grouped using a tabbed interface The following topics describe the settings found in each tab e Basic Settings tab e Location tab e Radio tab e Network tab e About tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 231 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus D WIRELESS Basic Settings Tab The following screen shot shows the basic configuration settings tab for a point to point radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Identification Radio Name Point to Point Radio 1 Radio MAC Address 00 0C 42 BB C5 75 Description South east comer of roof Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set gt b IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the basic settings tab Identification Field Name Description Radio Name
50. 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio router or switch that allows this radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address would normally be the IP address of the network s gateway radio or the IP address of the router or switch used to access external networks Access Port Address Ethernet Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 50 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the client VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the client VLAN s network mask Field Namo Prune VLANs Check this option to prevent the radio f
51. Click the Add button to create a new priority rule Enter the appropriate rule settings in the QoS Priority Rule form that is displayed Add button Select a priority rule and then click on the Edit button to modify the rule settings Edit button Alternatively you can double click on the rule you want to modify a To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button to actually delete it Remove button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 215 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc L encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELESS USER MANUAL Specifying a QoS Priority Rule The following screen shot shows the QoS Priority Rule form for a broadband radio QoS Priority Rule Name Traffic controller Matching Criteria Protocol Port s 2773 Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Action Set priority to 7 Highest Set DSCP to The QoS Priority Rule form allows you to define a traffic priority rule The following tables describe the QoS rule settings Field Name Description Name Enter a short description that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Matching Criteria Field Name Description Protocol Specify the protocol that the rule will apply to You can select one of the following values All All network traffic will be matched When you select this option one o
52. Colors e Sorting the Wireless Link Status List e Wireless Link Context Menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 144 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link Status Toolbar The Wireless Link Status toolbar allows you to control the local and remote on radio antenna alignment functions Local Alignment 0 OnRadio Alignment Enable for 30 minutes The following table describes the options and controls found in the map toolbar Field Name Local Alignment The local antennal alignment button allows you to start and stop the local Enable antenna alignment sound Local Alignment To enable the local antenna alignment click the Enable button the button text will change to Disable ff a wireless link is present in the Wireless Link Status table a sound will be played through the computer s speakers that reflects the transmitted signal strength of the selected wireless link A higher pitch indicates a higher signal strength and a lower pitch indicates a lower signal strength To align the antenna of a radio e Click the Enable button to start the antenna alignment process e Select the radio this is normally a radio that has a directional antenna e Select the wireless link to monitor if the radio has more than one active link e Move the antenna to the left and right as well as up and down until the highest pitch sound is encou
53. Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 427 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Under normal operation the network is not excessively loaded However when several users were accessing the network with their laptops it was noted that the network performance degraded and the video feeds suffered from dropped frames and jerky behavior In order to prevent the laptop traffic from impacting the more important video and controller traffic it was decided use the WMM prioritization scheme This scheme allows the video and traffic controller protocols to be given higher priority and has the added benefit of optimizing the video streams By analyzing the network it was also noted that the repeater radios are only used to transfer network traffic between the network operation center and the devices connected to the remote radios Because of this it is also possible to use the WMM QoS option to simplify the configuration of the repeater radios The QoS configuration settings for each of the 5 radios are described in the following topics e Master and Remote Radio Configuration e Repeater Radio Configuration Because WMM is not compatible with the eMax protocol you must disable eMax in the wireless radio cards and lose the throughput enhancements available when eMax is enabled If you are using Point to Multipoint radios configured for N Mode operation you cannot disa
54. Diffie Hellman MODP 2048 bit algorithm Use Imported ATLS certificate that has been imported into the Certificates radio is used This option is only used when the EAP Method is set to EAP TLS It is hidden if the EAP TLS option is not selected For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 248 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 N L ELESSE Encryption Algorithms Field Name Unicast Ciphers Group Ciphers aa Field Name Name Group Key Update Time Description Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames sent to individual radios The following option is available Option Description Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network This TKIP option is not available in point to point devices Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames broadcast to all radios The following option is available Option Description Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network This TKIP option is not available in point to point devices Description The interval at which the dynamically generated keys are updated For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 249 2010 2015 Enco
55. EA An EEEE EREE EE SSAA EARRA EAE AER adnate dise dre EA an TRE Services Discovery Services Monitoring secrets tienne dr aaa kA ERAAN a EAA Eea Taea Ea E AE EREE AAEN AREARE IP Address Conflict Form Recovering from an IP Address Conflict User INfteriaGe GOMer alls ci cciycescscesevescesstssdnceesienecabscnlapatndavarsiecicisedeuesneaasehssteseszsdessteadescedidinesdbansece s User Interface RSSI Thresholds is User Interface CCQ Thresholds sise Networking Mail Server serein vesecs conan cave coiavisasaveccrioesiei capers ntevianansesateuscavencicasess Netw orkingi Proxy SEFVEr 48 Liens sacthdocesaeadasscedavesoddhunsseceaybd coutineascedeacenesrancevdthedesceduertcasiendeents Notifications Alerts a aa AT a E AEA a EREA EENES Notifications RecipieMiS renina lt a dsogtcactvdsaresacnendaedaedseabebhescushdahasaenssersuartead cecdaneed Miscellaneous Databases criscini aR E E EAER AEA RA ssesrceiavennaseteiscavenicieasals Status S LOJN ge raene a aai draa Ee aeiaai e A A a re Lines sets msn eines ee Rte cn Status Performance Help Menu Commands Help Topics Licensing Requesting a New License sise Activating a New LICenSe 22 8 nh s ane eR a aerea aaea a aeaea ai as intestins tune Performing a Manual Activation sise Requesting a License Upgrade Upgrading an Existing License sise Performing a Manual Up
56. Enter a name used to identify the radio up to a maximum of 64 characters The name you enter will be displayed in the radio list and in all other places where a reference to the radio is made IP ddress Mac Address H n Default H 3 Mesh Netw El 9 Pointsto Rei H 22 Point to Point Radio 1 Radio MAC Address Displays the MAC address assigned to the radio This is essentially the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet adapter For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 232 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELES Identification S USER MANUAL Feld Name Enter an optional description for the radio This field allows you to keep track of ad hoc information associated with the radio without adding clutter to the radio name The radio description is displayed in the radio properties panel Point to Point Radio 1 E Identification Name Description Model Firmware Version Regulatory Domain Field Name Country Name IP Address Settings Field Name Obtain an IP address automatically Specify a static IP address Select the country in which the radio is operating Certain countries have limitations on the radio power output allowed frequency ranges and frequency bands Failure to select the appropriate country can result in a radio that is operating outside of the legally allowed ranges If the radio is operating in the United States or Canada yo
57. IP addresses outside this range would be manually assigned to devices that do not use dynamic addressing For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 209 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings Field Name Network Mask Enter the network mask that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address Enter the IP Address of the default gateway that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 The default gateway is the radio or router that provides access to devices outside of the local network DNS Server Address Enter the IP Address of the DNS server that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example DNS Server Address 192 168 1 2 If there is no DNS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field WINS Server Address Enter the IP Address of the WINS server that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing T
58. Internet you will need to perform a manual activation Click the Yes button to proceed The Manual Activation Request page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Manual Activation Request 1 Click the Create Activation Request File button to create an activation request file Save the file to a convenient location on your computer s hard drive Create Activation Request File 2 Email the activation request file to your ENCOM sales representative Indicate that you are requesting a manual license activation Encom will process the activation request file and will send you an activation file by e mail When you receive this file select the Finish Manual Activation option in the first page of this wizard 3 Click the Close button to return to ENCOM STRATOS plus 11 Click the Create Activation Request File button to create the request file 12 Email the request file to your ENCOM sales representative for processing Please include the following information with your request e Company name e Contact name e Contact email address 13 When your request has been processed a license activation file will be sent to the email address that you specified in the request Refer to the Performing a Manual Activation topic for instructions on manually activating your license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 98 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL P
59. LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address would normally be the IP address of the network s gateway radio or the IP address of the router or switch used to access external networks Access Port Address Ethernet Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 50 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the client VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the client VLAN s network mask Field Namo Prune VLANs Check this option to prevent the radio for forwarding network traffic associated with specific VLAN IDs VLAN IDs Enter one or more VLAN IDs to prune Separate individual IDs with commas Any incoming network traffic that matches the specified VLAN IDs will be dropped b
60. MANUAL 3 Select the license that supports the number of radios in your network 1 First determine the license that best matches the number of radios in your network You can start with a small number of radios and later upgrade to a larger number as your network grows Upgrade from 20 to 50 radios v 4 Order your license upgrade from your ENCOM sales representative or use the contact information shown in step 2 If an e mail client is installed on your computer click on the licensing encomwireless com link to create a pre populated upgrade request e mail Stratos license request Upgrade from 20 to 50 radios SEE File Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help ae a X OYeF 0 L Ga To licensing encomwireless com Ge Subject Stratos license request Upgrade from 20 to 50 radios Times New Roman v 12 v E B Z UA For license serial number NACXG DIM57L C24JD R2 YD HRRS6 4 Please include the following information with your request e Company name e Contact name e Contact email address e Purchase Order number if you are using a purchase order 5 When your request has been processed a confirmation of the upgrade will be sent to the email address that you specified in the request Refer to the Upgrading an Existing License topic for instructions on upgrading your license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 103 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM ST
61. MANUAL The VLAN configuration for Radio 4 would be as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Tagged Management Data VLAN ID 10 Management Address Wireless IP Address 10 10 1 53 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 E Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning C Prune VLANs Client Tagging Tag Client Data VLAN ID 30 E VLAN Priority 5 High v Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 192 168 1 53 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The Management VLAN is enabled and set to VLAN ID 10 The IP address of the radio s wireless interface is set to a value that is compatible with the other radios in the network According to the network diagram only traffic cameras are connected to this radio Because of this itis possible to perform VLAN tagging within the radio The radio is therefore configured to tag the Ethernet traffic with VLAN ID 30 This will present the network traffic from VLAN ID 30 as untagged data on the radio s Ethernet port Data sent from the cameras will automatically be tagged with VLAN ID 30 by the radio Network traffic from the other VLANs will not be present on the Ethernet port Since the radio s Ethernet interface is directly connected to the cameras it and the cameras must be assigned an IP address that is compatible with the network address range assigned to VLAN ID 30 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Vers
62. Network 1 Master o L SF S 9 a gt E a 7 3 Remote Remote Remote Mobile Computer Pulse k Pulse K Radio Radio Traffic Traffic Traffic Controller Controller Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 506 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The 2 4 GHz radio cards Radio 1 in the E Lite radios are used for local wireless device access for laptops smart phones etc They are connected to omnidirectional antennas for maximum local coverage To simplify access to the 2 4 GHz network all of the 2 4 GHz radios should be configured with the same Network Type Network SSID Channel Mode and Wireless Security settings That way a client device can connect to any of the 2 4 GHz radios in the network using a single connection profile The 5 8 GHz radio cards Radio 2 in the E Lite radios are used for the backbone of the network They are connected to the integrated panel antenna for maximum signal range In order for the radios in the 5 8 GHz network to communicate with each other they must be configured with the same Network Type Network SSID Channel Mode eMax Protocol and Wireless Security settings The configuration settings for each of the 4 radios are shown in the following topics e Master Radio 1 e Remote Radios 2 3 and 4 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 507 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc
63. Performance Option Historical Trending Discovery Command Queue Status Command Queue Task Command Queue Monitor Command Queue Find Radio Command Queue Configuration Command Queue Max value encountered 2 To view the state of a particular queue simply select it from the Performance Option list The Historical Trending chart displays the number of commands currently in the queue For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 89 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Help Menu Commands Help Topics Select Help Topics from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS on line help For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 90 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Licensing Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form This form allows you to request and install licenses that enable advanced monitoring features for a specific number of ENCOM radios The advanced features are e Display of wireless link lines on the map e Display of radio status halos on the map e Detection and notification of alarm conditions A new installation of STRATOS supports advanced features for up to 5 radios To support more than 5 radios you need to purchase the appropriate license level and activate the license using the licensing form If your network contains more radios than are support
64. Radio 8 e Remote Radio 9 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 515 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Master Radio 5 Master Radio 5 would be configured as follows Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D F4 12 44 3B Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID 9538 RCLP Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz 802 11 Client Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Channel 5775 MHz v Output Power Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and save the radio settings in order to j enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rix Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm C 00 0D F4 24 F3 4C 192 168 20 106 Radio 6 C 00 00 F4 87 04 13 192168 20107 Radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 516 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL HEHE 38kMe70 t For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 517 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom
65. Reboot from the Radio menu to restart the selected radio To reboot a radio 1 Select the radio you want to reboot from the Radio List panel 2 Select Reboot from the Radio menu You will be prompted for permission to reboot the radio Reboot Radio J Do you really want to reboot the Mesh Radio 1 radio 3 Click the Yes button 4 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 5 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the reboot process Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At MeshRadio1 Rebooting radio Sending reboot command 13 2 15 44 PM 6 After the radio has been restarted and is back on line the task item will indicate that the radio has been successfully rebooted Radio Name Task Progress in Started At Finished At MeshRadiol Rebooting radio 100 Radio available 2 15 44 PM 2 16 16 PM For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 61 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Folder Menu Commands Rename Select Rename from the Folder menu to change the name of the selected folder Note You can rename any folder that you have created yourself You cannot rename the Default folder that is created by ENCOM STRATOS To rename a folder 1 Select the folder you want to rename from the Radio List panel 2 Select Rename from the Folder menu The Rename Folder form is displayed
66. SSID from being broadcast This will prevent unauthorized client devices from detecting your network and will prevent casual discovery of your network If client devices are allowed to connect to the network they will have to be manually configured with the SSID Most wireless N client devices can only detect networks that are using 20 MHz or 40 MHz channel modes and most A B G client devices can only detect networks that are using the 20 MHz channel mode If you do not need to support client devices and your network does not need to handle a high amount of network traffic you Page 498 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus can set the channel mode to 5 MHZ or 10 MHz This will prevent casual discovery of your network For A B G radios use the 40 MHZ mode for both security and maximum bandwidth Channel If using a 5 8 GHz radio and you do not need to support client devices set the channel to a frequency that is not supported by client devices This will prevent unauthorized devices from being able to detect your network The following is a list of the 5 8 GHz band frequencies that are normally supported by client devices in North America e 5180 MHz e 5200 MHz e 5220 MHz e 5240 MHz e 5745 MHz e 5765 MHz e 5785 MHz e 5805 MHz e 5825 MHz If using a 2 4 GHz radio all of the available frequencies are supported by client devices If using a 4 9 GHz radio n
67. STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Field Name MAC Address IP Address Radio Name C 00 0D B9 17 91 04 192 168 1 81 CommpakBB 58 58 Dual C 00 0E 34 DC 30 1C Click on the Remove button to remove links from the static WDS list To remove static WDS links Remove button Lo 1 Select one or more links in the Static WDS Links table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 00 B9 17 91 04 192 168 1 81 CommpakBB 58 58 Dual C 00 0D 89 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 CompakBB 58 Single 2 Click on the Remove button to remove the selected static links The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Dynamic and Static WDS Link tables MAC Address The MAC address of the remote radio IP Address The IP address of the remote radio The name assigned to the remote radio Interface Identifies the wireless radio module on the remote radio The first radio module is Radio 1 the second radio module is Radio 2 etc Tx Rx Strength The transmit and receive signal strengths in dBm of the wireless connection between this radio and the remote radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 195 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless security settings tab for a broadband radio Radio Sett
68. The following topics describe these in more detail e Static Security Options e Dynamic Security Options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 244 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Static Security Settings The following screen shot shows the static security options for a point to point radio Radio Settings Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Static Security Options Encryption Level 128 bit Encryption Key 1 Active Key Key 1 v Encryption Key 2 Encryption Key 3 Enter 32 or more character HEX keys Key length must be even Encryption Key 4 The following table describes the static security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Static Security Options Field Name Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level to use Only one option is available for point to point radios Option Description o 128 bit AES Uses the 128 bit AES block encryption algorithm couple with the CBC MAC block chaining technique for added security This is the most secure of the three static security options Active Key Select the encryption key to use Although you can define up to four static encryption keys only one key can be active Encryption Key 1 4 Enter the hexadecimal character sequence to use for the encryption key H
69. The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters vii Make sure that the AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM options are checked viii Make sure that the Temporal key Integrity Protocol TKIP options are unchecked For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 534 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL ix The contents of your wireless security tab should look like this Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Dynamic 1 RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types E WPA Personal ed Ke THIS SPACE FOR RENT V WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key 19ABCr W 96fE E WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers E Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Group Ciphers E Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 7 AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 x If you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab and then repeat steps iii ix xi Press the OK button to save the new security settings to the radio c If the radio you are updating is not directly connected to the TMC STRATOS will no longer be able to communicate with it The radio will eventually go off line
70. To configure a radio using a saved configuration file 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Import button The Select configuration profile file form is displayed Select configuration profile file to import Look in Profiles B Mesh Radio 1 profile My Recent Documents lt File name Mesh Radio 1 profile I My Network Files of ype Profile files 2 Select the configuration profile you want to import and press the Open button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 319 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 The Import Radio Settings form will be displayed Import Radio Settings Instructions The default import options have been selected Make any changes required and press the OK button to proceed Radio Module Assignments Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 2 4 GHz ISM Band Radiol 2 4 GHz ISM Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band y Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band Settings to Copy Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network 4 The Radio Module Assignments group allows you to specify how the radio module settings are applied Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 2 4 GHz ISM Band v p Radiol 2 4GHz15M Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Radio 2 5 8 GHz1SM Band
71. Traffic 2 In the Radio List select the radio that is closest to the computer running the ENCOM STRATOS application This is either the radio that is connected to your network via its Ethernet port or the radio that is the least number of wireless connections hops from your computer For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 157 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 Specify the IP address of the remote radio in the IP Address list IPAddress 192 168 1 60 v The drop down list allows you to select the IP address of a remote radio that is wirelessly connected to your radio If you want to test against a radio that is not directly connected to your radio e g if your radio is wirelessly connected to a repeater but you want to test against the remote radio to which the repeater is connected manually type in the IP address of the remote radio Please refer to the following diagram for more info jt q Private Network or Internet ENCOM Master ENCOM Repeater ENCOM Remote radio to which Encom wirelessly connected to the wirelessly connected to the STRATOS is connected Master radio Repeater radio Select this radio s address Type in this radio s address from the drop down list Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS 4 Specify the rate at which you want to perform the test from the Max Speed list Max Speed max possible
72. WMM priority or to the incoming VLAN priority if VLANs are being used For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 374 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL WMM is used to prioritize certain type of traffic such as VOIP Voice Over IP and video streams that are sensitive to network latency and capacity issues Note The WMMVLAN priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Use DSCP Priorities Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the DSCP priority of the incoming data packets Note The DSCP priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Priority Rules Field Name Description Priority Rule List By default ENCOM STRATOS will assign the highest priority to the radio management traffic Other types of network traffic can be assigned to specific priority queues by creating custom priority rules The Priority Rules list displays the custom priority rules that you have defined When defining a priority rule you specify the type of traffic that the rule is to act upon and the priority to assign to the matching traffic In the following example two priority rules have been defined Name Protocol Ports DSCP Source Address es Destination Addr
73. a Secure Passw ord ccccsccsccssssssssessccsssssesssssvsstcscoscessostessscesscanesstevsoncsccasesansesancossuaessazsvbanesccnacsaes 536 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 9 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Chapter 1 Introduction This guide describes the operation of the ENCOM STRATOS Network Visualization and Management System ENCOM STRATOS is a Microsoft Windows based application that is used to manage ENCOM broadband point to point and mesh radios With ENCOM STRATOS you can e Manage your ENCOM radios with a friendly user interface e Remotely and configure your ENCOM radios e View and optimize your wireless network performance e Diagnose network and communication issues This guide contains instructions suggestions and information that will help you set up your radios and achieve optimal performance from your equipment ENCOM Radio Network Overview ENCOM provides four distinct types of radios These are e Standard broadband radios e Point to point high capacity radios e Mesh radios e Point to Multipoint radios Although each type of radio is targeted at a particular application they are flexible enough to be used in other roles if required Click on the appropriate link for more information on a specific radio type For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 11 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL
74. are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address would normally be the IP address of the network s gateway radio or the IP address of the router or switch used to access external networks Access Port Address Ethernet Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 50 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the client VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the client VLAN s network mask Field Namo Prune VLANs Check this option to prevent the radio for forwarding network traffic associated with specific VLAN IDs VLAN IDs Enter one or more VLAN IDs to prune Separate individual IDs with commas Any incoming network traffic that matches the specified
75. blank Press the Login button to accept the login credentials and log into STRATOS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 28 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom User Interface ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the main window of a typical ENCOM STRATOS session Encom Stratos V1 4 0 0 File View Radio Folder Tools Help Radio List IP Address H gj Default ba Nose Hill Broadband Network Dalhousie Remote McKnight Remote N Hill Mast Name MAC Address Ga University Mesh Network The main features of the STRATOS user interface include Triwood a A PA BE Montgomery S gt Fo 4 University Heights Ban Trail OpenStreetMap bop data 62013 GpenstsetMap hia North Haven 7 Brentwood Varsity Charleswood i Highwood Collingwood Rosemont Mount Pleasant Wireless Link Status Interface Radio 1 Radio 2 Radio 2 Local Alignment Status Align Default Tuxedo lt Radio Name Nose Hill Master McKnight Remote On Radio Alignment MAC Address 00 15 6D 85 52 03 00 15 60 85 24 59 Remote 00 15 6D 85 12 EE Enable for 30 minutes IP Address Tx Rx Rate Mb 192 168 128 61 120 0 240 0 192 168 128 52 13 0 7 30 0 192 168 128 51 135 0 60 0 gt 110 8 100 90 Show RSSI for All Chains 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 O Chain0 Tx Chain
76. click on a radio the following context menu is displayed Add to Ping Test Delete Del Add Folder Add Radio Find Radios If you click on empty space the following context menu is displayed The context menu provides a convenient way to access functions that are already available in the main menu bar For more information on the individual context menu items click the left mouse button on the menu item text in the screenshots shown above For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 131 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Map View Panel The Map Viewpanel allows you to see the location of your radios on a map A typical map display showing the location of five radios is shown below OpenStreet Whitehorn The map panel contains two user interface elements e Map Toolbar e Map Display For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 132 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Map Toolbar The map toolbar allows you to control the look and behavior of the map OpenStreet v y P Server And Cache v m y RSSI w The following table describes the options and controls found in the map toolbar Field Name Map Provider The left hand drop down list box allows you to choose the map provider and the map style OpenStreet v In addition to regular road maps several m
77. click the left mouse button on an alert to select the associated radio Remove Selected Alerts Del Removes the selected alerts from the list This option is grayed out if an alert is not currently selected Remove All Alerts Remove all alerts from the list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 113 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio List Panel The Radio List panel contains the list of all radios known to ENCOM STRATOS By default it appears on the left hand side of the STRATOS main window Search Name IP Address Mac Address Defa j P Folder 7 i Checkbox Cll 63 Mesh Neve Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 i Mesh Radio 3 Point to Point Network L Point to Point Radio 1 6 Point to Point Radio 2 The radio list panel contains the following user interface items e ltem search box e Display type tabs e Radio tree view Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the features of the Radio List panel e Selecting Radios e Moving Radios and Folders e Setting the Location of a Radio e Adding Radios to a Ping Test e Showing and Hiding Radios on the Map e Radio List Context Menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 114 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Item Search Box The search box allows you to search the radio
78. clock Nothing The radio s time will only be synchronized when a configuration change is made by STRATOS NTP Server The radio will synchronize its internal clock to the specified NTP server time at regular intervals GPS Receiver The radio will synchronize its internal clock from the built in GPS receiver Note This option is only available if the radio contains a GPS receiver Primary NTP Server Specify the IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize the radio s internal clock This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 298 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Secondary NTP Server System Clock Field Name Time Zone USER MANUAL Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected If applicable specify the IP address of the secondary NTP server This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 If there is no secondary NTP server in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected Description Select the time zone in which the radio is operating Note that the time zone has no effect o
79. communication links You can choose from the following options Wireless Security Types Option Desorption o O Disabled Select this option if you do not want to enable security This option is not recommended since it allows anyone that has knowledge of the Network s SSID to connect to the network Static This option enables wireless encryption that uses static keys This is an older technology that is not as secure as the Dynamic option It can however provide for a more stable network Dynamic This option enables wireless encryption that uses dynamically allocated keys This option provides the most secure communication link RADIUS MAC Check this option if you use a RADIUS server for authentication Authentication A Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS server acts as a centralized access and authorization point for network service The authentication service is then handled by the RADIUS server instead of For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 357 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL the ENCOM radios Important The security settings must be the identical for all radios on the network Radios that have different security settings will not be able to communicate with each other Note Encom Wireless Data Solutions highly recommends that you confer with your I T department to determine the appropriate level of security for your network The St
80. connect to any compatible master radio it detects To force the remote radio to connect to a specific master radio uncheck the Enable Roaming option and enter or select the MAC address of the master radio in the Parent Radio MAC Address field This will prevent the remote radio from connecting to an unauthorized master radio that is placed in the vicinity of the remote Page 488 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Radio Settings sub tab for a master radio will look similar to the following example Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint Atheros AR 5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 55 72 CD Network SSID UT Z kSTe2 0 Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 10 MHz Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Channel 5775 MHz Enable eMax Protocol Hide SSID Using Repeater C Allow Clients 802 11 Client Wireless Link Rate Adaptive v M Output Power Maximum 7 f you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab and then repeat steps 5 6 8 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 489 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data
81. connectors to prevent water ingress If possible you should install the radios with the Ethernet connector at the bottom Make sure that all cables and connectors are appropriately sealed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 400 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 401 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix A RF Exposure FCC This equipment has been designed to comply with FCC RF exposure requirements outlined in Parts 2 1091 2 1093 and 15 247 b 4 Deviation from the recommended installation may violate RF exposure requirements To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements for mobile transmitting devices only use or install this transmitter at locations where there is at least 23cm 9 separation distance between the antenna and all persons Health Canada The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s website at http dsp psd pwgsc gc ca Collection H46 2 99 237E pdf For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 402 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 403 2010 2
82. default gateway s IP address must be in the same subnet as the radio s IP address Power LED Field Namo Always On The external power LED is on as long as the radio is powered Note This option is visible only if the radio supports an external power indicator LED Momentarily on when The external power LED is on for 1 minute after the radio is powered and radio is powered up is subsequently turned off Note This option is visible only if the radio supports an external power indicator LED For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 278 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Location Tab The following screen shot shows the location settings tab for a mesh radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Radio Location Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to choose a new location Google Map v U Server And Cache v 2 C4 A Canmore S Park Latitude gashaw Rd NW 51 07632 Longitude MN IS eez 114 11263 i ty Icon Color i 27 Ave NW g D Blue v 4 26 Ave NW _ Banff Trail 9 Zz 2 Icon Style 23 Ave NW Street Address The following table describes the settings found in the location tab Field Name Get location from GPS Select this option if you want the radio to get its location from the built in GPS receiver This option is not available if the radio does no
83. encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Map Context Menu Click the right mouse button on the radio icon to display the map s context menu This menu allows you to perform some common operations on the selected radio as E GET AL 5 M Thorncliffe Repeater Model CommpakBB 58N3 58N3 PTHP IP Address 192 168 128 62 MAC Address 00 0C 42 BB C5 63 Status Online Configure Change Password Ping Test Delete The context menu provides a convenient way to access functions that are already available in the main menu bar For more information on the individual context menu items click the left mouse button on the menu text in the screenshot shown below Configure Change Password Ping Test Delete Note that you can double click the left mouse button on the radio icon to display the Radio Configuration form For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 140 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Setting the Location of a Radio To add radios to a ping test 1 Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Select Add to Ping Test from the radio list context menu The Ping Test panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders t
84. following table describes the options that are available for this setting Option Deseripon View Settings The user will be able to inspect the radio s configuration settings but will not be able to make any changes Change Settings The user will be able to inspect and change the radio s configuration settings This setting is ignored if the RADIUS server responds to an authentication request with the user s group name Check this option to send RADIUS accounting packets to the RADIUS server This information is normally used for user billing and is not usually needed for typical ENCOM radio networks For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 220 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc SA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL VLAN Settings The following screen shot shows the VLAN settings tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data WLAN ID 400 VLAN ID 600 VLAN Priority 5 High v Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 100 IP Address 192 168 128 70 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning Prune VLANs VLAN IDs 200 300 VLANs Virtual LANs are used to improve the perform
85. from gaining access to and interfering with your infrastructure you need to configure the radios with the appropriate security settings This appendix describes the configuration settings that affect the security of ENCOM radios and recommendations that will maximize the security of your network In order to protect the entire system the other devices that make up the network computers routers switches traffic controllers traffic cameras etc also need to be secured Due to the great variety of these devices it is not possible to address them in this document Please refer to the documentation that was provided with these devices for more information Specific details and recommendations can be found in the following topics e Set the Administrative Password e Secure Radio Configuration Settings e Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios e Radio Settings N Cards e Radio Settings A and B G Cards e WDS Settings e Wireless Security Settings N Cards e Wireless Security Settings A and B G Cards e Mesh radios e Radio Settings Mesh Radios e MAC Access Settings e Wireless Security Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 482 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Set the Administrative Password By default the administrative password of an ENCOM radio is blank You should assign a strong pass word to the radio before adding it to your network To secure a
86. in order for them to communicate with each other Wireless Link Rate Mesh radios use an adaptive algorithm to choose the best bit rate for the current link conditions This setting is for your information only and cannot be changed Output Power Select the wireless radio s output power Unless constrained by the Regulatory Domain that the radio is operating in you should use the Maximum power setting when the radio is deployed in the field If the radio is being provisioned or tested in a bench environment you should use the Lowpower setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 285 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus ELE USER MANUAL MAC Access Settings The following screen shot shows the MAC Access tab for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access wireless N Wireless Securty MAC Access Settings Limit connections to links with ASSI greater than 80 dBm 90 to 70 MAC Access Setup Allowed MAC Addresses MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm C 00 15 60 55 72 F3 1921680133 Mesh Radio 1 Radio 1 71 4 64 C 001560 55 C2 86 192 168 0172 Mesh Radio 3 Radio 1 78 2 78 Disallowed MAC Addresses MAC Address IP Address Radio Name The settings on this tab are used to prevent WDS Wireless Distribution System connections from forming between specific radios This allows you to disable the generation of weak or
87. is active the strength of the wireless traffic for each frequency channel is displayed in the graph The red bars show the current strength of the wireless traffic and horizontal black lines shows the maximum signal strength encountered in dBm as shown in the following screen shot Radio Mesh Radio 1 Signal Strength dBm halo Nene Maximum Signal Strength Encountered Current Signal Strength 2407 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 2467 Frequency Ta 7 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 171 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL If you have selected more than one channel mode STRATOS will cycle through each of the selected channel modes at 10 second intervals The graph will display the traffic encountered in the currently active channel mode If there is no traffic in the active channel mode the graph is left blank The following graphs show a typical spectrum scan session where all of the channel modes are being scanned Radio CommpakBB 58 24 Dual Radio CommpakBB 58 24 Dual 5 MHz Channel Mode 10 MHz Channel Mode Radio CommpakBB 58 24 Dual 20 MHz Channel Mode Radio CommpakBB 58 24 Dual O 40 MHz Channel Mode 8 In order to get a good idea of the maximum wireless traffic in your area you should let the spectrum scan run for a reasonable period of time at least a co
88. list based on a complete or partial match of the characters entered in the search box To use this feature 1 Enter the text you want to find in the search box as shown in the following example mesh The search is not case sensitive searching for mesh or MESH will find the same items 2 Click the button at the right of the search box or press the Enter key on the keyboard to perform the search 3 The first item in the radio list that contains the search text will be selected as shown in the following example El lv a Default CommpakBB 49 Single i 3 CommpakBB 58 Single trente Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 i Mesh Radio 3 v Point to Point Network E Point to Point Radio1 6 i E Point to Point Radio 2 4 Click the button or press the Enter key again to find the next matching item Gl lv pu Default i CommpakBB 49 Single i CommpakBB 58 Single E v a Mesh Network ganeansenssnsnsesnsenanncensanannea Mesh Radio 2 i Mesh Radio 3 v Point to Point Network E Point to Point Radio 1 6 Point to Point Radio 2 If the last matching item is currently selected the search will resume from the beginning of the list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 115 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Display Type Tabs ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The tabs at the top of the radio list allow you to display the radios in three formats r
89. location assigned to the radio Google Map y 0 J McCall Lake Sports Park irways j Parkj 1 2010 Bolt Jap data 2010 Tele Atlas To set a new location For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 181 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e Press and hold down the Shift key on your computer s keyboard e Click the left mouse button at the location you want to assign to the radio e The green marker will move to the selected position Note Refer to the Map Panel topic for more information on the embedded map features Street Address Enter the street address of the radio if applicable This information is optional For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 182 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Tab ENCOM broadband radios contain at least one and as many as four wireless radio modules Each wireless radio module is configured in its own tab The first radio module is configured in the Radio 1 tab the second radio is configured in the Radio 2 tab and so on The following screen shot shows the radio settings tab for a broadband radio Basic Settings Location Radio1 Radio 2 Network About Radio Settings wos Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 00 89 21 5B E0 Radio Network Setup
90. mechanism was implemented to prevent the video streams from interfering with STRATOS and with the traffic controllers Assuming that the network operations center communicates with the traffic controllers on TCP port 6000 you would configure the radios QoS settings as follows 1 Enable the Network Traffic Prioritization option in the radio configuration form s QoS tab NTP Client Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable s C Use Wek Le Fr pot using the eMax protocol C Use DSCPYh QoS Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Addresses Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 420 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 2 Create the traffic controller priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Traffic controllers Enter a name that describes the data affected by the rule TCP v Pois 6000 Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Assign a high priority to the rule Set priority to FE Highest Set DSCP to 3 Press OK to create the new rule NTP Client Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prior
91. mesh radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio2 Network About Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol QoS RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using Nothing don t synchronize v Primary NTP Server Secondary NTP Server System Clock Time Zone lt Not Set gt M Because a large number of configuration options are available the network configuration tab is split up into a number of sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Time Settings e DHCP Server Settings e SNMP Settings e Encom Mesh Protocol Settings e QoS Quality of Service Settings e RADIUS Settings e VLAN Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 297 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Time Settings The following screen shot shows the NTP settings tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol QoS RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using NTP Server v Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 System Clock Time Zone GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada v The following table describes the time synchronization settings Time Synchronization Field Name Description Synchronize radio time Select one of the following options to set the system
92. more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Click and hold the left mouse button on one of the items you selected Drag the items to the Ping Test panel Release the mouse button The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders that were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 128 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Showing and Hiding Radios on the Map lf your network contains a large number of radios you may find that the map display becomes very crowded ENCOM STRATOS helps you address this problem by allowing you to selectively display groups of radios To enable this feature check the Show folder checkboxes option in the User Interface tab of the System Settings form When enabled checkboxes will be displayed at the left of each folder in the radio list as shown in the following example Search N C Name IP Address Mac Address Default TT Folder i Checkbox Ale es Mesh q g5 Mesh Radio 1 E Mesh Radio 2 i Mesh Radio 3 Mi pa Point to Point Network Li Point to Point Radio1 amp i E Point to Point Radio 2 In the following example all of the folders are checked and all of the radio icons are
93. number in the range 1 4095 is required VLAN Priority The priority to assign to the packets originating from the Ethernet port The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Note In order to prioritize the wireless network traffic using the VLAN priority the appropriate QoS options need to be configured See the Using WMM to Support VLAN Priority Traffic topic for more information Management Address Wireless Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 10 10 1 100 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the management VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the management VLAN s network mask For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 383 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio router or
94. of traffic that the rule is to act upon and the priority to assign to the matching traffic In the following example two priority rules have been defined Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP 1 Traffic controller TCP 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 The shaded cells contain the criteria that must be matched in order for a network data packet to be affected by the rule Matching data packets will be assigned the New Priority and optionally the New DSCP value defined in the rule The priority rule list is sorted by the New Priority column in descending order The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Priority Rules list Column Description CI To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button at the right of the Priority Rule list to actually delete it Name Ashort description that identifies the type of For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 258 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL network traffic associated with the rule Protocol The protocol to match Port s The IP port or ports to match If blank traffic on any port is affected by the rule Source The address or addresses that the data packets Address es must originate from Destination The address or addresses that the data packets Address es are being for
95. on the radio name and select Configure from the pop up menu that is displayed Search Name IP Address Mac Address H Default H 6 Mesh Network 5 Point to Point Network Change Password Ping Test Delete Del Alternatively you can either double click the left mouse button on the radio name or click the left mouse button on the radio name and select Radio gt Configure from the main menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 230 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 STRATOS will download the radio s current configuration This process will normally take a few seconds to complete During this time a wait form is displayed Please wait 14 Retrieving configuration from radio Cancel 4 When the radio s configuration has been obtained the radio configuration form is displayed EE Configure Point to Point Radio 1 Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Identification Radio Name Point to Point Radio 1 Radio MAC Address 00 0C 42 BB C5 75 Description South east comer of roof Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set gt IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address
96. or information on this option Radio Parameter Setup Field Name Frequency Band Wireless Link Rate Description Displays the nominal frequency at which the radio operates This option can be changed if the radio card supports more than one band Select the radio s operating frequency In Auto Frequency mode a master radio automatically searches for the frequency that has the least activity It then selects that frequency and uses it to communicate with the repeater or remote radios For the most stable link you should select a specific frequency from the list of available frequencies You can use the STRATOS Spectrum Scan panel to determine the channel that has the least amount of activity in the vicinity of the radio If a repeater is present in the network both the master and repeater radios must be set to the same specific frequency Remote radios are always configured to run in Auto Frequency mode They will automatically adjust their operating frequencies to match the master s Select the rates at which the radio will communicate with the other radios in the network When operating in A Mode or G Mode the default setting for this option is Adaptive When operating in N Mode the link rate is always set to Adaptive The Adaptive link rate automatically adjusts the radio s data rate to account for the current network conditions It typically provides the most reliable network performance A fixed rate helps r
97. outline the testing process for the two radios 1 Connect the master radio directly to your computer via its Ethernet port 2 Place the remote radio a reasonable distance away from the master Don t bother aligning the antennas In fact since the radios will be in such close proximity to each other you may want to mis align the antennas so that the signal strength is not too high 3 Apply power to both radios 4 Run ENCOM STRATOS on your computer 5 The master and remote radios should show up in the Radio List panel as being on line 6 Select the master radio The Wireless Link Status panel should display the wireless link established between the master and remote radios 7 Perform a Bandwidth Test to verify that the wireless connection is able to transfer data at a reasonable rate For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 396 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Deploying the Radios After the radios have been configured and tested they are ready to be deployed The following steps outline the deployment process for this simple network 1 2 4 5 6 7 Connect the master radio directly to your private network via its Ethernet port Install the remote radio at the remote location Mount the remote antenna at the highest possible location for example a tower or the luminaire of a traffic light Make sure that there is aclear line of sight between the m
98. radio so that it matches the configuration profile exactly This option is most often used when configuring a replacement radio or you want to restore the radio s configuration from a backup Copy common Use this option to exclude those settings that are unique to the settings radio This option is most often used when you are adding a new radio to a network and you want to configure it to match the other radios in the network The following items will not get copied over from the profile file to the radio e Radio name e Radio Description e Radio latitude longitude and street address e Radio static IP address 6 Press the OK button to apply the profile settings to the radio 7 Make any changes to the imported settings in the radio configuration form 8 Press the Save button on the radio configuration form to save the settings to the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 273 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Configuring Mesh Radios To configure a mesh radio 1 Locate the radio you would like to configure in the Radio List Ensure that it is currently on line a green icon is displayed at the left of an on line radio Search Name IP Address Mac Address E Default i Mesh Radio 1 E Mesh Radio 2 Point to Point Radio 1 Point to Point Radio 2 2 Click the right mouse button on the radio name and select Configure f
99. remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS8B Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode Remote v C Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v 80211 Client Parent Radio MAC Address 00 05 F4 1D 3D 0F Enter the MAC address of the master or repeater to which the remote will connect in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 191 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 77 WIRELESS USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the parent from the list of radios that are connected to the current radio H Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description CompakBB 58 Single 00 0D B9 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 Mounted on north most light standard CommpakBB 58 24 Dual 00 0D B9 15 B0 34 192 168 1 250 Installed in gray steel cabinet For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 192 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELESS USER MANUAL WDS Setup The following screen shot shows the WDS Setup tab for a broadband radio Radio Settings WDS Setup wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode Dynamic v WDS Setu
100. settings will not be able to communicate with each other Note Encom Wireless Data Solutions highly recommends that you confer with your I T department to determine the appropriate level of security for your network The Static and Dynamic security options contain additional settings that need to be configured The following topics describe these in more detail e Static Security Options e Dynamic Security Options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 197 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Static Security Settings The following screen shot shows the static security options for a broadband radio Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static O Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Static Security Options Encryption Level l 128 bit WEP v Encryption Key 1 AE74D487FC4DE3759FA298C53D Active Key Key 1 v Encryption Key 2 Encryption Key 3 Enter 26 character HEX keys Encryption Key 4 The following table describes the static security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Static Security Options Field Name Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level to use Three options are available Option Description o 64 bit WEP Uses a 40 bit encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is considered to be obsolete and should
101. show or hide the radio icons in the map view panel The state icon located at the left of the radio name shows the current state of the radio The color of the icon indicates one of three states Green The radio is currently on line The radio is currently on line but needs attention Yellow Place the mouse pointer over the warning icon to show more information Red The radio is currently off line The following screen shot shows examples of the state icons Search Off line radio 3 red state icon A E Default E Commp On line radios green state icon adio 2 Mesh Radio 3 B 63 Point to Point Network E CommpakBB 58 Single E Paintto Point Radio 1 amp Radio needs attention yellow state icon For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 117 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus A warning icon located at the right of the radio name is displayed if the radio needs attention To determine the action to take move the mouse pointer over the warning icon A pop up help balloon will be displayed that explains the nature of the problem The following example shows the warning for a radio that STRATOS is not able to log in to Name IPAddress Mac Address F fj Default Bn CommpakBB 49 Single a if Mesh Network Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 i bf Mesh Radio 3 Es Point to Point Network bee E CommpakBB 58 Single i
102. switch that allows this radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address would normally be the IP address of the network s gateway radio or the IP address of the router or switch used to access external networks Access Port Address Ethernet Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 50 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the client VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its Ethernet interface This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tag Client Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the client VLAN s network mask Field Namo Prune VLANs Check this option to prevent the radio for forwarding network traffic associated with specific VLAN IDs VLAN IDs Enter one or more VLAN IDs to prune Separate individual IDs with comma
103. tab and the Wireless Security sub tab and then repeat steps 5 6 8 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 503 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Detailed Security Example The following diagram shows a typical system used to manage a traffic network This section describes the security requirements for the two broadband radio networks and provides configuration settings for each each radio Although this is a simple example all of the issues discussed can be applied to larger networks Network Operations Center Workstations System Management Traffic Monitoring Traffic Control ie Router egress Broadband Radio Network 1 Broadband i Radio Network 2 Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Controller Controller Controller Cameras Cameras Controller Pulse Radio Network Intersections 1 2 and 3 Intersection 4 Intersection 5 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 504 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus The following table lists the MAC and IP addresses of the radios These values are used in the example radio configurations that follow IP Address Radio Card MAC Address Broadband Radio Network 1 Radio 192 168 1 101 Radio Card 1 2 4 GHz 00 0D B9 16 82 B0 Radio Card 2 5 8 GHz 04 CA 6D 45 EA 25
104. to choose the color style for the terminal window text ESS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 174 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Configuring Broadband Radios To configure a broadband radio 1 Locate the radio you would like to configure in the Radio List Ensure that it is currently on line a green icon is displayed at the left of an on line radio Search Name IP Address Mac Address E Ul Default E CommpakBB 49 Single CommpakBB 58 58 Dual ba Mesh Network ba Point to Point Network eH 2 3 Click the right mouse button on the radio name and select Configure from the pop up menu that is displayed Search N ame IP Address Mac Address Configure Change Password Ping Test Delete Del Alternatively you can either double click the left mouse button on the radio name or click the left mouse button on the radio name and select Radio gt Configure from the main menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 175 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 4 STRATOS will download the radio s current configuration This process will normally take a few seconds to complete During this time a wait form is displayed Please wait 14 Retrieving configuration from radio Cancel 5 When the radio s configur
105. to dismiss the message connect your computer to the Internet and then click on the Upgrade License button again Contact your IT department if you need help connecting your computer to the Internet 9 If the activation failed because your computer is not connected to the Internet and you are not able to connect it to the Internet you will need to perform a manual activation Click the Yes button to proceed The Manual Upgrade Request page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Manual Upgrade Request 1 Click the Create Upgrade Request File button to create an upgrade request file Save the file to a convenient location on your computer s hard drive Create Upgrade Request File 2 Email the upgrade request file to your ENCOM sales representative Indicate that you are requesting a manual license upgrade Encom will process the upgrade request file and will send you an upgrade file by e mail When you receive this file select the Finish Manual Upgrade option in the first page of this wizard 3 Click the Close button to return to ENCOM STRATOS plus 10 Click the Create Upgrade Request File button to create the request file For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 106 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 11 Email the request file to your ENCOM sales representative for processing Please include the following information with your request e Comp
106. to on line maps and import them into the computer that does not have Internet access That way you will have access to those sections of the map that have been cached Use the Import Radio List function to load the map tiles from a saved database file To export the cached map tiles 1 Select Export gt Map Tiles from the File menu You will be prompted to save the radio database file Save map tile database file Save in O Encom Stratos B Profiles 4 CrilepBys My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents gs My Computer File name MapTiles_backup gmdb e Save as type D atabase files gt My Network 2 Enter the name of the export file in the File name field and then press the Save button 3 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 4 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the export function Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At p lt Not Applicable gt Exporting Map Tiles Copying database file 31 12 28 19 PM For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 42 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 If the export is successful the task item will indicate that the map tile database has been successfully saved Radio Name Task Progress FinalStatus Started At Finished At P lt NotApplicable gt Exporting Map Tiles 100 122819PM_ 12 29 23 PM
107. to set the system clock Nothing The radio s time will only be synchronized when a configuration change is made by STRATOS NTP Server The radio will synchronize its internal clock to the specified NTP server time at regular intervals GPS Receiver The radio will synchronize its internal clock from the built in GPS receiver Note This option is only available if the radio contains a GPS receiver Primary NTP Server Specify the IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize the radio s internal clock This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 251 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Secondary NTP Server System Clock Field Name Time Zone USER MANUAL Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected If applicable specify the IP address of the secondary NTP server This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 If there is no secondary NTP server in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected Description Select the time zone in which the radio is operating Note that the time zo
108. undesirable links This can help with network stability and throughput The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the MAC Access tab MAC Access Settings Field Name Description Limit connections to If checked WDS connections will not form if the signal strength is less links with RSSI greater than the specified value This option is useful for weeding out weak or than intermittent links that can affect the performance of your network If not checked WDS connections will form regardless of the quality of the signal MAC Access Setup Allowed MAC This list contains the list of WDS links that are currently active Addresses Click on the Disallow button to disallow specific WDS links The links will be transferred from the Allowed MAC Addresses list to the Disallowed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 286 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Disallow button Disallowed MAC Addresses Add button USER MANUAL MAC Addresses list Disallowed links will no longer be allowed to form To disallow specific dynamic WDS links 1 Select one or more links in the Allowed MAC Addresses table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 15 6D 55 57 60 192 168 1 251 Mesh Radio 2 C 00 15 6D 65 59 49 192 168 1 60 Mesh Radio 3 2 Click on the Disal
109. used for the radio s Ethernet port Both IP addresses can be used to manage the radio The only difference is that the radio management traffic must use the specified management VLAN Only tagged network data packets using VLAN ID 20 are allowed on the Ethernet port Incoming packets associated with VLAN ID 20 are automatically untagged and forwarded to the client devices Outgoing packets sent by the client devices are automatically tagged with VLAN ID 20 The management and client IP addresses are assigned to the radio as shown in the following diagram Management Wireless Address i IP Address 10 10 1 50 Network Mask 255 255 254 0 DefsultGstewsy 10 10 1 1 Client Ethernet Address IP Address 192 168 128 50 B Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The management IP address network mask and default gateway must be the compatible with the other radios in the wireless network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 456 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Any devices that are connected to the radio s Ethernet port must be assigned IP addresses and network masks that are compatible with the specified client VLAN For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 457 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Pruning VLANs By default the ENCOM radios will forward all VLAN traffic to all of the radios to which it is connected In
110. v By default this is set to the max possible value in order to help you determine the maximum throughput available on the wireless link You can choose a different value from the drop down list or type in a value if you want to specify a rate that is not in the list When entering a custom rate use the k and m suffixes to specify kilobit and megabit rates as shown in the following examples Value entered Rate used for test 500000 500 kilobits per second 6000000 6 megabits per second 1200k 1 2 megabits per second 3m 3 megabits per second For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 158 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 Select the direction in which the bandwidth test is to be performed from the Direction list Direction Transmit v To get a true understanding about the capacity of a link you should run two bandwidth tests one in the Transmit direction and one in the Receive direction When performing a combined Receive Transmit test at the max possible speed it is common for the link to polarize so most of the traffic is in one direction This behavior will give you an incorrect impression of the link s quality 6 Click the Start button to start the test The button text will automatically change to Stop 7 The graph at the right in the Bandwidth Test panel will show the short term trending of the throughput The following screen shots show typic
111. 0 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL WPA2 Enterprise Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA2 Enterprise leave this option unchecked Unicast Ciphers Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t TKIP support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Unicast Ciphers Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm AES CCM supported by the radio Group Ciphers TKIP Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Group Ciphers Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm AES CCM supported by the radio Group Key Update Leave at 5 minutes Time 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Wireless Security sub tab will look similar to the following example Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Dynamic CI RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal i WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key ISNI7 gb JKNMf3 C WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Group Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 v 7 f you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2
112. 015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix B Declaration of Conformity FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Warning Part 15 21 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Industry Canada This device complies with Industry Canada RSS 210 specifications For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 404 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 405 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix C Spanning Tree Protocol STP Spanning Tree Protocol and RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol are used to ensure that bridge loops are not created between the radios in a network Loops cause broadcast and multicast traffic to accumulate in the network until it is unable to transport normal traffic STP and RSTP also allow the network to define spare redundant links to provide automatic backup paths if an active link fails without having to manually enable or disable the spare links When STP or RSTP
113. 1 Rx CCQ Chain 2 0 10 20 Bandwidth Test 30 Tx 40 50 60 Network Traffic Ping Test 70 80 90 100 Spectrum Scan Thorncliffe Repeater Identification a Name Thorneliffe Repeater Description Model Firmware Version License ID Uptime Location Latitude Longitude Street Address GPS CommpakBB 58N3 58 514 BG1R L4E5 05 03 33 51 09727 114 06023 Not Available E Network IP Address MAC Address Ethernet 1 Link Rate 192 168 128 62 00 00 42 BB C5 63 100 Mbps i Ethernet 2 Link Rate No Link Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D0 Wireless Protocol 80211n Network SSID ENCOMS8N 4 Radio Mode Remote Channel Mode 40 MHz Channel Auto Frequency eMax Enabled Wireless Security Disabled Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 32 72 Wireless Protocol 80211n Network SSID ENCOMS58N B Radio Mode Master e A Menu Bar at the top of the window that allows you to access most of the application s features e A Radio List panel that contains the list of ENCOM radios available in your network e A Map View panel that shows the physical locations of your radios on a map e An ltem Properties panel that displays important information on the folder or radio that is currently selected in the radio list e AWireless Link Status panel that displays the state of the Wireless links of the radio that is currently selected in the radio list
114. 1C Click on the Remove button to remove links from the static WDS list To remove static WDS links Remove button Nace 1 Select one or more links in the Static WDS Links table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 15 6D 84 32 71 192 168 128 50 Point o Multipoint Remote 2 C 00 15 6D 84 50 00 192 168 128 35 Point to Multipoint Remote 1 2 Click on the Remove button to remove the selected static links The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Dynamic and Static WDS Link tables Colum Description 0 O O MAC Address The MAC address of the remote radio IP Address The IP address of the remote radio The name assigned to the remote radio Interface Identifies the wireless radio module on the remote radio The first radio module is Radio 1 the second radio module is Radio 2 etc Tx Rx Strength The transmit and receive signal strengths in dBm of the wireless connection between this radio and the remote radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 352 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Wireless N Settings Note that the Wireless N settings tab is only displayed if the associated radio card supports Wireless N operation The following screen shot shows the wireless N settings tab for a point to multipoint radio
115. 269 Exporting the Radio Configuration siennes 270 Importing the Radio Configuration seen 271 Configuring Mesh RadioS isicic scccccccscstcccssssdeccesssccceesneececesanscceesatdeceessecaneesaezencesassaccessesencesssseneessetee 274 Basic Settings TaD cacecucegedeccet seas cates 2oceaheuacessdagucvesceducessiesuest vey seudates ascent sdesecedsleatsevaavaeti scuvecbeatadvcedeane 276 Location Fab 2 55s5sssc trisrsssiensnsamns essai dns ses asi cdot sg a ons s iris tn desasinte eat enr gant tn ant ea add esa aps ages des Le 279 Radio Tab Ae E E A near cas dress snens dansant sn nn dede n sde notant tentent ebden enee 282 Radio Settings 283 IMAG ACCESS Settings rainier aai tien ie anses ins nd e e reaa aa re annees 286 Wireless N S ttingS 4 ss sses rires ninanerenruinntesent unter AAAA REAR AA FA aR EE A EAKA EE AEREE ESE 289 Wirel ss Securty Settihg Sstre eaa EAE KEE Ea A E Aae Eaa aeea A A aE raaa ne ae 290 Static Security Settings vs iscscssssicvssvsancadescasinsvaveceassascaastvsidedaseaceudsacds Aa ED ER E EEEa EATE AE ARES SEAR ETAR ani 292 Dynamic Security Settings acetar rernnnhiei neiaa aa afai ma Aaaa datai A aaria nib dusts AREE areare Riana 294 Network Tabb wcziscessevsadsicevsscescueiencececscecabececcdacznccisetesdenabissaastceasbasnes sidesnecvvcesdersnesizesideustbeceiaieedelivvessddnnidwaiiadagaeidsiia 297 UMM SC UMN LE PR EE EE DE EE EE TETE I cakes 298 DHCP Server Settings 300 SNMP Setting SE RE D P
116. 3 24 31 CS4 AF41 AF42 AF43 32 39 CS5 EF 40 47 CS6 48 55 CS7 56 63 Use WMM and DSCP When both Use WMM and DSCP priorities options are enabled priorities priorities are automatically assigned to incoming packets based on their DSCP values and WMM is used to improve the quality of audio and video Enable streams Use WMM Use DSCP priorities Refer to the following topic for a matrix that gives you some basic guidance as to what settings to use for a number of scenarios e QoS Recommentation Matrix Refer to the following topics for detailed QoS examples for various network scenarios e Using Priority Queues to Ensure Access to Radios e Using WMM to Simplify Radio Configuration e Using WMM to Improve Video Traffic e Using DSCP to Simplify Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 416 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e Using DSCP and WMM to Improve Video Traffic e Using WMM to support VLAN Priority Traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 417 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL QoS Recommentation Matrix The following table gives you some basic guidance as to what settings to use for a number of network scenarios Note that this is not an exhaustive list You may need to analyze your network in order to choose the right options QoS Option to use Enable Enable Enab
117. 4 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following diagram shows a mesh radio network that is based on dual radio nodes WT client ENCOM Gateway J Te J Dee Devices i a Nr Mesh Radio m i X X ope Acne ee ie Private Network or Internet La B ENCOM Gateway ENCOM ENCOM Mesh Radio Mesh Radios Mesh Radios Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS In this example e The first radio Shown in green of each node is used for the mesh e The second radio shown in red of each node is used for local client access e Two radios shown in blue are wired to the private network to provide redundant access to the network Note This example shows a simple mesh scenario Other topologies some that are simpler and some that are more complicated are supported For information on configuring ENCOM point to point radios refer to the following topic e Configuring Mesh Radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 15 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Point to Multipoint Radio Network A point to multipoint network consists of a single master radio that is connected to your private network and one or more remote radios The master radio handles the communication between the devices connected to the remote radios and the monitoring and control software installed in your netw
118. 55 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 1 IP address used to access the radio via untagged traffic Pruning C Prune VLANs IP address used to access the radio via the management VLAN When Management VLAN tagging is enabled the radio is assigned two IP addresses a management address will be used to access the radio using the management VLAN and an access port address that will be used to access the radio using untagged traffic You will be able to access the radio using either address from either the wireless or Ethernet interfaces Because of this you will need to prevent untagged data from being allowed onto the wireless part of the network if you want to restrict radio management activities to the management VLAN only For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 453 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Client Tagging By default all of the ENCOM radio interfaces wireless and Ethernet operate as VLAN trunks All tagged and untagged data will flow through the interfaces unhindered If you want to limit the network traffic on the radio s Ethernet port to a specific VLAN you will need to configure the the Client Tagging Management Address and Access Port Address sections of the radio configuration form s VLAN sub tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP Qo Check to restrict traffic to specific VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagg
119. 68128 35 Point to Multipoint Remote 1 Radio 1 38 39 Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm The settings on this tab are used to specify the WDS Wireless Distribution System connections that are allowed to form with other radios in the network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the WDS Setup tab Field Name Description WDS Mode Select the method used to determine if an external radio is allowed to form a wireless connection with the radio being configured One of the following options can be used WDS Mode Dynamic All connections from other radios will be accepted This is the default and recommended setting Static Only those connections listed in the Static WDS Links table will be allowed to form Disabled No connections from other radios will be accepted This defeats the purpose of a wireless network and is not recommended For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 350 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Field Name Dynamic WDS Links Move button Static WDS Links Add button This list contains the list of WDS links that are currently active Click on the Move button to convert dynamic WDS links to static links The links will be transferred from the Dynamic WDS Links list to the Static WDS Links list To convert dynamic WDS links to static WDS links 1
120. 72 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 72 encom For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Toll Free Worldwide Fax Web 1 800 617 3487 403 230 1122 403 276 9575 www encomwireless com 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 11 ENCOM Radio Network OVervieW sn eeee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeessaaeeeeeeaaseeeeeaeseeeesaaeeeeenaaeeeeaeas 11 Broadband Radio Netw ork seiississccsciccsececccsicecescsesceradesccceecnacbacacecadenccsunteadesnabe dtabnceacoddacegscededdasensadeastendesededaciescicee 12 Point to Point Radio Network cccesneteacie cieesecanceiscnesuecteveseesecssudeudevccesvec aarsucsuseraeceatensdvacieedasucrecuese 13 Mesh Radio Network Point to Multipoint Radio Network ccscceeseceeseeeesneeeeseeeesneensneeeeseeeesnesaeaaeesseeessaesasaaeeeseeeesaesesaaeeeseeeeseeseeeaees 16 Chapter 2 Installation 17 System Requirements ssssissrs ass erener nisk nas innemen KNER ANE vege cclevenedelvegsccdayveneceuyedsoclevexnecevvanccseveesedeeyy 17 Downloading STRATOS Software iii ccccccecccccccsesscccsecssccccesssceccessseccceessecccesstenccissssnccessnsucaeessstecessnssce 17 Installing STRATOS Software sis sssssssrrseeneenneneneeneeneneennenneeneeneneeeeennneenennes 18 Network Setup 2 2 atacand aaaea pensant en es ann SR ane me named AOE AADA en one pars ti nine essaie 21 Chapter 3 Connecting
121. 8 24 Dual 00 0D B9 15 B0 34 192 168 1 250 Installed in gray steel cabinet Note that installing a repeater will reduce the network throughput by half It should only be used when there is no other option available or if the reduction in performance is not important For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 347 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Remote Radio Setup A and B G Cards Select the Remote option for a radio that is as the end of the point to multipoint network If the network contains a repeater check the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 Hide SSID Radio Mode Remote v Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v C 802 11 Client By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the remote radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master or repeater Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode Remote v Channel Mode 40 MHz v C 802 11 Client If you encounter connectivity issues between the remote radio and the master or repeater you may want to manually select the radio to which the remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS8 Hide SSID Using Repeater
122. 812 Accounting Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS accounting updates are accepted The default is 1813 Shared Secret Enter a string that is used to obfuscate the user password that is sent to the RADIUS server for authentication This value must match the Shared Secret that is configured in the RADIUS server For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 263 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Domain Enter the Microsoft Windows domain of the user Only use if the RADIUS server requires domain validation Timeout Use RADIUS to login to the radio User RADIUS to login to the wireless network Enter the maximum amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response from the RADIUS server before resending an authentication request The default is 300 ms You may need to increase this if your RADIUS server is slow to respond to authentication requests Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate radio login requests When this option is enabled the radio will check with the RADIUS server if it does not find the specified user in its local user database Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate client devices that wish to attach to your network e g for access to the network operations center or to your corporate LAN If you select this option you will need to check the RADIUS MAC Authentication setting for each of the radio cards that clients will use to
123. 9 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL VLAN Enabled Switch 2 Configuration VLAN enabled switch 2 would normally be located in a cabinet located close to a road or intersection The center port located in the top row of Ethernet ports is configured as a trunk port and carries data from all VLANs The first and second ports in the bottom row of Ethernet ports is configured to support the traffic monitoring VLAN ID 20 The third port is configured to support the traffic controller VLAN ID 30 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 470 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 471 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 2 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix F Network Filters The following example shows a small network used to carry video from traffic cameras to the network operations center The traffic cameras have been configured to multicast the video data so that any workstation connected to the network operation center s Ethernet backbone can view the traffic video streams The two master radios are also connected directly to the Ethernet backbone without any intervening switches or routers Ethernet Backbone Master Master A M RE Tt 1 Tt Remote 4 fo oN SON 2 yy A s Pa de t Repeater Remote t Remote Remote t j A1 A1 B1 B2 emo
124. 9 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Exporting the Radio Configuration The Export function is used to save the radio s current settings to a configuration profile file This allows you to e Make a backup copy of the radio s configuration e Save the radio s configuration to a profile or template file for use in configuring other radios To export a radio s configuration 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Export button The Save configuration profile file form is displayed Save radio configuration to profile file Save in C2 Profiles My Recent Documents My Computer amp File name Point to Point Radio 1 gt My N etwork Save as type Profile files 2 Specify the name of the file you want to save the radio s configuration settings to and then press the Save button to save the settings By default STRATOS saves configuration profile files in the My Documents Encom Wireless Profiles folder For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 270 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Importing the Radio Configuration The Import function allows you to update the radio s settings from a previously saved configuration profile file This function allows you to e Restore the radio s configuration from a backup file This can be useful when you have to replace a radio in the fi
125. A B G client devices can only detect networks that are using the 20 MHz channel mode If you do not need to support client devices you can set the channel mode to 5 MHz 10 MHz or 40 MHz This will prevent casual discovery of your network If using a 5 8 GHz radio and you do not need to support client For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 487 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Enable eMax Protocol Enable Roaming For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL devices set the channel to a frequency that is not supported by client devices This will prevent unauthorized devices from being able to detect your network The following is a list of the 5 8 GHz band frequencies that are normally supported by client devices in North America e 5180 MHz e 5200 MHz e 5220 MHz e 5240 MHz e 5745 MHz e 5765 MHz e 5785 MHz e 5805 MHz e 5825 MHz If using a 2 4 GHz radio all of the available frequencies are supported by client devices If using a 4 9 GHz radio none of the available frequencies are supported by regular client devices specialized 4 9 GHz client devices do exist eMax is a proprietary protocol that increases the bandwidth of the wireless links Since the protocol is not compatible with standard client devices these devices will not be able to connect to a network that is using the eMax protocol If the radio is configured as a remote it will by default
126. ADIUS VLAN Primary Server Backup Server Common Settings Default Access Rights Enable RADIUS Server Change Settings v Radius Server Settings i Server Address 192 168 0 250 Shared Secret 9 oe Authentication Port 1812 Domain Timeout 3000 gt ms Accounting Port 1813 lt gt lt gt Service Options Use RADIUS to login to the radio C Use RADIUS to login to the wireless network RADIUS is used to centralize the authentication of users that attempt to login to the radio and or to the network Refer to ENCOM STRATOS RADIUS Configuration Guide available separately for more information on setting up and using a RADIUS server with your radio network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the RADIUS settings tab Primary and Secondary Server Field Name Enable RADIUS Check this setting to enable the associated RADIUS server Primary or Server Backup If the radio cannot connect to the primary RADIUS server it will attempt to connect to the backup RADIUS server Server Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server Authentication Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS authentication requests are accepted The default is 1812 Accounting Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS accounting updates are accepted The default is 1813 Shared Secret Enter a string that is used to obfuscate the user password that
127. AL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Appendix C Spanning Tree Protocol 406 Selecting the STP Preferred Root eee ee eeeeaa nese eeeaaeseaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeesenees 409 STP RSTP Network Considerations ccccccsscessccseeoneecneconscensoeescoesoe seca seenseensesneanessnneoneaoneas 412 Appendix D Quality of Service QoS 414 QoS Recommentation Matrix sisi erennenirrsrerrennennenensseernenneneennnss 418 Using Priority Queues to Ensure Access to Radios 419 Using WMM to Simplify Radio Configuration Master and Remote Radio Configuration Repeater Radio Configuration siessiscesssccasccscssciviscccssecsssostensercasesssessssassizcvecessonessciuenscrssensivsssitaserstenctensez asersenscis Using WMM to Improve Video Traffic ss sssssssssssenneeeeennneneenennes Master and Remote Radio Configuration Repeater Radio Configurations ssssissessssssissssisnsescssnennsensnerenssnssnssnennenessennnsensanenesenasnesnnnaestesnneesaneensenestes Using DSCP to Simplify Radio Configuration Master and Remote Radio Configuration Repeater Radio Configuration 2 5 342 units dedorseecosaneparsnstigescer neue one ges t anges Using DSCP and WMM to Improve Video Traffic nenna 439 Master and Remote Radio Configuration inner 441 Repeater Radio Configuration sss cisssiisicciscccscsceenecccusctcvseeseueccessdcevsesseagiccucececscosesotecacaseveossenesicvacdcvededensceasscrevanse 444 Using WMM
128. APE RE EE ETS PE IE 302 Encom Mesh Protocol Settings issues 304 QOS SOUS jes ticles cance is data este sida is tan dt RAR ne deteste set Tes 305 Specifying a Qos Priority RUE sieisen isik anarian aa raae naaa aaa ana ETAS PAE e aae nn 308 RADIUS Settings oe VLAN Setting S iiiscisssiiiiccvesercssetvaniarisatsisivaiciapieai citi scsi iuirasinarciins aieasisio unveil nance ABOUT n R 1 o E TR E E E en Export and Import Button isscicecssisscscisscccscccenstscisscascisscrsnseasscessnscsnsteeconcaseascensnscissecsecscsustacisbiansarecanseenssisrensecastes 317 Exporting the Radio Configuration sise 318 Importing the Radio Configuration sise 319 Configuring Point to Multipoint Radios ssssssssssssresensneneeenneeneeeeneenee 322 Basic Settings Tabira nt ide r cay coud anes cueyadvevsetadedstesasevaadensdeccesensnncdacebeine 324 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 6 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL L cation Tab riroraa aaa Eaa AEA Aaaa Ean sie best cay scutes uaceuty susehccedsteausvvaeecebiecesnabeatarveedcaus 327 Radio Tab sessen idiei seteabectectes 330 Radio Settings Ni Cards ssrhsd a e sahdetaedcevaendidiahencsauasstucasitederctastedtsecedpseaudhieaeindncssdiaveaetaddees 331 Master Radio Setup N Cards iii 336 Repeater Radio Setup N Cards issues 337 Remote Radio Setup N Cards iii 339 Radio Settings A and B G Cards sise 341 Master Radio Setup
129. ATOS plus USER MANUAL Setting up the Remote Radio To set up the remote radio 1 Ensure that the radio has been assigned an IP address that is compatible with your local network see the Assigning IP Addresses topic 2 Double click on the radio The Radio Configuration form will be displayed Enter the appropriate login credentials if prompted for them The default user name is admin and the default password is empty a Select the Basic Settings tab Configure the basic settings as required b Select the Location tab Choose the desired icon color and select the Master icon Select the appropriate geographical location on the map c Select the Radio 1 Tab Configure the Radio Network Setup and Radio Parameter Setup sections Because this is a remote radio set the Radio Mode option to Remote The remaining options can be left to their default values d Press the OK button to save the changes made to the radio configuration Most of the settings in the Radio 1 tab must be the same for both the master and NOTE remote radios If they are different the two radios may not be able to communicate with each other For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 395 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Testing the Wireless Connection After configuring the master and remote radios and prior to deployment you should test them in bench or lab setting The following steps
130. C 00 15 6D 65 58 49 192 168 1 60 Mesh Radio 3 2 Click on the Remove button to remove the selected links In order for the newly allowed links to form you have to save the updated configuration to the radio The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Allowed and Disallowed MAC address tables Column MAC Address The MAC address of the wireless radio module on the remote radio IP Address The IP address of the remote radio The name assigned to the remote radio Interface Identifies the wireless radio module on the remote radio The first radio module is Radio 1 the second radio module is Radio 2 etc Tx Rx Strength The transmit and receive signal strengths in dBm of the wireless connection between this radio and the remote radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 288 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Wireless N Settings Note that the Wireless N settings tab is only displayed if the associated radio card supports Wireless N operation The following screen shot shows the wireless N settings tab for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless N Wireless Security Antenna Chains Transmit Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 Receive Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 ENCOM offers Wireless N radio cards that support up to 3 antennas STRATOS will automatically display the number of antennas that are supported by your radio in
131. C AES CCM Group Ciphers mporal k t KIF AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 lt gt The following tables describe the dynamic security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Authentication Types WPA Personal Check this option to enable WPA personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA2 Personal Check this option to enable WPA2 personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key does not require a pre shared key EAP Method Specify the authentication protocol to use Two options are available Option Description server EAP TLS TLS certificates are used for authentication For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 294 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL This option is only used by the WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise authentication types It is hidden if no enterprise option is selected TLS Mode Specify how TLS certificates are to be used Two options are available Option _ Deseriton Use Dynamic TLS certificates are negotiated dynamically using Certificates anonymous Diffie Hellman MODP 2048 bit algorithm Use Imported ATLS certificate that has been imported into the Certifica
132. C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 The shaded cells contain the criteria that must be matched in order for a network data packet to be affected by the rule Matching data packets will be assigned the New Priority and optionally the New DSCP value defined in the rule The priority rule list is sorted by the New Priority column in descending order The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Priority Rules list Column Description CI To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button at the right of the Priority Rule list to actually delete it For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 214 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Name A short description that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Protocol The protocol to match Port s The IP port or ports to match If blank traffic on any port is affected by the rule Source The address or addresses that the data packets Address es must originate from Destination The address or addresses that the data packets Address es are being forwarded to DSCP The DSCP value of the incoming packets to match If blank the DSCP priority is ignored by the rule New Priority The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria New DSCP The DSCP value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria
133. Channel Auto Frequency For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Radio Model Atheros 11N N Only v Hide SSID wireless Link Rate Output Power Page 512 Wireless MAC Address 04 C4 6D 45 3B 4D Enable eMax Protocol Using Repeater C Enable Roaming Parent Radio MAC Address D4 CA 6D 45 EA 25 v Adaptive Maximum 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode Dynamic WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Wireless N Security Pre Shared Key Ut amp d HSVBISK B For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 513 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Securing Broadband Network 2 In this example Broadband Radio Network 2 consists of 5 COMMPAKBB58 single radios They form the communications backbone used to access devices such as traffic cameras and traffic controllers To Network Operations Center Broadband Radio Network 2 fo N Repeater f N Repeater QO Qo F Remote Traffic Cameras Traffic Tr
134. Configuration sise 387 Importing the Radio Configuration sise 388 Chapter 5 Setting up a Broadband Network 392 Assigning IP Addr sses 1sstrssisesnteeorussnnsderemuertinsenedssns antenne nian EASy ena atd Eia 393 Setting up the Master Rai wis sisicccisicscccissesccctsascccetssesccctsssscecseecsceedsasscceeesseaccessescetessescecdsesseneesseees 394 Setting up the Remote Radio ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeee ee eeeeee ee eeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeeeeesaneeeeesaneeeees 395 Testing the Wireless Connection sssssssnseencereeneneeneeneneeeeenneeeeenns 396 Deploying the RAdIOS 2565208sveercsvueradsannnnsedei estate rie eu dendecuen ess etudes uet ee tinuen argent 397 Optimizing to Minimize Noise Interference ss sssssssssssnnneeeeeneneens 399 Appendix A RF Exposure 402 FCG 2 iigesrenene ere nt a olenviws chacecia dd ne ue a per nana bre el en nee tente S See dns dave diene eee eue 402 Health Canada ssisssssssssssssssionrsessnansecshunstecetonnsetepunaseesennnscthunsi cent anna A ie ns eute anna teens anni es 402 Appendix B Declaration of Conformity 404 PE EE D A aaa E a 404 Warning Far 15 21 23 2 2 0522 2220cs22ancnessroansesns soon es A SAAE Aa E AE AAA AREA 404 Industry Canada cssissssisssssscsscnsscsssnscccisuneessnunncerenuaseeesnmaneceinann ne NNE ESAKA NKOS Aa 404 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 7 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANU
135. DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP 1 Traffic controller TCP 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 The shaded cells contain the criteria that must be matched in order for a network data packet to be affected by the rule Matching data packets will be assigned the New Priority and optionally the New DSCP value defined in the rule The priority rule list is sorted by the New Priority column in descending order The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Priority Rules list Column Description CI To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button at the right of the Priority Rule list to actually delete it Name Ashort description that identifies the type of For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 306 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL network traffic associated with the rule Protocol The protocol to match Port s The IP port or ports to match If blank traffic on any port is affected by the rule Source The address or addresses that the data packets Address es must originate from Destination The address or addresses that the data packets Address es are being forwarded to DSCP The DSCP value of the incoming packets to match If blank the DSCP priority is ignored by the rule New Priority The priority to assign to the packets that match t
136. Detailed VLAN Configuration Example The following diagram shows a small radio network that uses VLANs to isolate the network traffic between network management vehicle traffic monitoring and vehicle traffic control roles Network Operations Center Workstations a 4 Traffic Monitoring VLAN ID 20 System Management Traffic Control VLAN ID 10 VLAN ID 30 VLAN Enabled Trunk Switch 1 VLAN ID 10 20 30 MA T 7 A U N N Ea Noj T E nl io ilko Pruned Traffic VLANID 10 30 K Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 462 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL A management VLAN ID 10 is used to configure and monitor the radios switches and routers in the network Low sensitivity vehicle traffic monitoring data video feeds is assigned to VLAN ID 20 More sensitive vehicle traffic control data is assigned to VLAN ID 30 Traffic controller data is prevented from being routed to the left hand portion of the network by the appropriate VLAN pruning setting on radio 2 The VLAN configuration settings for each of the 5 radios and for each of the VLAN enabled switches are described in the following topics e VLAN Enabled Switch 1 Configuration e Radio 1 VLAN Configuration e Radio 2 VLAN Configuration e Radio 3 VLAN Configuration e Radio 4 VLAN Configuration e Radio 5 VLAN Configura
137. Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address C 04 04 6D 45 3B 4D 192 168 20 102 Radio 2 C 04 CA 6D 23 04 53 192 168 20 103 Radio 3 C 04 04 6D 24 03 2F 192 168 20 104 Radio 4 Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Dynamic CO RADIUS MAC Authentication Wireless N Security Pre Shared Key Ut amp d HSVBISK B For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 510 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Remote Radios 2 3 and 4 The first 2 4 GHz radio card of the remote radios would be configured as follows This configuration is identical to that of the master radio Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 0D B9 86 14 B4 Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint B G N Clients v Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID 4859 JKWH Hide SSID Using Repeater Channel Mode 20 MHz x Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 2 4 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 2427 MHz 2 Output Power Maximum v Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security WDS Settings i J WDS mode is currently disabled Set the WDS
138. ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Pepeater Radio 6 Repeater Radio 6 would be configured as follows Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR 5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D F4 24 F3 4C Radio Network Setup Network Type Broadband Enable eMax Protocol Network SSID 9538 RCLP Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients Enable Roaming Channel Mode 802 11 Client Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Wireless Link Rate Channel 5775 MHz Output Power Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security WDS Settings P Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and save the radio settings in order to WDS Mode enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Ax Strength dBm C 00 00 F4 12 48 3B 192 168 1 105 Radio5 C 00 0D F4 12 44 4C 192168 1 108 Radio 8 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 518 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL HEHE 38kMe70 t For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 519 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Repeater Radio 7 Repeater Radio 7 would be configured as follows Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security
139. ENCOM radios are powered by a Power over Ethernet PoE Injector Power over Ethernet technology provides the ethernet communications and the radio power over a single standard Ethernet cable A typical PoE injector is shown below PoE Injectors typically contain 3 sockets e Astandard power cable socket e An RJ 45 style Ethernet socket e An RJ 45 style PoE socket Connect one end of the power cable into the PoE injector and the other into a 120 VAC power source An LED will illuminate when the PoE injector receives power If you are connecting the radio directly to your computer use an Ethernet crossover cable to connect your computer to the Ethernet socket on the PoE injector If you are connecting the radio to your network use a standard Ethernet cable to connect your network router or switch to the Ethernet socket on the PoE Injector Finally use a standard Ethernet cable to connect the radio s Ethernet port to the PoE socket on the PoE Injector The PoE socket is normally but not always marked with a warning label Never plug a network cable that connects directly to your network or computer into the PoE socket Doing this could damage your computer or network device When installing a radio in the field the PoE Injector must be installed inside of a cabinet or building to protect it from the weather For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 24 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS
140. IP address Select this option if a DHCP server is available on your radio network and automatically you want the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the radio Specify a static IP Select this option to manually assign the radio s IP address address ENCOM recommends this option because it provides for a more secure network especially if you have not enabled wireless security Note It is important that each radio in the network is assigned a different IP address Network performance can suffer greatly if two or more radios are assigned the same IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 277 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL IP Address Settings Feld Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the radio This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 151 Network Mask Enter the network mask This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio or router that allows the radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Note that the
141. IP addresses in the Range to Search options as shown in the following example IP address start 192 168 1 100 IP address end 1 92 168 1 200 f you select Search the specified subnet you need to enter the network address and the network mask in the Range to Search options as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 53 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IP address 192 168 1 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Alternatively you can specify the IP address and network mask in CIDR format IP Address Mask Bits in the IP address field In this case the Subnet mask field is not used and is disabled IP address 192 168 1 0 24 Subnet mask All of these examples will perform the same search 3 Click on the Start button 4 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 5 A new task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the search Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At p lt Not Applicable gt Searching for radios 192 168 1 30 192 168 1 39 12 0 radios found 12 44 45 PM 6 New radios will be added to the radio list as they are found During the search STRATOS will attempt to login to the radios using the credentials you specified in the Radio Login form If a radio s login credentials are not the same the login proces
142. ISM Band v Wireless Link Rate Channel 5200 MHz v Output Power Maximum v Because the wireless radio settings are somewhat involved the radio configuration tab is split up into three sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Radio Settings sub tab N Cards e Radio Settings sub tab A Cards and B G Cards e WDS Setup sub tab e Wireless N sub tab e Wireless Security sub tab N Mode e Wireless Security sub tab A Mode and G Mode For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 330 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings N Cards The following screen shot shows the wireless radio settings tab for a point to multipoint radio that is provisioned with a Wireless N card Radio Settings wos Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 F5 8B Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint N Only v Enable eMax Protoco Network SSID ENCOMSEN FF Hide SSID Using Flepester Radio Mode Master vi Channel Mode 20 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 5180 MHz v Output Power Maximum v The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the wireless radi
143. Manually specify Select this option if you want to manually specify the location of the radio location Latitude Enter the latitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the northern hemisphere and negative in the southern hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Latitude field Longitude Enter the longitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the eastern hemisphere and negative in the western hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 327 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Longitude field Icon Color Select the color of the radio icon You can use the icon color to visually group radios by radio type geographical location VLAN association etc Icon Style Select the style of the radio icon Four icon styles are currently available Radio Type Master radio Repeater radio Dual radio Embedded map The embedded map allows you to see the current location of the radio A green marker shows the location assigned to the radio Google Map y i i Industrial Park 3 For ENCOM STRATOS plu
144. Mode to Dynamic and DEEE Disabled M save the radio settings in order to enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 511 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic Authentication Types C WPA Personal M WPA2 Personal C WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers Group Ciphers Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time minutes 1 60 Wireless Security Pre Shared Key IS SPACE FOR RENT Pre Shared Key amp KgNSD4LjE H5D ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL C RADIUS MAC Authentication C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP M AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM AES with CBC_MAC 8ES CCM The second 5 8 GHz radio card of the remote radios would be configured as follows Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General M Enable Radio Identification Radio Network Setup Network Type Point to Multipoint 8759 KT BF Remote x Network SSID Radio Mode Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band
145. OS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings A and B G Cards This topic describes the radio settings used to secure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios using legacy B G 2 4 GHz or A 4 9 and 5 8 GHz radio cards To configure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Radio 1 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab 5 Update the settings using the following guidelines Network SSID Use an innocuous word or phrase or a random combination of letters numbers and punctuation except for the and characters This prevents someone that discovers the network from easily determining the type of radios in the network who the network belongs to or what the network is being used for Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the network SSID from being broadcast This will prevent unauthorized client devices from detecting your network and will prevent casual discovery of your network If client devices are allowed to connect to the network they will have to be manually configured with the SSID Allow Clients If you don t need to support wireless client devices leave this setting unchecked This prevents client devices from being able to connect to the radio making your network harder to compromise Channel Mode Most
146. P server tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN DHCP Server 4A network must have only one active DHCP server Network devices may get conflicting IP addresses if more than one DHCP server is active on the network Enable DHCP Server DHCP Server Settings Start Address 192 168 1100 EndAddress 192 168 1 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 2 DNS Server Address 192 168 1 3 WINS Server Address 192 168 1 1 The following table describes the DHCP server settings DHCP Server Field Name Description Enable DHCP Server Check this option to enable the radio s DHCP server When this option is enabled the radio will assign IP addresses to any other radio or any other other device that is configured to obtain their IP addresses dynamically Important Severe network instability can occur if there is more than one DHCP server present in a network or network segment Do not enable this option if a router or another radio is already acting as a DHCP server DHCP Server Settings Field Name Description DHCP Address Range Specify the start and end range of the IP addresses that will be provided by the DHCP server as shown in the following example DHCP Address Range 192 168 1 100 to 192 168 1 200 In this example IP addresses in the 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 range
147. Page 459 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL VLAN Pruning for Security VLAN pruning can be used to increase security by preventing access to sensitive network resources The following diagram shows a small network Ethernet Backbone VLAN ID 10 and 100 traffic Radio m Gateway i i N VLANID10and gt Ea 100 traffic ii r ri Prune VLAN No VLAN pruning ID 10 u al ETTA e e ce Re nm B all VLAN ID 100 VLANID 10 and only traffic 100traffic y 5 a The radios on the right hand side of the diagram carry sensitive traffic that network administrator wants to limit access to The sensitive traffic was assigned to VLAN ID 10 and the remaining traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 460 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL assigned to VLAN ID 100 The left hand radio that is downstream from the gateway radio was configure to prune VLAN ID 10 This prevents any sensitive traffic from being routed to the remaining left hand radios Note that the VLAN pruning is configured at each ENCOM radio It is not compatible with the pruning functionality of the VLAN Trunking Protocol VTP implemented by Cisco switches For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 461 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL
148. RATOS plus USER MANUAL Upgrading an Existing License To upgrade an existing license 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 20 radios Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Finish Manual Upgrade 2 Click the Upgrade License button The Upgrade License page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Upgrade License 1 If not present enter the serial number you received from ENCOM Wireless HE H HSE H 2 Click the Upgrade License button to update your license If the attempt fails you will be prompted to perform 4 manual upgrade Upgrade License For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 104 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc Ze encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 Click on the Upgrade License button to upgrade your license STRATOS will attempt to contact the ENCOM licensing server to perform the upgrade Please wait Attempting to upgrade your license 4 ff the upgrade was successful a confirmation message will be d
149. Radio Configuration ssssscsssssssecsessasesssssnsecsessaensennaenmesnapeeennseeessneensnsetesnane 478 Remote Radio Configuration sssssssssssssseennnenneeeeeenneneeennneneeeeeeneenennns 481 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 8 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix G Securing Your Wireless Network General Security ConsiderationSici iicscccccccscccsssescecesesscecs sesncecessseecccsssncctesesnecce seencacesssenccassenteceseenes Set the Administrative Password Secure Radio Configuration Settings Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios ss 484 Radio S ttings NCards s nina inerte ir nn ire tones teenies 484 Radio S ttings A and B G Cards vis unes dise tes entr ceva annee entre 487 WDS Settings Anne nent ab eae de ss cts aves ester T A N heath druide den v et ee 490 Wireless Security Settings N Cards 492 Wireless Security Settings A and B G Cards 496 MeSH Radios ai ntm eap ri ceadna mnt seh ancre en dre tie de tent deinen 498 Radio Settings Mesh Radios 445 sien nans eE aas E E een tn etre tentent eds 498 MAC Access Setting Sridanarti da 501 Wireless Security Settings irsana nar e E E mine NEE E EE ete o ee 502 Detailed Security Example sssssssssssrrnunnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn annern ees Securing Broadband Network 1 Master RAI Dorene Castes cos ee e a a
150. Rights Enable RADIUS Server Change Settings v Radius Server Settings i Server Address 192 168 0 250 Shared Secret 9 Aeae Seeerei Authentication Port 1812 Domain Timeout 3000 gt ms Accounting Port 1813 lt gt lt gt Service Options Use RADIUS to login to the radio C Use RADIUS to login to the wireless network RADIUS is used to centralize the authentication of users that attempt to login to the radio and or to the network Refer to ENCOM STRATOS RADIUS Configuration Guide available separately for more information on setting up and using a RADIUS server with your radio network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the RADIUS settings tab Primary and Secondary Server Field Name Enable RADIUS Check this setting to enable the associated RADIUS server Primary or Server Backup If the radio cannot connect to the primary RADIUS server it will attempt to connect to the backup RADIUS server Server Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server Authentication Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS authentication requests are accepted The default is 1812 Accounting Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS accounting updates are accepted The default is 1813 Shared Secret Enter a string that is used to obfuscate the user password that is sent to the RADIUS server for authentication This value must match the S
151. S plus USER MANUAL a can be easily set up and managed WPA2 Personal If the WPA2 Personal option is checked enter a strong password Personal Pre Shared in the WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key field Ke The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA Enterprise Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA Enterprise leave this option unchecked WPA2 Enterprise Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA2 Enterprise leave this option unchecked Unicast Ciphers TKIP Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Unicast Ciphers AES Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm CCM supported by the radio Group Ciphers TKIP Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Group Ciphers AES Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm CCM supported by the radio Group Key Update Leave at 5 minutes Time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 494 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ry encom 7 WIRELESS ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 8 If you follow all of the guidelines the Wireless Security sub tab will look simi
152. S plus e Performance For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 65 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Services Discovery The following screen shot shows the Discovery panel of the System Settings form Radio Discovery Automatically try to discover radios every 20 seconds b d Warming This function is normally used to discover radios in a bench or lab environment It should not be used in a production environment The following table describes the individual discovery settings Radio Discovery Field Name Description Automatically try to Under normal operation ENCOM radios generate a heartbeat message discover radios every minute evel Heartbeat messages are used by ENCOM STRATOS to determine if a new radio has appeared on the network If the heartbeat from a new radio is received STRATOS automatically adds the radio to the Radio List In certain cases such as a bench configuration or testing environment it may not be practical to wait for the self generated heartbeat to be received Checking this option will cause STRATOS to actively request heartbeat messages at the specified frequency This can significantly reduce the amount of time you have to wait for the radio to be discovered by STRATOS Note This feature is of little value in a production environment and could cause a Slight degradation in performance in larger networks It should th
153. S that is already licensed 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 20 radios Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Finish Manual Upgrade 2 Click the Request Upgrade button The Request Upgrade page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Request Upgrade 1 First determine the license that best matches the number of radios in your network You can start with a small number of radios and later upgrade to a larger number as your network grows Upgrade from 20 to 50 radios v 2 Contact your ENCOM sales representative to order your license LA licensing encomwireless com www encomwireless com contact encom T 1 800 617 3487 or 1 972 885 5170 3 Make sure that you provide a valid e mail address when you submit your order The confirmation of your upgrade will be e mailed to that address when your order has been processed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 102 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER
154. STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Spanning Tree Protocol Settings The following screen shot shows the Spanning Tree Protocol settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol The Spanning Tree Protocol helps to manage multiple bridges in an extended LAN environment With STP enabled it will automatically bock all IP ports that form a loop situation within the network Spanning Tree Protocol STP v Bridge Priority 8000 Hes C Prefered Root The spanning tree protocols are used to prevent the formation of loops that can interfere with the proper operation of the radio network Refer to Appendix C Spanning Tree Protocol for more information on the this subject and for guidance in designing a radio network that uses STP or RSTP The following table describes the spanning tree protocol settings Spanning Tree Protocol Field Name Description Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that provides link Protocol management to prevent undesirable loops from appearing in the network You can select from one of the following options Option Deserption o Disabled STP is not enabled This is the default setting STP is enabled Rapid STP Rapid STP is enabled This is an enhanced version of the STP protocol that provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change
155. Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL WDS Settings This topic describes the WDS settings used to secure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios To configure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network Select the radio you want to secure Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio Select the Radio 1 tab and the WDS Setup sub tab Move the appropriate Dynamic WDS Links to the Static WDS Links table Change the WDS Mode setting to Static N O oO FP OO N If you follow all of the guidelines the WDS Setup sub tab will look similar to the following example Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security WDS Settings Set the WDS Mode to Dynamic and save the radio settings in order to WDS Mode Static x enable the Dynamic WDS table WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm d Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Ax Strength dBm C 00 15 6D 67 69 26 192 168 128 12 COMMPAKBB5958 ga 8 If you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the WDS Setup sub tab and then repeat steps 5 7 9 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings WDS settings only apply to master and repeater radios For remote radios the NOTE wireless connection can be secured by disab
156. The following screen shot shows the dynamic security options for a broadband radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal Pre Shared Key THIS SPACE FOI WPA amp 2 Personal Pre Shared Key The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog C WPA Enterprise EAP Method EAP TLS v WPA amp 2 Enterprise TLS Mode Use Dynamic Certificates v Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Group Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 gt The following tables describe the dynamic security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Authentication Types WPA Personal Check this option to enable WPA personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA2 Personal Check this option to enable WPA2 personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key WPA2 Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA2 enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key For ENCOM STRATOS plus Ve
157. The priority to assign to the packets originating from the Ethernet port The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Note In order to prioritize the wireless network traffic using the VLAN priority the appropriate QoS options need to be configured See the Using WMM to Support VLAN Priority Traffic topic for more information Management Address Wireless Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 10 10 1 100 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the management VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the management VLAN s network mask For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 314 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio router or switch that allows this radio to connect with devices that
158. The video cameras stream video on UDP port 5000 The master and remote radios radios 1 4 and 5 in the diagram would be configured as follows 1 Enable the Network Traffic Prioritization WMM and DSCP priorities options in the radio configuration form s QoS tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Prioritization QoS WMM and DSCP Priorities Priority Rules Name Protoce Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 441 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus j NIRELESS USER MANUAL 2 Create the traffic controller priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Traffic controllers Enter a name that describes the data affected by the rule TCP v Partis Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Destination Address es DSCP Assign a high priority DSCP value to the rule 56 CS IP Precedence 7 Highest 3 Press OK to create the new rule For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 442 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solu
159. This gives devices connected to the Ethernet port access to the other devices in the specified VLAN VLAN ID Enter the ID of the client VLAN to a number in the range 1 4095 is required VLAN Priority The priority to assign to the packets originating from the Ethernet port The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Note In order to prioritize the wireless network traffic using the VLAN priority the appropriate QoS options need to be configured See the Using WMM to Support VLAN Priority Traffic topic for more information Management Address Wireless Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 10 10 1 100 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the management VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the management VLAN s network mask For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 266 2010
160. Types Option Description O O Disabled Select this option if you do not want to enable security This option is not recommended since it allows anyone that has knowledge of the Network s SSID to connect to the network Static This option enables wireless encryption that uses static keys This is an older technology that is not as secure as the Dynamic option It can however provide for a more stable network Dynamic This option enables wireless encryption that uses dynamically allocated keys This option provides the most secure communication link RADIUS MAC Check this option if you use a RADIUS server for authentication Authentication A Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS server acts as a centralized access and authorization point for network service The authentication service is then handled by the RADIUS server instead of the ENCOM radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 243 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Important The security settings must be the identical for all radios on the network Radios that have different security settings will not be able to communicate with each other Note Encom Wireless Data Solutions highly recommends that you confer with your I T department to determine the appropriate level of security for your network The Static and Dynamic security options contain additional settings that need to be configured
161. UAL QoS Settings The following screen shot shows the QoS Quality of Service settings tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C Traffic Controller TEREN AA 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 Ge 5 E The Quality of Service settings allow you to prioritize the various types of network traffic so that important traffic is processed ahead of less important traffic Under normal conditions all network data packets have an equal opportunity to be forwarded by the radio This works well for some applications such as file transfers or web browsing but it is not adequate for traffic that is sensitive to network latency and throughput reductions such as voice or video streaming QoS allows you to address this issue by giving the time sensitive traffic a larger share of the network bandwidth Refer to Appendix D Quality of Service for more detailed information on the prioritization mechanisms supported by the ENCOM radios The following tables describe the Quality of Service settings Network Traffic Prioritization Field Name Enable Check this option to enable priority queue based QoS features Priority rules are used to specify the priority of
162. US vLAN Primary Server Backup Server Common Settings Default Access Rights Enable RADIUS Server Change Settings v Radius Server Settings Server Address 192 168 0 250 Shared Secret ae Authentication Port 1812 Domain Timeout 3000 gt ms lt gt lt gt Accounting Port 1813 Service Options Use RADIUS to login to the radio C Use RADIUS to login to the wireless network RADIUS is used to centralize the authentication of users that attempt to login to the radio and or to the network Refer to ENCOM STRATOS RADIUS Configuration Guide available separately for more information on setting up and using a RADIUS server with your radio network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the RADIUS settings tab Primary and Secondary Server Enable RADIUS Check this setting to enable the associated RADIUS server Primary or Server Backup If the radio cannot connect to the primary RADIUS server it will attempt to connect to the backup RADIUS server Server Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server Authentication Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS authentication requests are accepted The default is 1812 Accounting Port Enter the IP port on which RADIUS accounting updates are accepted The default is 1813 Shared Secret Enter a string that is used to obfuscate the user password that is sent to the RADIUS s
163. VLAN ID 20 only traffic i to west side radios Ni Rela erie to east side radios E PON RS NS ER CA Cher PU m ou pans non ne a se ns nes Le esd uv nas n cdussaeuadakaua acne Prune VLAN ID 20 Prune VLAN ID 10 To reduce the network traffic overhead two VLANs were defined VLAN ID 10 and VLAN ID 20 The VLANs are used to separate the network traffic associated with the radios in the west side of the town from the network traffic associated with the radios in the east side of the town The gateway radio and the two downstream radios that are connected to the gateway radio carry traffic for both VLANs The left hand downstream radio is configured to prune VLAN ID 20 and the right hand downstream radio is configured to prune VLAN ID 10 Because of this only the network packets associated with VLAN ID 10 are forwarded to the west side radios and only the network packets associated with VLAN ID 20 are forwarded to the west side radios Note that the same effect could be obtained by using a dual radio for the gateway radio and specifying a different SSID for each of the radio s wireless interface cards The east side radios would be configured with one of the SSIDs and the west side radios would be configured with the other SSID Since radios can only communicate with other radios that use the same SSID this would effectively isolate the east side network traffic from the west side network traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71
164. VLAN IDs will be dropped by the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 315 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom About Tab ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the About tab for a mesh radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Hardware Info Model Platform Architecture Firmware Info Version License ID Upgradable to CommpakBB 58 58 Mesh Geode TM x86 330 6DU9S SBIG vox This tab displays information regarding the radio s hardware and firmware It does not contain any user editable fields For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 316 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Export and Import Buttons The Export and Import buttons in the lower left hand corner of the radio configuration form allow you to save the radio s configuration settings to a file and to update the radio s configuration settings from a previously saved configuration file Refer to the following topics for more information on these functions e Exporting the Radio Configuration e Importing the Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 317 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Exporting the Radio Configuration The Export function is used to save the radio s
165. Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 72 encom WPA2 Enterprise Unicast Ciphers TKIP Unicast Ciphers AES CCM Group Ciphers TKIP Group Ciphers AES CCM Group Key Update Time Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA2 Enterprise leave this option unchecked Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm supported by the radio Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio Check this option as it is the most secure encryption algorithm supported by the radio Leave at 5 minutes 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Wireless Security sub tab will look similar to the following example Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Authentication Types C WPA Personal WP42 Personal C WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers Group Ciphers Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Dynamic CI RADIUS MAC Authentication Pre Shared Key ISNI7 gb KNMF3 AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM a minutes 1 60 7 f you are securing a dual rad
166. a proprietary protocol that increases bandwidth and security on the wireless network Note Due to compatibility issues the eMax protocol cannot be used if there is a repeater in the network or if 802 11 clients need to be supported by the radio Using Repeater Check this option if there is a repeater in the network Enable Roaming Refer to the Radio Mode topics see links above for information on this option Parent Radio MAC Refer to the Radio Mode topics see links above or information on this Address option Radio Parameter a Field Name Description ss s sY Frequency Band Displays the nominal frequency at which the radio operates This option can be changed if the radio card supports more than one band Channel Select the radio s operating frequency In Auto Frequency mode a master radio automatically searches for the frequency that has the least activity It then selects that frequency and uses it to communicate with the repeater or remote radios For the most stable link you should select a specific frequency from the list of available frequencies You can use the STRATOS Spectrum Scan For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 343 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Parameter Setup Field Name panel to determine the channel that has the least amount of activity in the vicinity of the radio If a repeater is present in the network both the
167. a radio 1 Select the radio you want to change from the Radio List panel 2 Select Assign Static IP Address from the Radio menu The Assign Static IP Address form is displayed Assign Static IP Address Radio MAC Address MAC Address 00 0D B9 15 B0 34 Login Credentials User Name admin Current Password New IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 250 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 3 Enter the radio s login credentials in the User Name and Current Password fields By default the User Name is admin and the Current Password field is left blank 4 Enter the radio s new IP address in the IP Address field and a suitable network mask in the Network Mask field You can also enter the address of the Default Gateway used by the radio to access services outside of the local network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 55 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL You should consult your I T department if you are not sure what to enter in these fields 5 Click the OK button 6 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 7 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the IP address assignment process RadioName Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At MeshRadio1 Assigning static IP address 192 168 0 250 Programming Radio 3 12 52 29 PM 8 If the assignment is
168. a v C Allow Clients Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz x By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the repeater radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master radio Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 j Hide SSID Radio Mode Hepko v C Allow Clients Enable Roaming v Channel Mode 40 MHz If you encounter connectivity issues between the repeater and the master radio you may want to manually select the master radio to which the remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 E Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients C Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v Parent Radio MAC Address 00 05 F 4 1D 3D 0F Enter the MAC address of the master radio in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 346 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the master from the list of radios that are currently connected to the repeater H Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description CompakBB 58 Single 00 0D B9 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 Mounted on north most light standard CommpakBB 5
169. aa aaiae iea aaa dehe a iee aaea ea Ea ENESES Remote Radios 2 3 Ando scssivisccitcssasiueiccecdvescaneisacaiasadeccstessdedediaveatigutecsesedaessaviutaaisadauusnsiiiaiasatanavsaedeeticn Securing Broadband NetWork 2 wissscssccscssccscssccsscavscsevtsssctsssercasccsssersscnvessestcesonssscnsoncstsstcssssavectesdesterstacncatccessze 514 Master Radio 5 isc aii ccien sateen nininniiesinaisienaviaavinn acronis bideaiwininiein ine 516 EPC ater RAGIONG ei iscsi a ra aa aa aa A ra aaa aeaa annee ttes e e aeaa dede de nd it 518 Repeater Radio 7h initier E Eaa Eaa E Aa ena adda acl aa Aadan 520 Remote RAGION G as terenca needed bs sateaecececddecakessdisg codes dhs etant ant Stades Ans di 522 Remote Radio 9 css ins oven toast ci scavea a aE die vuers cobanausadavies uen una Gade aceaeeenes 524 Adding Security to an Existing Network ss ssssssssssnseeennneeeeeenneneeennnse 526 Prerequisites Network Diagraim icsscicccssecssssssviscccscscsssssteasezcasnsesessssssstzcuenesscnnsseacesceesessivissicaceeeteosteasercaserseessis 527 Security Update Ord er E E A A E E T E E E E E E E T 529 Incorrect Update Order iisi cabled a aaier Ea ea A sie annee ei entier sets 530 Correct Update Qrde Peere eare iasa paaa o Sape ES Aa Erara e A a ae Eaa A aaa aiaa ae ar a N A 531 Update Ord r Example Atss ansni aa araa da a aaaea iaaa Eea da aiaa evens 533 Securing the Network 534 Configuring WPA2 Wireless Encryption sise 534 Assigning
170. accessed by context sensitive menus that are available in the various user interface panels File Menu Commands Change Login Credentials When you run ENCOM STRATOS you are prompted for the radios login credentials The credentials are used by STRATOS whenever it needs to access the radios If you entered the wrong information STRATOS will not be able to log into the radios and will prompt you for the credentials when required To address this situation you can either e Close down STRATOS and run it again entering the correct credentials when prompted e Select the Change Login Credentials item from the File menu and enter the correct credentials at the prompt This option is useful if you don t want to shut down the application When you select the Change Login Credentials menu item the Radio Login Credentials form is shown Radio Login Credentials Please enter the login credentials for the radios in your network User Name admin Password Enter the appropriate login credentials and then click the Login button to accept them STRATOS will now use the new credentials when it tries to login to the radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 36 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Import gt Radio List Select Import gt Radio List from the File menu to replace the contents of the radio list panel with the contents of a previously save
171. ace Radio Name ME Coetaut DRadiot Nose Hill Master ia Radio 2 Tuxedo Remote i Radio 2 McKnight Remote To instruct the alignment tool to monitor another link e Select the link in the Wireless Link Status table e Click the Enable for 30 minutes button e The pitch of the beeps will now reflect the signal strength of the selected link e The Wireless Link Status table s Align column will show a countdown timer on the link for which the alignment tool is active Status Align Interface Radio Name Radio 1 Nose Hill Master Radio 2 McKnight Remote i 4 Es met A adio 2 Tuxedo Remote e When the countdown timer reaches 0 the on radio alignment tool reverts to the Default link For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 146 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The remote on radio alignment function is only available on newer Encom radio models If the selected radio does not support this functionality STRATOS will not display the On Radio Alignment option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 147 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link Status Table The wireless link status table contains the list of currently active wireless connections Status Align Interface Radio Name MAC Address IP Address Tx Rx Rate Mbps Tx Rx Strength dBm Tx Rx CCO Uptime iz Default Radio 1 Nose Hill Mas
172. actical if you have a large network Remote Updates To perform remote updates you need to connect a computer or laptop that is running STRATOS to your Traffic Management Center s TMC network This should provide STRATOS with access to the entire wireless radio network You can then update the configuration of all radios from one central location The rest of this section describes the procedures required to secure your radios from the TMC Note that most of the concepts described are also applicable to local updates For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 526 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Prerequisites Network Diagram Before you start you need to understand the layout of your wireless network This is important to minimize network disruption while you are enabling the radios security features The most useful tool for this is a network diagram that identifies e The radios that are directly connected to your Traffic Management Center TMC via an Ethernet or fiber cable e The wireless connections between the radios that aren t directly connected to the TMC e Any radios that are co located and connected together via an Ethernet cable or switch and that aren t directly connected to the TMC ENCOM strongly suggests that you create a network diagram if one is not already available It is invaluable in determining the order in which the radios should be con
173. adio 3 radios are also selected Search Name o For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 a g Default i CA Commot amp Point to Point Network E CommpakBB 58 Sing Point to Point Radio 1 Page 121 Mesh Network folder is selected 49 Single Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 and Mesh Radio 3 radios are also 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Selecting a Range of Radios To select a range of radios use the following procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the first radio in the range The first radio will be highlighted i if Mesh Network afen Fado E Mesh Radio ie Mesh Radio 3 2 Press and hold down the Shift key on the keyboard 3 Click the left mouse button on the last radio in the range All of the radios between the first radio and the last radio will be selected fg F Mesh Network EES Mesh Radio 1 Note All radios in the range must reside in the same folder in order for this technique to work Selecting Multiple Radios To select multiple radios use the following procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the first radio The radio will be highlighted Er fa Mesh Network D Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio ba i Mesh Radio 3 2 Press and hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 3 Click the left mouse button on each of the other radios to select In t
174. adio name radio IP address and radio MAC address Simply click on the appropriate tab to change the view IP Address 7 ba Point to Point Network de i Point to Point Radio 1 amp Bae i Point to Point Radio 2 Mac Address Nam IP Address es 52 E 192 168 2 250 SM Mesh Network if 192 168 1 241 192 168 1 243 E 192 168 1 252 Y Point to Point Network ew ga 192 168 1 105 bam i E 192 168 1 206 Mac ddress Name IP aes Mac Address liv SE i i aa 00 0D BS 16 77 D4 Fo F 00 00 B9 17 91 4C oe 3 Mesh Network fen B 00 00 89 15 80 34 hane FE 00 0D B9 17 91 04 v ba Point to Point Network jo ge 00 00 42 25 E8 09 amp Bo a 00 00 42 25 E8 E2 Note The radios are always sorted alphabetically within their parent folders For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 116 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Tree View The radio tree view shows the radios that were discovered by ENCOM STRATOS or that were manually added using the Add Radio and Find Radio functions Each radio item contains a state icon the radio name and a warning icon displayed if the radio needs attention If the Show folder checkboxes option in the User Interface tab of the System Settings form is checked a checkbox is displayed next to the folder icons This checkbox allows you to
175. adio will synchronize its internal clock from the built in GPS receiver Note This option is only available if the radio contains a GPS receiver Primary NTP Server Specify the IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize the radio s internal clock This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 204 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Secondary NTP Server System Clock Field Name Time Zone Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected If applicable specify the IP address of the secondary NTP server This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 If there is no secondary NTP server in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected Select the time zone in which the radio is operating Note that the time zone has no effect on the operation of the radio and does not need to be set for normal operation If the time zone is not set the radio defaults to UTC time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 205 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Span
176. affic Cameras Controller Intersection 5 lecssssncsnssssssssssssssssssssssssccssssassnsssssncsscsccseccccscacsssccssccscsmncenecnend semssemsssmsssmassmassmassonssonssomssemssemessmassmasimassonssanssomsssmassmassmassmnssenssanssomesed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 514 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL A single master radio Radio 5 is directly connected to the Network Operations Center It is wirelessly connected to two repeater radios Radio 6 and Radio 7 that are in turn wirelessly connected to two remote radios Radio 8 and Radio 9 The remote radios are connected to switches to which traffic cameras and traffic controllers are connected The switches are configured to use VLANs to segregate the camera and traffic controller data The radios are configured to use a management VLAN see the VLAN Support topic for more information on configuring VLANs All of the radios use panel antennas to communicate with each other Because they are part of the same network they must be configured with the same Network Type Network SSID Channel Mode eMax Protocol and Wireless Security settings Because cameras typically generate a significant amount of traffic the radios will be configured to maximize throughput The configuration settings for each of the 4 radios are shown in the following topics e Master Radio 5 e Repeater Radio 6 e Repeater Radio 7 e Remote
177. age 292 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Static Security Options Active Key Select the encryption key to use Although you can define up to four static encryption keys only one key can be active Encryption Key 1 4 Enter the hexadecimal character sequence to use for the encryption key Hexadecimal characters include the decimal digits 0 9 and the letters A F The number of characters you need to enter depends on the Encryption Level you have specified An indicator located below the Active Key list will indicate the number of characters you have to enter Encryption Level 128 bit AES Active Key Key 1 nter 32 or more character HEX keys ey length must be even For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 293 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Dynamic Security Settings The following screen shot shows the dynamic security options for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal WP42 Personal Pre Shared Key The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog C WPA Enterprise EAP Method EAP TLS v WP42 Enterprise TLS Mode Use Dynamic Certificates v Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers i k yrity AES with CBC_MA
178. age 492 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Wireless Security sub tab will look similar to the following example Wireless Security Type O Disabled Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Wireless N Security Pre Shared Key IG 4 vD 4GdxLk D 7 If you have selected the A Only AN Clients G Only or B G N Clients option in the Network Type option in the Radio Settings tab update the settings using the following guidelines Wireless Security Select the Dynamic option Type Li Static key based security especially WEP is no longer considered secure and should only be used if client devices that don t support WPA or WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Pre If the WPA Personal option is checked enter a strong password Shared Key in the WPA Personal Pre Shared Key field The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA2 Personal Check this option WPA2 Personal is the most secure option that For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 493 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATO
179. al results for the transmit and receive tests 100m Radio CommpakBB 58 Single Remote 50m Radio CommpakBB 58 Single Remote 50m For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 159 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 8 The values displayed at the left of the Bandwath Test panel show the current and averaged bandwidth throughput The following screen shots show typical results for the transmit and receive tests Current Last 10s Average Current Last 10s Average mbps mbps mbps mbps mbps mbps Tx 74 5 pa 62 4 Rx 68 8 69 4 61 6 9 Press the Stop button to stop the test The button text will automatically change to Start Do not be too concerned with fluctuations that appear on the graph the average numbers listed to the left of the graph are more important Adding the average numbers gives you the link s effective throughput The available bandwidth depends on the channel mode you selected when configuring the radio A smaller channel mode allows for greater link distances at the cost of lower bandwidth A larger channel mode allows for shorter link distances but at greater bandwidth The available bandwidth can be affected by the signal strength since a low signal strength can translate into low link rates If you have configured a maximum link rate in the Basic Settings tab of the radio configuration form with a low value you will limit your available
180. ance and possibly the security of a radio network Refer to Appendix E VLAN Support for more information on implementing a VLAN based network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the VLAN settings tab Management VLAN Field Name Description Tagged Management By default the radio can be managed by connections over the native Data non tagged VLAN To be able to manage the radio using a specific VLAN check this option and enter the appropriate management VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field Enter the ID of the management VLAN a number in the range 1 4095 is required Client Tagging Field Name Tag Client Data Normally all of the radio s interfaces wireless and Ethernet act as VLAN trunks i e they carry the network traffic for all VLANs If a normal non VLAN aware device is plugged into the radio s Ethernet port its network traffic will not be tagged and it will not be able to communicate with For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 221 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL devices that are part of a VLAN Check this option to set up the radio s Ethernet port as an access port for a specific VLAN This gives devices connected to the Ethernet port access to the other devices in the specified VLAN VLAN ID Enter the ID of the client VLAN to a number in the range 1 4095 is required VLAN Priority The priority to assign to t
181. and t SSID Encorbesh Mote khz se Drop target ss CR ne Dans 4 lf you move the mouse pointer over a drop target a gray overlay is displayed that shows the new position of the panel E Encom Stratos Ie adess Gray overlay shows USDE 12 RT ED L OSM 1163125 where panel will be i OMADE 1162125 docked L 22 ws Mesh Fado 3 eS Met Sado sco wdi Meth ado 2 Wheless Sacs Hado 2 24 GHz ISM Band Newark 550 Erconet Race Mocs Kess Chane Hede HH Charnel 2637 HH For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 34 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 5 The drop targets close to the edges of the STRATOS main window shown below will cause the panel to be docked at the edge of the main window y STRATOS A WINDOW 6 The drop targets that are clustered together shown below will cause the panel to be docked inside of the panel on which the mouse window is hovering 7 If you release the mouse button when the mouse pointer is not hovering over a drop target the panel will be left floating You can move a floating panel to any location inside or outside of the main window For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 35 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Menu Bar The main menu bar provides access to most of the ENCOM STRATOS functions Many of these functions can also be
182. and the configuration task will show up as having failed Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At Test Master Configuring Radio Done 99 Test Master Getting configuration Done Radio not responding 3 00 09 PM 3 02 09 PM 100 Configuration retrieved 2 59 42 PM 2 59 49 PM This is normal This radio will become available again when the radio that is connected to the TMC is updated 3 Repeat step 2 for the remaining radios in your network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 535 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Assigning a Secure Password Changing a radio s password has no effect on the wireless links You can therefore change the radio passwords in any order and at any time To secure access to the radios 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure a Select Radio gt Change Password from the main menu b In the Change Password form that is displayed i Enter a strong password in the New Password field The password should be at least 8 characters long and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters ii Enter the same password in the Confirm Password field i Press the OK button to save the new password to the radio 3 Repeat step 2 for the remaining radios in your network To more easil
183. anning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN DHCP Server 4A network must have only one active DHCP server Network devices may get conflicting IP addresses if more than one DHCP server is active on the network Enable DHCP Server DHCP Server Settings Start Address 192 168 1100 EndAddress 192 168 1 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 2 DNS Server Address 192 168 1 3 WINS Server Address 192 168 1 1 The following tables describe the DHCP server settings DHCP Server Field Name Description Enable DHCP Server Check this option to enable the radio s DHCP server When this option is enabled the radio will assign IP addresses to any other radio or any other other device that is configured to obtain their IP addresses dynamically Important Severe network instability can occur if there is more than one DHCP server present in a network or network segment Do not enable this option if a router or another radio is already acting as a DHCP server DHCP Server Settings Field Name Description DHCP Address Range Specify the start and end range of the IP addresses that will be provided by the DHCP server as shown in the following example DHCP Address Range 192 168 1 100 to 192 168 1 200 In this example IP addresses in the 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 range will be assigned to devices that use dynamic addressing
184. any name e Contact name e Contact email address 12 When your request has been processed a license upgrade file will be sent to the email address that you specified in the request Refer to the Performing a Manual Upgrade topic for instructions on manually upgrading your license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 107 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Performing a Manual Upgrade To perform a manual license upgrade 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 20 radios Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Finish Manual Upgrade 2 Click the Finish Manual Upgrade button The Manual Upgrade page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Manual Upgrade 1 If you have received an upgrade file from ENCOM click the Import Upgrade File button and select the file you were sent when prompted Import Upgrade File 2 Click the Close button to return to ENCOM STRATOS plus For ENCOM STRATOS plus Ve
185. ap providers support satellite image based maps These are useful at spotting landmarks that can help you locate or find a radio Zoom Bar The zoom bar allows you to zoom the map display in or out UA With the zoom bar you can e Use the button to zoom out e Use the button to zoom in e Use the slider to zoom in or out Alternatively click the left mouse pointer on the map to select it and then use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out Caching Mode The map display consists of a number of image tiles that are downloaded from the map provider and displayed on your computer The caching mode determines how the map tiles are used by your computer Three caching modes are available 1 Server Only No caching is performed The map tiles are always requested from the server This option is typically slower than the other options and is not usually recommended Server and Cache The map tiles will be downloaded from the map provider and stored on your computer If present stored tiles are used to render the map New tiles are requested from the server as required This option should be used if your computer is normally connected to the internet Cache Only Only the stored tiles are used to render the map This option is recommended for computers that don t have access to the Internet For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 133 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus
186. aptop running ENCOM STRATOS For information on configuring ENCOM point to point radios refer to the following topic e Configuring Point to Point Radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 13 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Mesh Radio Network A mesh radio network consists of an arbitrary number of radios that can automatically manage their communication links The main advantages of a mesh network as opposed to the more traditional forms are as follows e The network is self forming links are automatically formed between radios e The network is self healing if a radio fails the remaining radios automatically reconfigure themselves to route packets around the failed radio e Routing algorithms in the radios automatically select the best path to use for routing packets ENCOM mesh radios provide a flexible solution for implementing mesh radios In particular e You can specify whether the radios are used solely for meshing for client access only or both e Different antennas can be used based on the network design and communication requirements e The system can support multiple gateways this provides redundancy for the wired link to your network operations center e Simplified configuration using the ENCOM STRATOS application e Secure communication using the latest WPA and WPA2 encryption technologies For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 1
187. ard Ethernet cables A standard Ethernet cable is used to connect the radio to the PoE injector For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 26 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Chapter 4 Using ENCOM STRATOS Running ENCOM STRATOS You can run ENCOM STRATOS using any of the following methods e Select Programs gt Encom gt Stratos gt Stratos from the Windows Start menu e If you requested that a STRATOS shortcut be installed on your desktop you can start STRATOS by double clicking the desktop icon Encom Stratos If you requested that a STRATOS shortcut be installed in the QuickLaunch panel you can start STRATOS by clicking on the QuickLaunch icon For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 27 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Radio Login Form When you run ENCOM STRATOS you will be presented with the Radio Login Credentials form Radio Login Credentials Please enter the login credentials for the radios in your network User Name admin Password Enter the user name and password used to login to your radios This information will be used by STRATOS whenever it needs to access the radios If the user names or passwords differ from radio to radio you will be prompted to enter the individual radio s login credentials when required By default the User Name is admin and the Password field is left
188. ared key For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 361 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Authentication Types Field Name EAP Method Specify the authentication protocol to use Two options are available Option Description Pass Through Authentication requests are relayed to a RADIUS server EAP TLS TLS certificates are used for authentication This option is only used by the WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise authentication types It is hidden if no enterprise option is selected TLS Mode Specify how TLS certificates are to be used Two options are available option Description Use Dynamic TLS certificates are negotiated dynamically using Certificates anonymous Diffie Hellman MODP 2048 bit algorithm Use Imported A TLS certificate that has been imported into the Certificates radio is used This option is only used when the EAP Method is set to EAP TLS It is hidden if the EAP TLS option is not selected For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 362 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Encryption Algorithms Field Name Description Unicast Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames sent to individual radios Two options are available Option Description Temporal Key Integrity Protocol An encryption protocol that is compatible with legacy WEP equipment but enhanced to
189. assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example WINS Server Address 192 1 68 1 3 If there is no WINS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 371 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL SNMP Settings The following screen shot shows the SNMP tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP gos RADIUS VLAN SNMP Service SNMP is an application layer protocol The management station makes a request and the managed device SNMP agent replies to this request In SNMP version 1 there are three main actions Get Set and Trap Commpak Broadband radios only support the Get action Because of this the SNMP service can only be used for network monitoring purposes Enable SNMP Service SNMP Service Settings Host IP 192 168 1 50 Read only community name public Contact information Michael Smith Location information Comer of 32nd Ave and 16th Street The following tables describe the SNMP service settings SNMP Service Field Name Description Enable SNMP Service Check this option enable the radio s SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent When this option is enabled diagnost
190. ast traffic from being forwarded by the radio This can enhance the performance of your radio network by eliminating unnecessary network traffic The following table describes the network filter settings Network Traffic Filtering Field Name Description Block incoming Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on the radio s multicast traffic on the Ethernet port from being forwarded to the radio s wireless interfaces Ethernet port Block outgoing Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on the radio s multicast traffic on the wireless interfaces from being forwarded to the radio s Ethernet port Ethernet port Block multicast traffic Check this option to prevent multicast traffic arriving on one of the radio s between wireless physical radio cards WDS links or client wireless connections from being connections forwarded to the other radio cards WDS links or client wireless connections Note that some network protocols such as those used by traffic cameras use multicast packets to operate Because of this you must be careful when disabling these settings Refer to Appendix F Network Filters for more information on setting up the network filters For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 208 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings The following screen shot shows the DHCP server tab for a broadband radio Time Sp
191. aster and the remote antennas Manually align the antennas so that they point to each other with reasonable accuracy Since the antennas are highly directional they need to be positioned properly in order for a connection to be established Also make sure that both of the antennas are installed so that the polarization stickers at the back of the antennas face the same direction Apply power to both radios Run ENCOM STRATOS on a computer that is connected to your private network The master and remote radios should show up in the Radio List panel as being on line Make sure that the Wireless Link Status panel is visible If it is not currently visible e In the main menu navigate to the View gt Panels item and verify that the Wireless Link Status option is checked e If the Wireless Link Status panel is hidden behind another panel click on the Wireless Link Status tab to bring it to the front of the other panels i Ts Click the Wireless Rx Link Status tab 0 J oath 20 Wireless Link Status Bandwidth Test In the Radio List select the master radio this is the radio that is closest to the computer running STRATOS If the antennas are properly aligned the Wireless Link Status panel should display the wireless links established between the master and remote radios Select the wireless link that is associated with the remote radio whose antenna you want to align 10 Manually adjust the master and remot
192. ata Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Under normal operation the network is not excessively loaded However when several users were accessing the network with their laptops it was noted that the network performance degraded and the video feeds suffered from dropped frames and jerky behavior In order to prevent the laptop traffic from impacting the more important video and controller traffic it was desired to use the WMM prioritization scheme Unfortunately WMM priorities are lost when the data packets pass trough the Ethernet link To address this issue DSCP priorities were used to ensure that the packet priorities were preserved across the Ethernet link WMM prioritization was enabled as well to further enhance the quality of the video stream The QoS configuration settings for each of the 7 radios are described in the following topics e Master and Remote Radio Configuration e Repeater Radio Configuration DSCP can only be used with IP based traffic If the protocol used to communicate NOTE with remote devices is not based on the IP based protocols use the priority queue mechanism to implement QoS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 440 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master and Remote Radio Configuration For this example assume that e The network operations center communicates with the traffic controllers on TCP port 6000 e
193. atic and Dynamic security options contain additional settings that need to be configured The following topics describe these in more detail e Static Security Options e Dynamic Security Options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 358 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Static Security Settings A and B G Modes The following screen shot shows the static security options for a point to multipoint radio when the Wireless Mode option in the Radio Settings tab is set to A Mode or G Mode Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Static Security Options Encryption Level 128 bit WEP v Encryption Key 1 AE74D487FC4E37596F4298C53D Active Key Key 1 v Encryption Key 2 Encryption Key 3 Enter 26 character HEX keys Encryption Key 4 The following table describes the static security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Static Security Options Field Name Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level to use Three options are available Option Description 64 bit WEP Uses a 40 bit encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is considered to be obsolete and should only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit WEP Uses a 104 bit
194. ation has been obtained the radio configuration form is displayed ES Configure CommpakBB 24 58 Dual Basic Settings Location Radia 1 Radio 2 Network About Identification Radio Name CommpakBB 24 58 Dual Radio MAC Address 00 0D B9 21 58 E0 Description Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not S eb z IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 128 151 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 128 254 The configuration settings are logically grouped using a tabbed interface The following topics describe the settings found in each tab e Basic Settings tab e Location tab e Radio tab e Network tab e About tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 176 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus AI WIBELESS USER MANUAL Basic Settings Tab The following screen shot shows the basic configuration settings tab for a broadband radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Identification Radio Name CommpakBB 24 58 Dual Radio MAC Address 00 0D B9 21 5B E0 Description Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not S
195. ation is used For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 81 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Notifications Alerts ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL STRATOS can generate a number of alerts that notify you of problems with your network When an alert condition is occurs STRATOS will e Add the alert to the Alerts panel and automatically show the panel e f the Mail Server is enabled send a notification e mail to each recipient in the Recipients list The following screen shot shows the Alert Settings panel of the System Settings form Alert Settings Radio is offline Radio is back online RSSI reading C CCQ reading C Data rate The following table describes the individual alert settings Alert Settings Field Name Radio is offline Radio is back online less than less than less than Description Check this option to get notified that a radio has been offline for the specified amount of time Check this option to get notified that a radio has been online for the lt gt dBm x Mbps specified amount of time for more than for more than for more than for more than for more than 2 20 20 B minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes This alert is only generated if a Radio is offline alert was previously generated for the radio RSSI reading Check this option to get notified
196. ay This function will automatically zoom and re center the map so that all of Zoom All Button the radios are visible on the map Note If the Show folder checkboxes option in the System Settings form is checked only those radios associated with the folders that are checked will be shown on the map a Click on the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the current map view to the Windows clipboard You can then paste this copy into most Windows rea to Clipboard applications that support embedded pictures utton For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 136 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS Map Display ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The map display shows the actual road or satellite map Icons are overlayed on the map to show the location and state of your radios w Fe ER La Wena eee rhe 5 L 3 LE l p gt i das l a ER J Eiee Refer to the following topics for more information on the map display e Popup Help e Panning and Zooming e Selecting a Radio e Map Context Menu e Adding a Radio to the Map e Moving a Radio on the Map For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 137 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Map Popup Help Placing your mouse pointer over a radio icon will display a popup up help balloon that shows some important information about the radio
197. ay want to block the wireless to wireless traffic so that multicast traffic generated by one of the devices is not forwarded to the other devices In addition you may want to block outgoing Ethernet traffic so that the the multicast traffic generated by the wireless devices is not forwarded to the cameras connected to the Ethernet port The following screen shot shows the the network filter configuration to use for the remote radios this is only required if you want to manage the multicast traffic generated by the locally attached devices Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Multicast Traffic To achieve better radio performance you may be able to reduce the amount of radio traffic by blocking out filtering unwanted multicast packets 1 C Block incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 2 Block outgoing multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 3 Block multicast traffic between wireless connections Wireless Connections oflte Ethemet Interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 481 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix G Securing Your Wireless Network General Security Considerations ENCOM radios provide a vital link between your network operations center and field devices such as traffic controllers traffic cameras school zone beacons etc To prevent unauthorized agents
198. bandwidth For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 160 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Traffic Panel The Network Traffic panel displays the amount of traffic between the currently selected radio and the other radio or radios that are connected to it TE Rx TxPackets Ax Packets i P Rens 1e A ee 1 D Ok wds1 Mesh Radio 3 s 0 0k wds3 Mesh Radio 2 3 3k 0 0k Radio 2 3 3k 0 0k wds2 Mesh Radio 3 3 3k 0 0k The table at the left shows all interfaces available on the radio This includes the ethernet interfaces as well as the wireless interfaces For master and mesh radios the traffic on each card is broken down to the individual wireless links that are formed between the wireless cards and the remote radios In the example above the Radio 1 interface has two wireless connections associated with it wds1 and wds3 The wireless card s overall data rates consist of the sum of the data rates for all of the wireless links associated with the card The radio s first wireless card is displayed as Radio 1 the second card as Radio 2 and so on The graph at the right shows the short term trending of the traffic for the item that is selected in the table Click the left mouse button on an item in the table to select it The following table describes the information that is displayed for each connection The interface being monitored The number of bytes
199. ble eMax and therefore cannot use WMM In that case use the priority queue mechanism to implement QoS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 428 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master and Remote Radio Configuration For this example assume that e The network operations center communicates with the traffic controllers on TCP port 6000 e The video cameras stream video on UDP port 5000 The master and remote radios radios 1 4 and 5 in the diagram would be configured as follows 1 Enable the Network Traffic Prioritization and WMM options in the radio configuration form s QoS tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic elas nues Prioritization QoS WMM options dress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 429 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus j NIRELESS USER MANUAL 2 Create the traffic controller priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Traffic controllers Enter a name that describes the data affecte
200. cation Radio Model Displays the model number of the wireless radio card This information is useful when troubleshooting issues with the radio Wireless MAC Displays the MAC address assigned to the wireless radio card For point Address to multipoint radios the MAC address of the wireless radio cards are different than the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 341 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Field Name Network Type Identifies the radio network type This setting cannot be changed for point to multipoint radios Network SSID Enter a name used to identify the network in which the wireless radio will take part The Network SSID is case sensitive and may contain spaces Note You should change the default SSID assigned at the factory to a unique SSID for your network You can minimize interference between adjacent networks by assigning a unique SSID to each network Important All radios that participate in the same network must be assigned the same Network SSID Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the Network SSID from being broadcast by the wireless radio This prevents external devices from being able to discover the network s SSID and potentially connect to it Radio Mode Select the radio mode based on the location of the radio with respect to the network operations center Refer
201. ccess to the radio 1 2 3 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network Select the radio you want to secure Select Radio gt Change Password from the main menu The Change Password form is displayed Change Password Change password for the specified user User Name admin New Password Confirm Password 4 Enter a strong password in the New Password field The password should be at least 8 characters long and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters 5 Enter the same password in the Confirm Password field 6 Press the OK button to save the new password to the radio To more easily manage your network you should use the same administrative password for all of your radios When you log into STRATOS it uses the password you enter to log into the radios in your network If a radio has been configured with a different password a icon is displayed next to the radio in the radio list STRATOS will not be able to access the radio until you explicitly log into it To do this click the left mouse button on the radio and enter the appropriate credentials when prompted to For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 483 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Secure Radio Configuration Settings Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios Radio Se
202. cellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 The following tables describe the dynamic security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Authentication Types WPA Personal Check this option to enable WPA personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA2 Personal Check this option to enable WPA2 personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key WPA2 Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA2 enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 247 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Authentication s Field Name Description ss s sSsSY EAP Method D the authentication protocol to use Two options are available Pass En Authentication requests are relayed to a RADIUS server EAP TLS TLS certificates are used for authentication This option is only used by the WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise authentication types It is hidden if no enterprise option is selected TLS Mode Specify how TLS certificates are to be used Two options are available Option Description Use Dynamic TLS certificates are negotiated dynamically using Certificates anonymous
203. certain situations e g for performance or security reasons you may want to prevent a radio from forwarding traffic from certain VLANs to other radios In order to do this you will need to configure the VLAN Pruning section of the radio configuration form s VLAN sub tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging C Tagged Management Data C Tag Client Data Management Address Access Port Address Check to prevent forwarding of specified VLAN data Pruning Prune VLANs VLAN IDs 120 30 When VLAN pruning is enabled packets that are tagged with the VLAN IDs specified in the VLAN IDs field will not be forwarded to other radios Please refer to the following topics for more information on the two most common VLAN pruning scenarios e VLAN Pruning for Performance e VLAN Pruning for Security For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 458 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL VLAN Pruning for Performance VLAN pruning can be used to increase the performance of a network by preventing traffic from being forwarded to radios that do not need it For example in the diagram shown below a radio network provides coverage for a large town Ethernet Backbone VLAN ID 10 and 20 traffic Le nl Gateway Radio an ee F LR Np an N VLAN ID 10 only traffic j
204. ces that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example DNS Server Address 1 92 168 1 2 If there is no DNS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Enter the IP Address of the WINS server that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example WINS Server Address 192 1 68 1 3 If there is no WINS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 254 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL SNMP Settings The following screen shot shows the SNMP tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP qos RADIUS VLAN SNMP Service SNMP is an application layer protocol The management station makes a request and the managed device SNMP agent replies to this request In SNMP version 1 there are three main actions Get Set and Trap Commpak Broadband radios only support the Get action Because of this the SNMP service can only be used for network monitoring purposes Enable SNMP Service SNMP Service Settings Host IP 192 168 1 50 Read only community name public Contact information Michael Smith Location in
205. ck Time Zone lt Not Set gt v Because a large number of configuration options are available the network configuration tab is split up into a number of sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Time Settings e Spanning Tree Protocol Settings e Network Filter Settings e DHCP Server Settings e SNMP Settings e QoS Quality of Service Settings e RADIUS Settings e VLAN Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 364 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Time Settings The following screen shot shows the NTP settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP aos RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using NTP Server v Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 System Clock Time Zone GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada v The following table describes the time synchronization settings Time Synchronization Field Name Description Synchronize radio time Select one of the following options to set the system clock Nothing The radio s time will only be synchronized when a configuration change is made by STRATOS NTP Server The radio will synchronize its internal clock to the specified NTP server time at regular intervals GPS Receiver The radio will sy
206. com ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link Status Bars The bottom section of the Wireless Link Status panel contains a set of bar graphs that display the signal strength RSSI and client connection quality CCQ of the wireless link that is selected in Wireless Link Status table Show ASSI for 10 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 he AllChains py RSSI dBm Chain 0 TE a E _ Sj oa iii O Chain 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 For connections that are associated with a Wireless N radio card a small panel is displayed at the left of the bar graphs The panel allows you to select a specific antenna chain whose signal strength will be displayed in the RSSI chart This feature can help you align the antennas associated with the Wireless N connections For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Show ASSI for All Chains Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 Page 152 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link RSSI Colors The color of the signal strength RSSI bars in the Wireless Link Status panel indicates the relative strength of the signal By default the following colors are used The signal strength is much too low The connection will probably not be stable and will have low throughput The signal strength too low The connection will be marginal and may not have good throughput The signal strength is within the op
207. com Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value in the IP header that the rule will apply to You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all DSCP values Field Name Set priority to The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Set DSCP to Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified no change will be made to the packet s DSCP value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 218 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL RADIUS Settings The following screen shot shows the RADIUS settings tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Primary Server Backup Server Common Settings Default Access
208. configure a radio using a saved configuration file 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Import button The Select configuration profile file form is displayed Select configuration profile file to import Look in Profiles fe CommpakBB 24_58 Dual profile My Recent Documents File name CommpakBB 24_58 Dual profile 5 My Network Files of type Profile files 2 Select the configuration profile you want to import and press the Open button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 227 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 The Import Radio Settings form will be displayed Import Radio Settings Instructions The default import options have been selected Make any changes required and press the OK button to proceed Radio Module Assignments Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 2 4 GHz ISM Band Radiol 2 4 GHz ISM Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band y Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band Settings to Copy Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network 4 The Radio Module Assignments group allows you to specify how the radio module settings are applied Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 2 4 GHz ISM Band v p Radiol 2 4GHz15M Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Radio 2 5 8 GHz1SM Ba
209. correct some WEP flaws This option should only be used for networks that contain legacy WEP devices Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network Group Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames broadcast to all radios Two options are available Option Description Temporal Key Integrity Protocol An encryption protocol that is compatible with legacy WEP equipment but enhanced to correct some WEP flaws This option should only be used for networks that contain legacy WEP devices Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network Miscellaneous Field Name Description Group Key Update The interval at which the dynamically generated keys are updated Time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 363 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Tab The following screen shot shows the network settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using Nothing don t synchronize v Primary NTP Server Secondary NTP Server System Clo
210. current settings to a configuration profile file This allows you to e Make a backup copy of the radio s configuration e Save the radio s configuration to a profile or template file for use in configuring other radios To export a radio s configuration 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Export button The Save configuration profile file form is displayed Save radio configuration to profile file Save in O Profiles J My Recent Documents My Documents My Computer File name Mesh Radio 1 lt 3 My Network Save as type Profile files 2 Specify the name of the file you want to save the radio s configuration settings to and then press the Save button to save the settings By default STRATOS saves configuration profile files in the My Documents Encom Wireless Profiles folder For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 318 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Importing the Radio Configuration The Import function allows you to update the radio s settings from a previously saved configuration profile file This function allows you to e Restore the radio s configuration from a backup file This can be useful when you have to replace a radio in the field e Apply the settings from one radio to another This can be used to provision new radios quickly and ensure that they are compatible with other radios in the network
211. d WMM is used to prioritize certain type of traffic such as VOIP Voice Over For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 213 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IP and video streams that are sensitive to network latency and capacity issues Note The WMMVLAN priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Use DSCP Priorities Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the DSCP priority of the incoming data packets Note The DSCP priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Priority Rules Field Name Description Priority Rule List By default ENCOM STRATOS will assign the highest priority to the radio management traffic Other types of network traffic can be assigned to specific priority queues by creating custom priority rules The Priority Rules list displays the custom priority rules that you have defined When defining a priority rule you specify the type of traffic that the rule is to act upon and the priority to assign to the matching traffic In the following example two priority rules have been defined Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C Traffic controller TCP 2773 7
212. d by the rule TCP v Post 6000 Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Destination Address es DSCP Assign a high priority to the rule Set priority to Ee Highest Set DSCP to 3 Press OK to create the new rule For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 430 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 4 Create the video camera priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule b Video cameras Enter a name that describes the data affected by the rule UDP w Part s Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Destination Address es DLF Assign the priority typically used for WMM Video Set prionty to Set DSCP to 5 Press OK to create the new rule Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es C Traffic controllers TCP 6000 C Video cameras UDP 5000 New priority rules New Priority New DSCP 7 5 ae 5 E Note that STRATOS will automatically assign the hig
213. d radio list database file Use the Export Radio List function to create such a database file This function is useful in cases where you want to restore the radio list from a backup copy or transfer radio information from one workstation to another To import a radio list database 1 Select Import gt Radio List from the File menu You will be prompted to open a radio database file Open radio database file Look in Encom Stratos E MapTiles s3db A 4 Radio_backup s3db My Recent E Radio sdf Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer File name Radio_backup s3db gt My Network Files of type Database files 2 Select the file that contains the radio list you want to import and then press the Open button 3 STRATOS will check the file you selected to ensure that it contains a valid radio list database If the file is not valid the following prompt is displayed Could not import The File you selected is not a radio database file Please select a valid radio database file and try again 4 lf you selected a valid radio list database file the contents of the radio list panel will be replaced with the contents of the selected database file For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 37 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Starting with ENCOM STRATOS V1 3 0 radio list databases are identified with the sdf file extension Previo
214. d to respond to an authentication request with the user s group name The following table describes the options that are available for this setting Option Deseripon View Settings The user will be able to inspect the radio s configuration settings but will not be able to make any changes Change Settings The user will be able to inspect and change the radio s configuration settings This setting is ignored if the RADIUS server responds to an authentication request with the user s group name Check this option to send RADIUS accounting packets to the RADIUS server This information is normally used for user billing and is not usually needed for typical ENCOM radio networks For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 381 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc SA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL VLAN Settings The following screen shot shows the VLAN settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data WLAN ID 400 VLAN ID 600 VLAN Priority 5 High v Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 100 IP Address 192 168 128 70 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning Prune VLANs
215. ders an arrow is displayed that indicates the direction of the sort Radio IP ddress Sent J Nose Hill Master 192 168 96 40 121 P Dalhousie Remote 192 168 128 50 121 W Tuxedo Remote 192 168 128 571 120 amp McKnight Remote 192 168 128 52 120 W Thomcliffe Repeater 192 168 128 562 119 Click once to sort in ascending order and click again to sort in descending order Ping Test Context Menu To display the Ping Test context menu click the right mouse button anywhere on the ping test list The following context menu is displayed Remove Radios Del Remove All Radios The following table describes the commands available in the context menu Remove Radios Del Removes the selected radios from the list If no more radios are left Remove All Radios Removes all radios from the list and stops the ping test if it is currently running bee the ping test is automatically stopped For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 165 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Tasks Panel The Tasks panel displays the current state of long running tasks Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At Sp PTMP Remote 2 Upgrading firmware to version 5 9 Uploading upgrade file 9 9 50 42 4M W PTMPRemote1 Configuring Radio Done 100 Radio configured 9 46 50 4M 3 46 57 AM PIMP Master Assigning static IP address 192 168 128 135 Done 100 Radio ava
216. dio 1 tab and the Wireless Security sub tab 5 Update the settings using the following guidelines Wireless Security Select the Dynamic option Type di Static key based security especially WEP is no longer considered secure and should only be used if client devices that don t support WPA or WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Leave unchecked unless client devices that support WPA but don t support WPA2 security must connect to the radio WPA Personal Pre If the WPA Personal option is checked enter a strong password in Shared Key the WPA Personal Pre Shared Key field The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA2 Personal Check this option WPA2 Personal is the most secure option that can be easily set up and managed WPA2 Personal Pre If the WPA2 Personal option is checked enter a strong password in Shared Key the WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key field The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters WPA Enterprise Unless you have set up the IT infrastructure that supports WPA Enterprise leave this option unchecked For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 502 201
217. dio1 5 8 GHz ISM Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band vl Radio2 5 8 GHz ISM Band The Target Radio Modules column lists the wireless radio modules that are present on the radio The Profile Radio Modules column shows the options that are available for each wireless interface that is present on the radio STRATOS will find the best match between the profile and target radio modules and will assign these by default You can change the default assignments by selecting the appropriate items from the list boxes In the example shown above STRATOS applied the matching radio modules from the profile to the target radio modules If you didn t want to disturb the configuration of the second radio module then you would select the Don t Copy option from the second list box as shown below For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 389 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radiol 5 8 GHz1SM Band Fadio2 5 8 GHz ISM Band 5 The Settings to Copy options allow you to specify what settings to import from the configuration profile Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network These are described further in the following table Option Deseription o Copy all settings Use this option when you need to configure a radio so that it matches t
218. e Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 309 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value in the IP header that the rule will apply to You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all DSCP values Field Name Set priority to The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Set DSCP to Optionally specify the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria You can select a predefined DSCP value from the drop down list or enter a number between 0 and 63 If this value is not specified no change will be made to the packet s DSCP value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 310 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL RADIUS Settings The following screen shot shows the RADIUS settings tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol QoS RADI
219. e antennas by small increments until you get the best signal strength RSSI and connection quality CCQ readings If you must decide choose a better connection quality over a better signal strength 11 Physically tighten the antennas to their mountings There should be no possibility of the antenna moving out of alignment due to high winds loading from ice and snow etc For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 397 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 12 Repeat steps 9 and 11 for each antenna pair that you need to align Connection Quality is a more important factor than Signal Strength as it tells you if the signal will be stable high connection quality or unstable low connection quality You should always attempt to achieve the highest possible Connection Quality for each radio link in the system The signal strength for any particular link should be between 40 dBm and 70 dBm with 55 dBm being ideal A signal strength above 40 dBm may lead to degraded performance because the signal is too strong Lower the radio s output power to get a suitable signal strength A signal strength below 65 dBm could cause intermittent connectivity on the link You may need to add a repeater in the network to raise the signal strength to a suitable value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 398 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS pl
220. e created under Programs gt Encom gt Stratos in the Windows Start menu i Encom Stratos Shortcuts ee A Setup can create shortcuts to Encom Stratos on your Desktop and in the Quick Launch bar Specify the shortcuts you want to create on C Create shortcut in Quick Launch panel Press the Next button to proceed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 19 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 The final confirmation page is shown i Encom Stratos Confirm Installation The installer is ready to install Encom Stratos on your computer Click Next to start the installation Press the Next button to proceed 6 ENCOM STRATOS will be installed on your computer i Encom Stratos Installing Encom Stratos Encom Stratos is being installed Please wait Cancel Enter the appropriate administrator account credentials if you are prompted to do so 7 When the installation has completed press the Close button to exit the installation wizard 8 ENCOM STRATOS is now installed on your computer For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 20 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Network Setup ENCOM STRATOS makes use of certain network services to carry out its configuration and management tasks Because of this you must configure your network s firewalls and routers to allow access to
221. e i E Point to Point Radio 1 Could not login to the radio Encom Stratos could not log into the radio to obtain its configuration information Please click on the radio name and enter the appropriate login credentials at the prompt For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 118 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Version 2 of ENCOM STRATOS also known as ENCOM STRATOS plus introduces a number of advanced monitoring features that require licensing If your network contains more radios than are supported by the current license STRATOS will automatically choose the radios that will participate in the advanced monitoring functions These radios are identified by a symbol at the right of the radio s name in the Radio List panel As well a License Exceeded indicator is displayed at the bottom of the panel to alert you to the situation i Radio List uy Name IPAddress MAC Address H lv Default a La a Nose Hill Broadband Network i Dalhousie Remote E McKnight Remote ma Nose Hill Master t a Tinedo Remote University Mesh Network Mesh 11 Mesh 12 Mesh 13 Mesh 14 Radio License Exceeded Please refer to the Licensing topic for more information on licensing the advanced monitoring features For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 119 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS
222. e radio The icon at the left of the radio name indicates the state of the test for the radio One of the following icons is displayed No ICMP packets have been sent to the radio yet 2 seconds for a response before proceeding to the next radio m The radio responded in a timely fashion to the last ICMP packet sent to it Ez The radio did not respond to the last ICMP packet sent to it IP Address The IP address of the radio An ICMP packet has been sent to the radio but the response had not been received yet STRATOS will wait a maximum of For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 162 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The number of ICMP packets sent to the radio The number of replies received from the radio The percentage of replies received from the radio 100 means that a reply was received for each ICMP packet sent to the radio The minimum latency encountered during the test The maximum latency encountered during the test The average latency encountered during the test The latency encountered during the last round of ICMP packets sent to the radio Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the features of the Ping Test panel e Carrying Out a Ping Test e Sorting the Ping Test List e Ping Test Context Menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 163 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS pl
223. e shown in a number of different formats as described in the following table The raw throughput in megabits per second This is displayed for 40 MHz channels It indicates a raw throughput of 108 54 2 megabits per second This is displayed for 10 MHz channels It indicates a raw throughput of 27 54 2 megabits per second This is displayed for 5 MHz channels It indicates a raw throughput of 12 48 4 megabits per second For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 149 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The SP indicates that the link is operating in Short Preamble mode This is a special low overhead mode for 802 11b connections The 11 indicates a raw throughput of 11 megabits per second 104 0 HT The HT indicates that the radio is operating in High Throughput Wireless N mode The 104 0 indicates a raw throughput of 104 megabits per second Tx Rx Strength dBm The current transmit and receive signal strength of the wireless connection Refer to the Wireless Link RSSI Colors topic for information on the colors used in the signal strength graph Tx Rx CCQ The current transmit and receive connection quality Refer to the Wireless Link CCQ Colors topic for information on the colors used in the connection quality graph Uptime The amount of time that the wireless connection has been active This value is reset to 00 00 00 if the connection
224. e signal strength is too high The connection may not be stable and may not have good throughput 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Inactive Set the color to display when no signal strength information is available for a Static link i e the link is defined but there is no wireless connection between the radios Static links can be defined for Broadband or Point to Multipoint radios Either define a static WDS link for master radios or specify a parent radio for remotes For Broadband radios refer to the following topics e Broadband Radio WDS Setup e Broadband Remote Radio Setup For Point to Multipoint radios refer to the following topics e Point to Multipoint Radio WDS Setup e Point to Multipoint Remote Radio Setup Default button Click the Default button to restore the color and threshold settings to their factory default values For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 75 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL User Interface CCQ Thresholds The following screen shot shows the CCQ Thresholds panel of the System Settings form CCA Thresholds 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 60 90 100 C0 am Color Poor Signal a 30 gt Low Signal ig 50 Good Signal Inactive EL The CCQ threshold settings allow you to specify the colors to use for the following items in the STRATOS user interface e Wireless Link Status panel CCQ bars e Map View wireless
225. e to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria Click the Add button to create a new priority rule Enter the appropriate rule settings in the QoS Priority Rule form that is displayed Add button Select a priority rule and then click on the Edit button to modify the rule settings Edit button Alternatively you can double click on the rule you want to modify a To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button to actually delete it Remove button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 376 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc L encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELESS USER MANUAL Specifying a QoS Priority Rule The following screen shot shows the QoS Priority Rule form for a point to multipoint radio QoS Priority Rule Name Traffic controller Matching Criteria Protocol Port s 2773 Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Action Set priority to 7 Highest Set DSCP to The QoS Priority Rule form allows you to define a traffic priority rule The following tables describe the QoS rule settings Field Name Description Name Enter a short description that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Matching Criteria Field Name Description Protocol Specify the protocol that the rule will apply to You can select one of the following values A
226. e used for upgrade 3 By default STRATOS looks in the My Documents Encom Wireless Firmware folder for firmware upgrade files If you have installed the upgrade files in a different folder enter the folder name in the Folder that contains the firmware image files field or click the ca button at the right of that field and select the folder from the Browse For Folder form that is displayed 4 Select the firmware version you want to upgrade or downgrade to 5 Click the OK button 6 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 59 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS PE SMAN SE 7 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the upgrade process Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At p MeshRadio1 Upgrading firmware to version 3 30 Restarting radio 2 2 11 15 PM 8 If the upgrade is successful and STRATOS is able to communicate with the radio the task item will indicate that the radio has been successfully upgraded Radio Name Task Phase Progress FinalSta Started At Finished At MeshRadio1 Upgrading firmware to version 3 30 Done 100 Upgrade successful 2 11 15 PM 2 12 25 PM For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 60 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Reboot Select
227. e used to improve the performance and possibly the security of a radio network Refer to Appendix E VLAN Support for more information on implementing a VLAN based network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the VLAN settings tab Management VLAN Field Name Description Tagged Management By default the radio can be managed by connections over the native Data non tagged VLAN To be able to manage the radio using a specific VLAN check this option and enter the appropriate management VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field Enter the ID of the management VLAN a number in the range 1 4095 is required Client Tagging Field Name Tag Client Data Normally all of the radio s interfaces wireless and Ethernet act as VLAN trunks i e they carry the network traffic for all VLANs If a normal non VLAN aware device is plugged into the radio s Ethernet port its network traffic will not be tagged and it will not be able to communicate with For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 313 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL devices that are part of a VLAN Check this option to set up the radio s Ethernet port as an access port for a specific VLAN This gives devices connected to the Ethernet port access to the other devices in the specified VLAN VLAN ID Enter the ID of the client VLAN to a number in the range 1 4095 is required VLAN Priority
228. eck the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled and only when running in A Mode or G Mode Network Type A Onby v Network SSID ENCOMSEN Hide SSID nes Radio Mode Remote M Channel Mode 20 MHz w By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the remote radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master radio Network Type A Only vl Network SSID ENCOMS58N Hide SSID Radio Mode Remote x Channel Mode 20 MHz 5 v If you encounter connectivity issues between the remote radio and the master you may want to manually select the radio to which the remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type AOny Network SSID ENCOMSEN Hide SSID Using Repeater Enable Roami Radio Mode Remote C Enable Roaming 00 O5 F Channel Mode 20 MHz v Enter the MAC address of the master or repeater to which the remote will connect in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 339 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the parent from the list of radios that are connected to the current radio
229. ed VLAN 1 In the example two VLANs have been defined and assigned to the appropriate access ports e Management VLAN ID 10 e Secure VLAN ID 20 The management VLAN is used to isolate the workstations that are used to view and change the configuration settings of the switches routers and radios that are part of the network infrastructure The Secure VLAN is used to isolate the workstations that access sensitive resources both the workstations and the sensitive resources would be connected to the Secure VLAN The Native VLAN is used by non secured workstations to access the non sensitive network resources Access to the company network is provided by the trunk port that routes all of the tagged and untagged VLAN traffic onto the corporate LAN For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 449 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Example VLAN Setup The following diagram shows a simple VLAN implementation For security reasons it was decided that the network management vehicle traffic monitoring and vehicle traffic control functions need to be segregated Network Operations Center Workstations z 7J J J Traffic Monitoring VLAN d Traffic Control VLAN Mean Eat Switch 1 All VLAN Traffic Wired or wireless network All VLAN Traffic Switch 2 Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 450
230. ed by the current license STRATOS will automatically choose the radios that will participate in the advanced monitoring functions These radios are identified by a symbol at the right of the radio s name in the Radio List panel As well a License Exceeded indicator is displayed at the bottom of the panel to alert you to the situation Search Name IP Address MAC Address H w pa Default El 9 Nose Hill Broadband Network i Dalhousie Remote McKnight Remote E Nose Hill Master En vi University Mesh Network i Mesh 11 Mesh 12 Mesh 13 Mesh 14 Radio License Exceeded Preference will be given to on line radios If an off line radio was initially licensed and STRATOS detects that an unlicensed radio has come on line the off line radio s license is re assigned to the on line radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 91 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 72 encom If you have acquired and activated a license that supports all of the radios in your network the symbols are no longer displayed in the radio list panel and the License Exceeded indicator is no longer displayed i Radio List wa ic aoe IP Address MAC Address v 9 Default 1 ea Nose Hill Broadband Network Dalhousie Remote McKnight Remote Nose Hill Master bbe Tied Remote B iv ba University Mesh Network l Mesh 11 i fae Mesh 12 A Mesh 13
231. educe data latency and may be used if the performance of the link is more important than the reliability If you select a fixed rate a second drop down list box is displayed as shown in the following example Min 6 Mbps v Max 24Mbps M Select the minimum allowed bit rate from the left hand list and the maximum allowed rate from the right hand list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 334 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Regardless of the range you specify the 6 Mbps rate will always be included in the list of allowable rates This allows the radio to fall back to the lowest bit rate if it is not able to maintain the higher bit rates Output Power Select the wireless radio s output power Unless constrained by the Regulatory Domain that the radio is operating in you should use the Maximum power setting when the radio is deployed in the field If the radio is being provisioned or tested in a bench environment you should use the Lowpower setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 335 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Master Radio Setup N Cards ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Select the Master option for the radio that is located closest to the network operations center This radio is usually connected to the network via the Ethernet port The master radio controls the flow of data in the network and
232. eld e Apply the settings from one radio to another This can be used to provision new radios quickly and ensure that they are compatible with other radios in the network To configure a radio using a saved configuration file 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Import button The Select configuration profile file form is displayed Select configuration profile file to import Look in Profiles E Point to Point Radio 1 profile My Recent Documents My Documents CL My Computer 8 File name Point to Point Radio 1 profile D My Network Files of type Profile files 2 Select the configuration profile you want to import and press the Open button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 271 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 3 The Import Radio Settings form will be displayed Import Radio Settings Instructions The default import options have been selected Make any changes required and press the OK button to proceed Radio Module Assignments Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band Settings to Copy Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network Cancel 4 The Radio Module Assignments group allows you to specify how the radio module
233. encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Security Update Order As mentioned previously when you make the configuration changes required to secure a radio it will lose the wireless connections to any radio that has not yet been updated In order to update all of your radios remotely you will need to perform the updates in a specific order You need to change the configuration of the radios furthest from your TMC first and then work your way back to the operations center You will lose connection to the radios after they have been configured The connections should be restored once you have configured the radio closest to the operations center If you end up with orphaned radios radios that can no longer connect to the network and that haven t been configured with the new security settings you may have to configure them using a local Ethernet connection For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 529 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Incorrect Update Order For example consider the following network To Traffic Management Center i TMC Master Repeater Remote If you update the master radio first the wireless link to the repeater will be lost since the repeater s wireless settings are no longer compatible with the master s new settings STRATOS will no longer be able to communicate with either the repeater or the remote and you will not be ab
234. encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is more secure than 64 bit WEP but still suffers from deficiencies in the WEP algorithm It should only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit AES Uses the 128 bit AES block encryption algorithm couple with the CBC MAC block chaining technique for added security This is the most secure of the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 359 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL a three static security options Active Key Select the encryption key to use Although you can define up to four static encryption keys only one key can be active Encryption Key 1 4 Enter the hexadecimal character sequence to use for the encryption key Hexadecimal characters include the decimal digits 0 9 and the letters A F The number of characters you need to enter depends on the Encryption Level you have specified An indicator located below the Active Key list will indicate the number of characters you have to enter Encryption Level 128 bit AES o O B Active Key Key 1 nter 32 or more character HEX keys ey length must be even For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 360 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Dynamic Security Settings A and B G Modes The following screen shot shows the DYNAMIC security options fo
235. equest Support For 20 radios Please include the following information with your request e Company name e Contact name e Contact email address e Purchase Order number if you are using a purchase order 5 When your request has been processed an activation serial number will be sent to the email address that you specified in the request Refer to the Activating a New License topic for instructions on activating your license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 94 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Activating a New License To activate a new license 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus has not been licensed on this computer The advanced network management features of ENCOM STRATOS plus can only be used with a maximum of 5 radios These features include Display of wireless link lines on the map Display of radio status halos on the map Detection and notification of alarm conditions To increase the number of radios that can be used with the advanced features please click on the Request License button and follow the instructions shown Request License Activate License Finish Manual Activation 2 Click the Activate License button The Activate License page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Activate Licen
236. erations center Ethernet Backbone r r j vA a N STP Preferred Root Packet Direction For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 409 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus CA encom g USER MANUAL In the second case choosing a central radio as the STP root will reduce the number of connections between a radio and the STP root This will normally lead to a more stable network Note that in such a network the STP root radio should also be connected to the Ethernet backbone This setup will provide the most optimal path between the radios and the network operations center Ethemet Backbone STP Preferred gt Root lt His possible to define more than one preferred root radio for the network In that case the network will choose the most appropriate of the preferred root radios to use as the STP root If that radio fails the network will choose the most appropriate STP root from the remaining preferred root radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 410 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus In the following example two radios are configured as STP root radios Under normal operation the top radio shown in red would be elected by the network as the STP root radio Because this radio has failed the network elects the remaining STP preferred root radio as the actual STP root radio The traffic is automatically re rou
237. erefore be left disabled in such an environment For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 66 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Services Monitoring The following screen shot shows the Monitoring panel of the System Settings form Radio Monitoring Automatically check radios every 30 seconds v IP Address Conflict Monitoring Automatically check conflict even 5 minutes The following table describes the individual monitor settings Radio Monitoring Field Name Description Automatically check Check this option to periodically verify that the radios in the network are radios every on line and to determine the wireless links present between the radios When this option is enabled STRATOS will send ping requests to all of the radios in the network at the specified frequency Radios that respond will be shown as being on line in the Radio List panel green or yellow state icon Radios that do not respond will be shown as off line red state icon As well the lines on the map that show the wireless connections between the radios will be updated to reflect the current condition of the wireless links Note Because this feature is important to the operation of the STRATOS network monitoring functions it should not be disabled IP Address Conflict Monitoring Automatically check Check this option to periodically check for IP address conflic
238. erforming a Manual Activation To perform a manual license activation 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus has not been licensed on this computer The advanced network management features of ENCOM STRATOS plus can only be used with a maximum of 5 radios These features include Display of wireless link lines on the map Display of radio status halos on the map Detection and notification of alarm conditions To increase the number of radios that can be used with the advanced features please click on the Request License button and follow the instructions shown Request License Activate License Finish Manual Activation 2 Click the Finish Manual Activation button The Manual Activation page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Manual Activation 1 If you have received an activation file from ENCOM click the Import Activation File button and select the file you were sent when prompted Import Activation File 2 Click the Close button to return to ENCOM STRATOS plus For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 99 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL C 3 Click the Import Activation File button and select the license activation file that you received from ENCOM when prompted Import activation file Look i
239. erver for authentication This value must match the Shared Secret that is configured in the RADIUS server For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 311 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Domain Enter the Microsoft Windows domain of the user Only use if the RADIUS server requires domain validation Timeout Use RADIUS to login to the radio User RADIUS to login to the wireless network Enter the maximum amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response from the RADIUS server before resending an authentication request The default is 300 ms You may need to increase this if your RADIUS server is slow to respond to authentication requests Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate radio login requests When this option is enabled the radio will check with the RADIUS server if it does not find the specified user in its local user database Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate client devices that wish to attach to your network e g for access to the network operations center or to your corporate LAN If you select this option you will need to check the RADIUS MAC Authentication setting for each of the radio cards that clients will use to connect to the network Common Settings Field Name Default Access Rights RADIUS Accounting Select the access rights to assign to the user if the RADIUS server is not configured to respond to an authe
240. ess es New Priority New DSCP C Traffic controller TCP 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 The shaded cells contain the criteria that must be matched in order for a network data packet to be affected by the rule Matching data packets will be assigned the New Priority and optionally the New DSCP value defined in the rule The priority rule list is sorted by the New Priority column in descending order The following table describes the information that is displayed in the Priority Rules list Column Description Pi To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button at the right of the Priority Rule list to actually delete it For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 375 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Name A short description that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Protocol The protocol to match Port s The IP port or ports to match If blank traffic on any port is affected by the rule Source The address or addresses that the data packets Address es must originate from Destination The address or addresses that the data packets Address es are being forwarded to DSCP The DSCP value of the incoming packets to match If blank the DSCP priority is ignored by the rule New Priority The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria New DSCP The DSCP valu
241. et gt v IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 128 151 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 128 254 The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the basic settings tab Identification Field Name Description Radio Name Enter a name used to identify the radio up to a maximum of 64 characters The name you enter will be displayed in the radio list and in all other places where a reference to the radio is made Name IP Address MAC Address ae Ma Mesh Network M ha Point to Point Network Radio MAC Address Displays the MAC address assigned to the radio This is essentially the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet adapter For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 177 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELES Identification S USER MANUAL Field Name Enter an optional description for the radio This field allows you to keep track of ad hoc information associated with the radio without adding clutter to the radio name The radio description is displayed in the radio properties panel CommpakBB 24758 Dua
242. etwork SSID 9538 RCLP Radio Mode Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Channel Auto Frequency Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Enable eMax Protocol Hide SSID M Using Repeater Allow Clients C Enable Roaming C 802 11 Client Parent Radio MAC Address Wireless Link Rate Adaptive w Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm Page 522 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL HEHE 38kMe70 at For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 523 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom WIRELESS Remote Radio 9 ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remote Radio 9 would be configured as follows Radio Settings DS Setup Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 0D F4 17 4C 35 Radio Network Setup Network Type Broadband Network SSID 9538 RCLP Radio Mode Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band Channel Auto Frequency Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless Security WDS Settings WDS Mode WDS Setup Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Enable eMax Protocol
243. exadecimal characters include the decimal digits 0 9 and the letters A F The number of characters you need to enter depends on the Encryption Level you have specified An indicator located below the Active Key list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 245 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc e ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Static Security Options Field Name Description will indicate the number of characters you have to enter Encryption Level 128 bit AES v Active Key Key 1 v nter 32 or more character HEX keys ey length must be even For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 246 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Dynamic Security Settings The following screen shot shows the dynamic security options for a point to point radio Radio Settings Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type O Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal Pre Shared Key THIS SPACE FI WP42 Personal Pre Shared Key The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog C WPA Enterprise EAP Method EAP TLS v WP42 Enterprise TLS Mode Use Dynamic Certificates v Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers emporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIF AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Group Ciphers Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Mis
244. f the following techniques e Connect an Ethernet cable to the radio and use STRATOS to change its channel mode back to the original setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 170 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e Modify the configuration of the radios between STRATOS and the lost radio so that it is possible to communicate with the lost radio In this case you may have to change the channel mode of all the intermediate radios starting with the radio closest to the lost radio to the channel mode of the lost radio Since you may not know the channel mode currently assigned to the lost radio you may need to try different channel modes until you find the right one Once you are able to communicate with the lost radio restore the channel modes of all radios starting with the lost radio and ending with the radio closest to the computer on which STRATOS is running 6 While the spectrum scan is active the Scanning and Noise Floor fields below the Start Stop button will show the active channel mode and the approximate noise floor Scanning 20 MHz Noise Floor 98 dBm The noise floor shows the minimum signal strength required for the radio to discriminate between a valid signal and background noise In practice the signal strength of a wireless connection should be at least 20 dB above the signal floor in order for the connection to be stable 7 While the spectrum scan
245. ffic from being forwarded from one remote radio to another For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 476 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the the network filter configuration to use for the master radios Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Multicast Traffic To achieve better radio performance you may be able to reduce the amount of radio traffic by blocking out filtering unwanted multicast packets 1 Block incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 2 C Block outgoing multicast traffic on the Ethemet port 3 Block multicast traffic between wireless connections Wireless Connections oflje Ethernet Interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 477 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Repeater Radio Configuration The repeater radios collect the video data from their downstream radios remotes and forward it to the network operation center workstations via the master radios They may also collect video data from one or more cameras directly connected to their Ethernet ports In order to prevent unnecessary video traffic from being forwarded to other radios it is necessary to filter out the following traffic e Multicast traffic exiting the master radio s Ethernet port must be blocked Otherwise
246. fic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic ae Priositization cS ER dress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP WMM options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 424 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 2 Create the traffic controller priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Traffic controllers Enter a name that describes the data affected by the rule TCP v Port s Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Assign a high priority to the rule Set priority to FE Highest Set DSCP to oe 3 Press OK to create the new rule Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP Traffic controllers TCP 6000 7 New traffic controller rule Note that STRATOS will automatically assign the highest possible priority to the protocols that it uses to communicate with the radios You do no
247. figuration profile file This allows you to e Make a backup copy of the radio s configuration e Save the radio s configuration to a profile or template file for use in configuring other radios To export a radio s configuration 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Export button The Save configuration profile file form is displayed Save radio configuration to profile file Save in O Profiles Ee My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer a File name CommpakBB 24_58 Dual lt 3 z My Network Save as type Profile files 2 Specify the name of the file you want to save the radio s configuration settings to and then press the Save button to save the settings By default STRATOS saves configuration profile files in the My Documents Encom Wireless Profiles folder For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 226 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Importing the Radio Configuration The Import function allows you to update the radio s settings from a previously saved configuration profile file This function allows you to e Restore the radio s configuration from a backup file This can be useful when you have to replace a radio in the field e Apply the settings from one radio to another This can be used to provision new radios quickly and ensure that they are compatible with other radios in the network To
248. figured The following network diagram shows a simple broadband network and displays the three types of radios described above Wireless Network Traffic Management Center TMC Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS Master Radio Remote and Master Remote Radio connected directly radios connected Wireless connection to the TMC via Ethernet cable only acting as a repeater Ethernet or Fiber Backbone The symbols indicate the wireless links between the radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 527 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Awireless network will often be composed of several smaller stand alone networks each of which has one radio connected to the TMC as shown in the following diagram Traffic Management Center Wireless Network Remote and Master Remote acting as a repeater Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS Repeater Repeater Ethernet or Fiber Backbone Remote Each stand alone network can be treated separately You would normally update all of the radios in one of the stand alone networks first and then proceed to update the other stand alone networks in a similar fashion This will reduce the impact of the security updates to a smaller number of radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 528 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA
249. formation Comer of 32nd Ave and 16th Street The following tables describe the SNMP service settings SNMP Service Field Name Description Enable SNMP Service Check this option enable the radio s SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent When this option is enabled diagnostic information can be obtained from the radio using any SNMP based network monitoring application SNMP Service Settings Field Name Host IP Enter the IP address of the computer on which the network monitoring application is running as shown in the following example Host IP 192 168 1 50 Setting this option will prevent any other computer from being able to access the radio s SNMP information If you want to allow any computer that is on your network to access the radio s SNMP information enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 255 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Community Name The community name used to access the radio s SNVP agent This is set to public and cannot be changed Only read operations are permitted Contact Information Enter the contact information of the individual responsible for the network if applicable Location Information Enter the location of the radio if applicable For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 256 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MAN
250. from the ENCOM Wireless website To download ENCOM STRATOS 1 Go to the ENCOM STRATOS web page It can be found at e http Awww encomwireless com stratos 2 Click on the Download STRATOS link 3 Enter the appropriate information in the registration page and press the Send button to request your copy of ENCOM STRATOS 4 An email with a download link will be sent to the email address you specified in the registration page If you have trouble downloading or installing STRATOS please contact ENCOM technical support using any of the following options e Email support encomwireless com 800 617 3487 e Phone 403 230 1122 e Fax 403 276 9575 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 17 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Installing STRATOS Software Although ENCOM STRATOS will run under a standard user account you will need NOTE administrator privileges to install the application Please contact your IT department if you are unable to install STRATOS due to account restrictions After downloading STRATOS from the ENCOM website 1 Double click the EncomStratos Vx x x msi file to start the installation process where x x x is the STRATOS version number Ca EncomStratos 1 0 0 msi ee 6 15 2010 1 01 PM I LR Windows Installer Package 2 The ENCOM STRATOS Setup Wizard will appear and will guide you through the installation of the application to your com
251. gle radios used ss radios used as repeater as repeater o 9 Unmanaged Switch Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 433 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus By analyzing the network it was noted that the repeater radios are only used to transfer network traffic between the network operation center and the devices connected to the remote radios For performance reasons pairs of single radios connected via their Ethernet ports are used as repeaters WMM is problematic in this scenario since the WMM priorities are lost when the data packets pass through the Ethernet link To address this issue DSCP priorities can be used to simplify the configuration of the repeater radios The QoS configuration settings for each of the 7 radios are described in the following topics e Master and Remote Radio Configuration e Repeater Radio Configuration DSCP can only be used with IP based traffic If the protocol used to communicate with remote devices is not based on the IP based protocols use the priority queue mechanism to implement QoS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 434 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master and Remote Radio Configuration For this example assume that e The network operations center communica
252. gn column will be empty under the following conditions e The On Radio Alignment tool is in its default state and there are no links active on the first wireless interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 148 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e The link selected for monitoring using the Enable for 30 minutes button is no longer active e The radio does not support the On Radio Alignment tool In this case the Enable for 30 minutes button is not available in the toolbar Interface The wireless interface card on which the wireless connection is established The radio s first wireless card is displayed as Radio 1 the second card as Radio 2 and so on Radio Name The name of the radio at the other end of the wireless connection This is the name given to the radio when it was configured MAC Address The MAC address of the radio at the other end of the wireless connection For broadband radios a single MAC address is assigned to all of the wireless interface cards For mesh point to point and point to multipoint radios each wireless interface card has its own MAC address IP Address The IP address of the radio at the other end of the wireless connection Each radio is assigned a single IP address regardless of the number of wireless interface cards it has Tx Rx Rate Mbps The raw transmit and receive data rates of the wireless connection The data rates can b
253. grade sise ABOU A RE eed asst nesse me dert rame acted nasheed east agen ets Panels iii dei mnt Aaa aaa Eaa a es aiaa edit ude acy daN esha sii S Alerts Panelaren a a Msn ins A EE nes tra drui eines eee ne Soning the Alerts HIS Gi ianen arrana e ea Atea E er AAN ia ERA e EAN AAEE SPARE Ae SRE APAE detre Red tete Alerts Panel Gomtext M nU 2 22222 aeaa Aaaa i ar E VEEE EA Radio List Panel ltem Search Box Display Type Tabs nrram I EE a a aa ae aie aaa aAa aone Eaka an Eae Ana Radio Treo Vio Wirescon a Aaa AE E ara A een eine Selecting RADIOS ere name tin Aa naars thesectacetesia araara Eea eA aa R Aa rE Selecting Single Radios Selecting a Single POMS i552 ics ce 424 4 henri cegnanccahnanctsseedbnccutacth date latin a iaaeaie et Selecting a Range of RagioS si cnir inina aa an eia i ara T ie rtautiint Selecting Multiple RAGIOS sec c5casehceeesteeldencasckcdacecsancapschcevasadaveendsiecutacevesnecesahesdearuesdensusadesassadencnbeshauss Selecting a Range of Folders issues Selecting Multiple Folderin daara Me estiment esse Moving Radios and Folders For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 4 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Moving a Single Radio or Folder sise 125 Moving a group of Radios or Folders sis 125 Setting the location of a FAGIO i sscdcescceaiessdacsoass Lepuassessncoadabensstuchisuedeiaedansesadseessccda
254. hared Secret that is configured in the RADIUS server For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 219 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Domain Enter the Microsoft Windows domain of the user Only use if the RADIUS server requires domain validation Timeout Use RADIUS to login to the radio User RADIUS to login to the wireless network Enter the maximum amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response from the RADIUS server before resending an authentication request The default is 300 ms You may need to increase this if your RADIUS server is slow to respond to authentication requests Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate radio login requests When this option is enabled the radio will check with the RADIUS server if it does not find the specified user in its local user database Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate client devices that wish to attach to your network e g for access to the network operations center or to your corporate LAN If you select this option you will need to check the RADIUS MAC Authentication setting for each of the radio cards that clients will use to connect to the network Common Settings Field Name Default Access Rights RADIUS Accounting Select the access rights to assign to the user if the RADIUS server is not configured to respond to an authentication request with the user s group name The
255. hat were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running Alternatively 1 O a A Make sure that the Ping Test panel is visible Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Click and hold the left mouse button on one of the items you selected Drag the items to the Ping Test panel Release the mouse button The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders that were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 141 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Moving a Radio on the Map To move a radio to a new location on the map 1 Press and hold down the Shift key 2 Click and hold the left mouse button on the radio you want to move 3 Drag the radio to its new location 4 Release the mouse button 5 Release the Shift key 6 The new location will be saved to the radio Please wait gt Updating radio location Because the radio s location is stored in the radio s configuration settings it must be on line in order for its location to be set For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 142 2010 2015 Encom Wirele
256. have good throughput The following levels are used in the CCQ graph by default 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 60 90 100 Tx CCQ E favre mm 30 to 50 Cam fon You can change the default colors and thresholds in the CCQ Threshold panel in the System Settings form Alow CCQ reading usually indicates that something is interfering with the signal NOTE This could be physical problem such as terrain buildings or trees that are in the signal path or a congestion problem other radios operating on the same frequency and in close proximity to the ENCOM radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 155 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Sorting the Wireless Link Status List You can sort the wireless link status list by clicking the left mouse button on one of the following table headers e Interface e Radio Name e MAC Address e IP Address When you click on one of these headers an arrow is displayed that indicates the direction of the sort Status Align Interface Radio Name MAC Address IP Address Bai Radio 2 McKnight Remote 00 15 6D 85 24 59 192 168 128 52 ll Default Radio 1 Nose Hill Master 00 15 60 85 52 03 192 168 128 61 Radio 2 Tuxedo Remote 00 15 6D 85 12 EE 192 168 128 51 Click once to sort in ascending order and click again to sort in descending order Wireless Link Context Menu To display the Wireless Link Status Test context menu c
257. he View gt Panels item and verify that the Spectrum Scan option is checked For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 169 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Ifthe Spectrum Scan panel is hidden behind another panel click on the Spectrum Scan tab to bring it to the front of the other panels Click the Spectrum Scan tab 412 2417 4 2432 2437 Network Traffic Ping Test Spectrum Scan 2 In the Radio List select the radio you want to use for the spectrum scan 3 Select the wireless interface to use from the drop down list box in the upper left hand corner of the Spectrum Scan panel Scan Channel Modes 5MHz 4 When you select a wireless interface all of the channel modes supported by the wireless interface card are automatically checked Scan Channel Modes 5MHz 10MHz 20MHz 40MHz If you do not want STRATOS to scan all channel modes simply uncheck the channel modes you do not wish to scan 5 Press the Start button to start the scan The button text will automatically change to Start STRATOS will cycle through each of the selected channel modes at 10 second intervals The wireless interface card will be configured to use the appropriate channel mode for each scan ff you lose connection to the radio due to a channel mode change it may no longer be possible to communicate with it If this occurs you will need to recover the radio using one o
258. he Wireless Security Types group allows you to specify the security protocols used to protect the wireless communication links You can choose from the following options Wireless Security Types option Description o Disabled Select this option if you do not want to enable security This option is not recommended since it allows anyone that has knowledge of the network s SSID to connect to the network Dynamic This option enables wireless encryption that uses dynamically allocated keys This option provides the most secure communication link RADIUS MAC Check this option if you use a RADIUS server for authentication Authentication A Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS server acts as a centralized access and authorization point for network service The authentication service is then handled by the RADIUS server instead of the ENCOM radios Important The security settings must be the identical for all radios on the network Radios that have different security settings will not be able to communicate with each other For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 354 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Note Encom Wireless Data Solutions highly recommends that you confer with your I T department to determine the appropriate level of security for your network The Dynamic security option contains additional settings that need to be configured The following topic de
259. he configuration profile exactly This option is most often used when configuring a replacement radio or you want to restore the radio s configuration from a backup Copy common Use this option to exclude those settings that are unique to the settings radio This option is most often used when you are adding a new radio to a network and you want to configure it to match the other radios in the network The following items will not get copied over from the profile file to the radio e Radio name e Radio Description e Radio latitude longitude and street address e Radio static IP address e Parent radio MAC address e Static WDS assignments 6 Press the OK button to apply the profile settings to the radio 7 Make any changes to the imported settings in the radio configuration form 8 Press the Save button on the radio configuration form to save the settings to the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 390 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 391 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Chapter 5 Setting up a Broadband Network This example will show you how to set up a simple broadband network consisting of a master and a remote radio The two radios are linked by a single wireless connection Directional antennas are used to provided the best possible range a
260. he diagram would be configured as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Prioritization QoS WMM and DSCP Priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol dress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP When DSCP priorities are enabled the repeater radios will automatically prioritize received packets based on their DSCP values WMM will further enhance the quality of the video stream There is no reason to specify the custom traffic rules For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 444 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Using WMM to Support VLAN Priority Traffic The following diagram shows an ENCOM broadband network where VLANs are being used to segregate the management traffic controller and video camera network traffic The quantity of video traffic is great enough to cause issues with STRATOS and is causing timeout issues when trying to communicate with the traffic controllers Ethernet Backbone Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 445 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL It was decided tha
261. he following example the Mesh Radio 1 and Mesh Radio 3 radios were selected E gj Mesh Network Mesh Radio 1 E Mesh Radio 7 B Note All radios must reside in the same folder in order for this technique to work For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 122 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Selecting a Range of Folders To select a range of folders use the following procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the first folder in the range The first folder will be highlighted Name IP Address Mac Address i EE La S CommpakBB 49 Single 5 i Mesh Network Hon a Mesh Radio 1 fan E Mesh Radio 2 i if Mesh Radio 3 ty Point to Point Network CommpakBB 58 Single de i Point to Point Radio 1 2 Press and hold down the Shift key on the keyboard 3 Click the left mouse button on the last folder in the range All of the folders between the first folder and the last folder will be selected By implication all of the radios in the selected folders will also be selected Name IP Address Mac Address 2 i CEE Connos0 49 Single iL Joo Mesh ri 1 es E Mesh Radio 2 if Mesh Radio 3 C Point to Point Network fu CommpakBB 58 Single Ban Point to Point Radio 1 Note All folders in the range must reside in the same parent folder in order for this technique to work For ENCOM STRATOS plus Versio
262. he packets originating from the Ethernet port The higher the priority value the higher the priority assigned to the associated network traffic Note In order to prioritize the wireless network traffic using the VLAN priority the appropriate QoS options need to be configured See the Using WMM to Support VLAN Priority Traffic topic for more information Management Address Wireless Field Name IP Address Enter the IP address used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 10 10 1 100 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this IP address should be compatible with the management VLAN s network address range Network Mask Enter the network mask of the network used to access the radio via its wireless interfaces This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 If the Tagged Management Data option is checked this mask should be compatible with the management VLAN s network mask For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 222 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio router or switch that allows this radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local
263. he radio icon y 3 Run larg nn TNRadio Location Ne Remote ay ANAS The radio s configuration settings will be updated with the new location Please wait Updating radio location 1 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 126 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Because the radio s location is stored in the radio s configuration settings it must be NOTE sine f on line in order for its location to be set You can only set the location of one radio at a time Dragging two or more radios to the map will not work For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 127 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Adding Radios to a Ping Test To add radios to a ping test 1 Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Select Add to Ping Test from the radio list context menu The Ping Test panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders that were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running Alternatively 1 O a A Make sure that the Ping Test panel is visible Select one or more radios or one of
264. he specified criteria New DSCP The DSCP value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria Click the Add button to create a new priority rule Enter the appropriate rule settings in the QoS Priority Rule form that is displayed Add button Select a priority rule and then click on the Edit button to modify the rule settings Edit button Alternatively you can double click on the rule you want to modify 3 To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button to actually delete it Remove button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 307 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc L encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELESS USER MANUAL Specifying a QoS Priority Rule The following screen shot shows the QoS Priority Rule form for a mesh radio QoS Priority Rule Name Traffic controller Matching Criteria Protocol Port s 2773 Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Action Set priority to 7 Highest Set DSCP to The QoS Priority Rule form allows you to define a traffic priority rule The following tables describe the QoS rule settings Field Name Description Name Enter a short description that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Matching Criteria Field Name Description Protocol Specify the protocol that the rule will apply to You can select
265. hen eMax is enabled If you are using Point to Multipoint radios configured for N Mode operation you cannot disable eMax and therefore cannot use WMM In that case use the priority queue mechanism to implement QoS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 446 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 447 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix E VLAN Support Short for Virtual LAN a VLAN is a network of computers servers and other network devices that behave as if they are connected to the same wire even though they may be physically located on different LAN segments ALAN segment is a section of the local area network that is used by a particular workgroup or department and that is separated from the rest of the LAN by a router or switch Multiple VLANs can coexist on the same physical network but the devices that are part of a particular VLAN are invisible to the devices in other VLANs This behavior can help increase network security by reducing the number of devices that have access to each other A compromise in one VLAN would not affect the resources in the other VLANs VLANs can also improve the performance of the network VLANs can be used to restrict the dissemination of broadcast and device to device traffic between network segments Network traffic associated w
266. hest possible priority to the protocols that it uses to communicate with the radios You do not need to add any rules for this traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 431 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repeater Radio Configuration The repeater radios radios 2 and 3 in the diagram would be configured as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Prioritization QoS and WMM options Priority Rules Name en dress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP When WMM is enabled the repeater radios will automatically prioritize the packets received on their wireless interfaces There is no reason to specify the custom traffic rules For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 432 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Using DSCP to Simplify Radio Configuration The following diagram shows a slightly more complex ENCOM broadband network In this scenario the radio network carries video and traffic controller data as well as client device data in this case from laptops used by field personnel Ethernet Backbone F J N N gt As N 0 _ nm 2 Single 2 Sin
267. his is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example WINS Server Address 192 1 68 1 3 If there is no WINS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 210 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL SNMP Settings The following screen shot shows the SNMP tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP gos RADIUS VLAN SNMP Service SNMP is an application layer protocol The management station makes a request and the managed device SNMP agent replies to this request In SNMP version 1 there are three main actions Get Set and Trap Commpak Broadband radios only support the Get action Because of this the SNMP service can only be used for network monitoring purposes Enable SNMP Service SNMP Service Settings Host IP 192 168 1 50 Read only community name public Contact information Michael Smith Location information Comer of 32nd Ave and 16th Street The following tables describe the SNMP service settings SNMP Service Field Name Description Enable SNMP Service Check this option enable the radio s SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent When this option is enabled diagnostic information can be obtained from the radio using any SNMP based
268. hould only be used for networks that contain legacy WEP devices Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network Group Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames broadcast to all radios Two options are available Option Description Temporal Key Integrity Protocol An encryption protocol that is compatible with legacy WEP equipment but enhanced to correct some WEP flaws This option should only be used for networks that contain legacy WEP devices Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network Miscellaneous Field Name Description Group Key Update The interval at which the dynamically generated keys are updated Time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 202 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Tab The following screen shot shows the network settings tab for a broadband radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using Nothing don t synchronize v Primary NTP Server Secondar
269. ic This option enables wireless encryption that uses static keys This is an older technology that is not as secure as the Dynamic option It can however provide for a more stable network Dynamic This option enables wireless encryption that uses dynamically allocated keys This option provides the most secure communication link RADIUS MAC Check this option if you use a RADIUS server for authentication Authentication A Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS server acts as a centralized access and authorization point for network service The authentication service is then handled by the RADIUS server instead of the ENCOM radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 290 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Important The security settings must be the identical for all radios on the network Radios that have different security settings will not be able to communicate with each other Note Encom Wireless Data Solutions highly recommends that you confer with your I T department to determine the appropriate level of security for your network The Static and Dynamic security options contain additional settings that need to be configured The following topics describe these in more detail e Static Security Options e Dynamic Security Options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 291 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS p
270. ic information can be obtained from the radio using any SNMP based network monitoring application SNMP Service Settings Field Name Description Host IP Enter the IP address of the computer on which the network monitoring application is running as shown in the following example Host IP 1192 168 1 50 Setting this option will prevent any other computer from being able to access the radio s SNMP information If you want to allow any computer that is on your network to access the radio s SNMP information enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Community Name The community name used to access the radio s SNMP agent This is set For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 372 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus to public and cannot be changed Only read operations are permitted USER MANUAL Contact Information Enter the contact information of the individual responsible for the network if applicable Location Information Enter the location of the radio if applicable For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 373 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL QoS Settings The following screen shot shows the QoS Quality of Service settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only wo
271. ic link i e the link is defined but there is no wireless connection between the radios Static links can be defined for Broadband or Point to Multipoint radios Either define a static WDS link for master radios or specify a parent radio for remotes For Broadband radios refer to the following topics e Broadband Radio WDS Setup e Broadband Remote Radio Setup For Point to Multipoint radios refer to the following topics e Point to Multipoint Radio WDS Setup e Point to Multipoint Remote Radio Setup Default button Click the Default button to restore the color and threshold settings to their factory default values For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 77 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Networking Mail Server STRATOS supports an alerting mechanism that is able to send emails to specific recipients when a network event occurs a radio going off line the strength of a wireless signal being too low etc In order to send out the emails STRATOS requires access to an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol mail server Configuring the mail server settings requires knowledge of your network environment and of the mail server in particular You will need to consult your I T department for the required settings The following screen shot shows the Mail Server panel of the System Settings form Mail Server Settings Enable
272. ich the log file was created mm is the month in which the log file was created dd is the day in which the log file was created hh is the hour at which the log file was created mm is the minute at which the log file was created ss is the second at which the log file was created A new log file is created whenever STRATOS is run Radio filtering Field Name Description MAC Address es Enter the MAC address of the radio that you want to log If you need to log the communication of more than one radio enter the MAC address of each radio separated with commas If left blank the communications for ALL radios is logged Interface options Field Name SSH command Check to log SSH based communications interface API command Check to log API based communications interface MAC Telnet interface Check to log MAC Telnet based communications FTP transfers Check to log the start and end of FTP file transfers Note that the content of the files is not included in the log For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 88 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Status Performance The performance panel displays the current state of the various queues that are present in STRATOS The information displayed can be of use to ENCOM technical support personnel when diagnosing STRATOS performance issues The following screen shot shows the Performance panel of the System Settings form
273. ide the terminal panel For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 51 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Add Select Add from the Radio menu to manually add a radio to the radio list This function is useful if a radio cannot be discovered by ENCOM STRATOS This situation can occur if a router or firewall is blocking the radio heartbeat packets Note In order for this function to work STRATOS must be able to communicate with the radio via IP protocols You must know the radio s IP address and any routers or firewalls between the radio and STRATOS must be configured to let the appropriate services through see the Network Setup topic for more details To manually add a radio to STRATOS application 1 In the Radio List panel select the folder in which the new radio will be added If you do not select a folder the new radio will be added to the Default folder 2 Select Add from the Radio menu The Add Radio form is displayed Add Radio Specify the radio s IP address IP Address 3 Enter the radio s IP address in the IP Address field as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 1 60 4 Click on the Find button 5 Await form is displayed while STRATOS probes for a radio at the IP address you specified Please wait Trying to find radio Cancel 6 If STRATOS is successful the radio will be added to the radio list
274. ield Longitude Enter the longitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the eastern hemisphere and negative in the western hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 235 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus ZLE USER MANUAL Icon Color Select the color of the radio icon You can use the icon color to visually group radios by radio type geographical location VLAN association etc Icon Style Select the style of the radio icon Four icon styles are currently available Radio Type Master radio Repeater radio Dual radio Embedded map The embedded map allows you to see the current location of the radio A green marker shows the location assigned to the radio Google Map y 0 J McCall Lake Sports Park irways j Parkj 1 2010 Bolt Jap data 2010 Tele Atlas To set a new location For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 236 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e Press and hold down the Shift key on your computer s keyboard e Click the left mouse button at the location you want to assign to the radio e The green marker will move to the selected position Note Refer to the Map Panel topic for more informa
275. if Mesh 14 Refer to the following topics for more information on STRATOS licensing e Requesting a New License e Activating a New License e Performing a Manual Activation e Requesting a License Upgrade e Upgrading an Existing License e Performing a Manual Upgrade For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 92 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus j NIRELESS Requesting a New License To request a license for a new installation of STRATOS 1 Select Licensing from the Help menu to display the ENCOM STRATOS licensing form ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus has not been licensed on this computer The advanced network management features of ENCOM STRATOS plus can only be used with a maximum of 5 radios These features include Display of wireless link lines on the map Display of radio status halos on the map Detection and notification of alarm conditions To increase the number of radios that can be used with the advanced features please click on the Request License button and follow the instructions shown Request License Activate License Finish Manual Activation 2 Click the Request License button The Request License page is displayed ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing Request License 1 Determine the license that best matches the number of radios in your network You can start with a small number of radios and later
276. ilable 9 45 58 4M 9 46 28 AM Tasks that are displayed in the Tasks panel include e Configure Radio e Find Radio e Assign Static IP Address e Restore to Factory Defaults e Upgrade Firmware The following table describes the information that is displayed for each task shown in the list Status The icon at the left of the task name indicates the state of the task One of the following icons is displayed gt nessa nner So sees Radio Name The name of the radio on which the task is being performed If the task is not associated with a particular radio lt Not Applicable gt is displayed Task Short description of the task being performed Phase The current phase of the task being performed Most long running tasks consist of two phases e The operation requested e g upgrading the firmware e Waiting for the radio to restart The progress of the current phase Since most tasks take an For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 166 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL a indeterminate amount of time to complete this is a rough estimate Final Status Indicates the state of the task when it has finished If the task was not successful the error that caused the task to fail is displayed Started At The time at which the task was started Finished At The time at which the task completed Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the fea
277. information Comer of 32 Ave and 16th Street The following tables describe the SNMP service settings SNMP Service Field Name Description Enable SNMP Service Check this option enable the radio s SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent When this option is enabled diagnostic information can be obtained from the radio using any SNMP based network monitoring application SNMP Service Settings Field Name Description Host IP Enter the IP address of the computer on which the network monitoring application is running as shown in the following example Host IP Setting this option will prevent any other computer from being able to access the radio s SNMP information If you want to allow any computer that is on your network to access the radio s SNMP information enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 302 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Community Name The community name used to access the radio s SNVP agent This is set to public and cannot be changed Only read operations are permitted Contact Information Enter the contact information of the individual responsible for the network if applicable Location Information Enter the location of the radio if applicable For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 303 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL
278. ings e To change the color click the associate M button in the Color column and select the desired color from the color picker that is displayed e To change the threshold enter a new value in the RSSI dBm column or click on the buttons to change the value Setting Name Poor Signal Set the color to display when the signal strength is less than the specified RSSI value An RSSI value below the Poor Signal threshold indicates that the signal strength is too low The connection will probably not be stable and will have low throughput For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 74 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL Low Signal Set the color to display when the signal strength is less than the specified RSSI value but higher than the Poor Signal value An RSSI value between the Poor Signal and Low Signal thresholds indicates that the signal strength is low The connection will be marginal and may not have good throughput Good Signal Set the color to display when the signal strength is less than the specified RSSI value but higher than the Low Signal value An RSSI value between the Low Signal and Good Signal thresholds indicates that the signal strength is optimal The wireless connection should be stable and will have good throughput Over Range Set the color to display when the signal strength is greater than the Good Signal value An RSSI value above the Good Signal threshold indicates that th
279. ings WDS Setup Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static O Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication The Wireless Security Type group allows you to specify the security protocols used to protect the wireless communication links You can choose from the following options Wireless Security Types Option Description O O Disabled Select this option if you do not want to enable security This option is not recommended since it allows anyone that has knowledge of the Network s SSID to connect to the network Static This option enables wireless encryption that uses static keys This is an older technology that is not as secure as the Dynamic option It can however provide for a more stable network Dynamic This option enables wireless encryption that uses dynamically allocated keys This option provides the most secure communication link RADIUS MAC Check this option if you use a RADIUS server for authentication Authentication A Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS server acts as a centralized access and authorization point for network service The authentication service is then handled by the RADIUS server instead of the ENCOM radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 196 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Important The security settings must be the identical for all radios on the network Radios that have different security
280. io select the Radio 2 tab and the Wireless Security sub tab and then repeat steps 5 6 8 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 497 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Mesh radios Radio Settings Mesh Radios ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL This topic describes the radio settings used to secure ENCOM mesh radios To configure mesh radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Radio 1 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab 5 Update the settings using the following guidelines Network Type Network SSID Hide SSID Channel Mode For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 If you don t need to support wireless client devices e g laptops smart phones wireless cameras set this option to Mesh Only This prevents client devices from being able to connect to the radio making your network harder to compromise Use an innocuous word or phrase or a random combination of letters numbers and punctuation except for the and characters This prevents someone that discovers the network from easily determining the type of radios in the network who the network belongs to or what the network is being used for Check this option to prevent the network
281. io Settings tab will be disabled Identification Field Name Radio Model Displays the model number of the wireless radio card This information is useful when troubleshooting issues with the radio Wireless MAC Displays the MAC address assigned to the wireless radio card For mesh Address radios the MAC address of the wireless radio cards are different than the MAC address of the radio s Ethernet interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 283 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Field Name Network Type Select the role of the mesh radio One of the following options can be specified Role Desenption Mesh Only The wireless radio can only connect to other mesh radios no clients allowed This option provides the most secure and highest performance link Mesh and Clients The wireless radio can connect to other mesh radios and can accept connections from client devices This option can be used to allow field technicians access to the mesh or to allow wireless devices and sensors to be accessed from the mesh network Clients Only The wireless radio can only accept connections from client devices It cannot connect to other mesh radios This option can be used for stand alone applications such as wireless hot spots Network SSID Enter a name used to identify the network in which the wireless radio will take part The Network SSID is ca
282. ion 2 1 71 Page 468 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Radio 5 VLAN Configuration ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The VLAN configuration for Radio 5 would be as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Tagged Management Data VLAN ID 10 Management Address T agged IP Address 10 10 1 54 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning C Prune VLANs Client Tagging C Tag Client Data Access Port Address Untagged IP Address 192 168 1 54 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The Management VLAN is enabled and set to VLAN ID 10 The IP address of the radio s wireless interface is set to a value that is compatible with the other radios in the network According to the network diagram both traffic cameras and controllers are connected to this radio Each type of device is assigned to a different VLAN Since ENCOM radios only support a single Ethernet port they are not able to tag traffic for both VLANs Because of this a small managed switch VLAN enabled switch 2 is used to tag the traffic associated with the devices The radio s Ethernet port is connected to the trunk port on the switch It is assigned an IP address that can be used for local on site access As configured the radio will carry network traffic from all VLANs For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 46
283. ion again Acommon scenario is to run ENCOM STRATOS on a dual display workstation The Map View panel can be detached from the main window and expanded to fit the second display The remaining panels are left in the main window but are arranged to make maximum use of the display The following screen shots show an example of this arrangement Encom Stratos V1 4 0 0 Fie View Radio Folder Took Hep item Properties Thorcliffe Repeater MAC Address IP Address Tae RI N ication xt 00 15 60 8552 03 192168 128 E1 120072 LI te 0015 60 8524 59 19216812852 15013 J OGMDOSTAEE 19216012051 1350 8 Cone akB SAN gt T Bamas en gt ShomfisSiir 40 00 90 51 08727 19216312862 LT E 100 Mens No Link GHz ISM Band 00 15 6D 8450 D0 1 azta ENCOMEENA STRATOS main window on first monitor STRATOS Map View on second monitor For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 31 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Resizing a Panel To resize a panel 1 Position the mouse pointer in the space between two panels Depending on the location of the two panels the mouse pointer will turn into a vertical or horizontal resize cursor Cougar University Ridge Hagh Christ Q _ Vertical resize cso Network to Point Radio 1 6 tto Point Radio 2 2010 Google Wap Interface
284. is selected in the top section For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 143 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link Status Panel The Wireless Link Status panel displays the state of the wireless connections between the currently selected radio and the other radio or radios that are connected to it The information displayed in the Wireless Link Status panel is especially helpful when aligning the radio antennas see the Deploying the Radios section for more information an aligning antennas Local Alignment y On Radio Alignment Enable for 30 minutes Status Align Interface Radio Name MAC Address IP Address Tx Rx Rate Mbps Tx Rix Strength dBm Tx Rx CCO Uptime Default Radio1 Nose HilMaster 001560 855203 192168 128 61 Radio2 McKnight Remote O0 156D 85 24 59 19216812852 130 130 92 7 83 10 12 00 01 54 Ex Radio2 Tuxedo Remote O0 15 6D 85 12EE 19216812851 90 0 781 0 58 50 52 57 00 59 05 lt f gt Show RSSI for 110 TX AllChains py RSSI dBm Chain 0 Chain 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 The wireless link status panel contains the following user interface elements e Wireless Link Status Toolbar e Wireless Link Status Table e Wireless Link Status Bars Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the features of the Wireless Link Status panel e Wireless Link RSSI Colors e Wireless Link CCQ
285. is dropped for any reason Chain 0 dBm The current transmit and receive signal strength for the 1st antenna of a Wireless N radio card If the radio card associated with the connection is not a Wireless N card the 1st antenna chain is not enabled or the 1st antenna chain is not present is displayed Chain 1 dBm The current transmit and receive signal strength for the 2nd antenna of a Wireless N radio card If the radio card associated with the connection is not a Wireless N card the 2nd antenna chain is not enabled or the 2nd antenna chain is not present is displayed Chain 2 dBm The current transmit and receive signal strength for the 3rd antenna of a Wireless N radio card If the radio card associated with the connection is not a Wireless N card the 3rd antenna chain is not enabled or the 3rd antenna chain is not present is displayed Distance The length of the wireless link shown in miles and kilometers The distance is based on the location of the radios on the map If the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 150 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL radios are not correctly placed on the map this value will not be correct If either of the radios at each end of the link is not located on the map lt Unknown gt is displayed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 151 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 en
286. is enabled the radios in the network will decide amongst themselves which radio will be the STP root radio This is the radio toward which all other radios will send their network traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 406 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL In the following example a network of radios is organized in a simple loop The radio that is physically connected to the network operation center s Ethernet backbone is configured as the wireless network s STP preferred root Although the radios are physically connected in a loop STP or RSTP will prevent packets from being infinitely forwarded around the loop What effectively happens is that one of the radio connections is automatically blocked to prevent a loop from being formed In the example the blocked link is shown in red Ethernet Backbone STP Preferred Root B a N J okes Connection For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 407 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL If one of the radios fails or one of the wireless links becomes compromised STP or RSTP will automatically reconfigure the network so that the remaining radios are still able to communicate with each other In the following example a radio has failed Shown in red The connection that had previously been blocked is now re enabled to ensure that the remaining good radios are
287. is sent to the RADIUS server for authentication This value must match the Shared Secret that is configured in the RADIUS server For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 380 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Domain Enter the Microsoft Windows domain of the user Only use if the RADIUS server requires domain validation Timeout Use RADIUS to login to the radio User RADIUS to login to the wireless network Enter the maximum amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response from the RADIUS server before resending an authentication request The default is 300 ms You may need to increase this if your RADIUS server is slow to respond to authentication requests Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate radio login requests When this option is enabled the radio will check with the RADIUS server if it does not find the specified user in its local user database Check this option to use RADIUS to authenticate client devices that wish to attach to your network e g for access to the network operations center or to your corporate LAN If you select this option you will need to check the RADIUS MAC Authentication setting for each of the radio cards that clients will use to connect to the network Common Settings Field Name Default Access Rights RADIUS Accounting Select the access rights to assign to the user if the RADIUS server is not configure
288. isplayed License Successfully Upgraded e 1 Your license was successfully upgraded 5 Click the OK button to return to the License Details page ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 50 radios Serial number NACXG DM5 L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 105 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 6 Click the Close button to return to STRATOS The Radio List panel will be updated to reflect the new license 7 If the upgrade was not successful the following message will be displayed Perform manual upgrade Could not communicate with the license server If your computer is not connected to the Internet you should perform a manual upgrade IF your computer is connected to the Internet please try again later and contact your Encom representative if the problem persists Do you wish to perform a manual upgrade 8 If the upgrade failed because your computer is not connected to the Internet but you are able to temporarily connect it to the Internet click on the No button
289. it contains first Also you cannot delete the Default folder that is created by ENCOM STRATOS 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 63 A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Tools Menu Commands System Settings Select System Settings from the Tools menu to display the System Settings form This form allows you to configure a number of system options System Settings El Services a Discovery Monitoring E User Interface General RSSI Thresholds CCQ Thresholds E Networking Mail Server Proxy Server Notifications Alerts Recipients Miscellaneous Database FS Chahin Radio Discovery a Automatically try to discover radios every 10 seconds Warning This function is normally used to discover radios in a bench or lab environment It should not be used in a production environment The system settings are logically grouped using a tree style interface Click on an item in the tree to display the associated settings The following topics describe the available settings e Services e Discovery e Monitoring User Interface e General e RSSI Thresholds e CCQ Thresholds Networking e Mail Server e Proxy Server Notifications e Alerts e Recipients Miscellaneous e Database e Status e Logging For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 64 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATO
290. ith a particular VLAN will not be forwarded by the switch or router to other network segments that are associated with other VLANs VLAN Components The following table describes the most common items associated with VLANs Access Port The Ethernet port on a switch router or ENCOM radio that provides a connection for network devices workstations cameras traffic controllers etc Trunk Port The Ethernet port on a switch router or ENCOM radio that carries traffic from more than one VLAN Tagging The process of adding the VLAN ID to a network data packet s Ethernet header VLAN ID A number used to identify a specific VLAN Native VLAN The VLAN for which the tagging process is not performed The native VLAN typically has a VLAN ID of 1 Default VLAN The VLAN assigned to an Ethernet port by default The default VLAN is typically the native VLAN Management VLAN The VLAN used to manage the switch router or radio This VLAN is assigned an IP address so that the device can be accessed using the appropriate management tools For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 448 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus The following diagram shows the relationships between these items Management VLAN Access Ports VLAN IDs assigned to ports Switch or Router Ethernet Ports Trunk Port Management VLAN 10 Secure VLAN 20 To Network Backbone Native untagg
291. itization Enable C Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP Traffic controllers TCP 6000 7 New traffic controller rule Since STRATOS will automatically assign the highest possible priority to the protocols that it uses to communicate with the radios you do not need to add any rules for that traffic To ensure that the network performs reliably all of the radios in the network should be provisioned with the same QoS settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 421 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Using WMM to Simplify Radio Configuration The following diagram shows a simple ENCOM broadband network In this scenario a large amount of video is being produced by the traffic cameras The quantity of video traffic is great enough to cause issues with STRATOS and is causing timeout issues when trying to communicate with the traffic controllers Ethernet Backbone Unmanaged Switch Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 422 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL It was decided that the video traffic was less important than timely access to the radios and to the
292. itor form is used to help diagnose problems the radio is having accessing the RADIUS servers The Primary RADIUS Server and Backup RADIUS Server panels will only be enabled if the associated RADIUS server is enabled in the radio s configuration form Refer to the following topics for more information on setting up the radio to use RADIUS for authentication e Broadband Radio RADIUS Settings e Point to Point Radio RADIUS Settings e Mesh Radio RADIUS Settings e Point to Multipoint Radio RADIUS Settings Refer to ENCOM STRATOS RADIUS Configuration Guide available separately for more information on setting up and using a RADIUS server with your radio network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 50 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Terminal Connect Select Terminal Connect from the Radio menu to log into the selected radio using a terminal window When the Terminal Connect menu item is selected the Terminal panel is displayed Connected to Mesh Radio 1 Color scheme v EEEEEEEEEEEE NNNN NNN EEEEEEEEEEEE EEE EEEEEEE EEEEEE EEE EEEEEEEEEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEE Encomos Routero Cadmin mesh Radio 1 This panel allows you to interact with the radio using a text based terminal interface Refer to the Terminal Panel topic for more information on using the terminal window Terminal Disconnect Select Terminal Disconnect from the Radio menu to close and h
293. ity Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C1 Traffic controller TCP 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 ae 5 E The Quality of Service settings allow you to prioritize the various types of network traffic so that important traffic is processed ahead of less important traffic Under normal conditions all network data packets have an equal opportunity to be forwarded by the radio This works well for some applications such as file transfers or web browsing but it is not adequate for traffic that is sensitive to network latency and throughput reductions such as voice or video streaming QoS allows you to address this issue by giving the time sensitive traffic a larger share of the network bandwidth Refer to Appendix D Quality of Service for more detailed information on the prioritization mechanisms supported by the ENCOM radios The following tables describe the Quality of Service settings Network Traffic Prioritization Field Name Description Enable Check this option to enable priority queue based QoS features Priority rules are used to specify the priority of specific types of traffic Lower priority traffic is dropped in preference to higher priority traffic when the radio becomes heavily loaded Use WMM Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the incoming WMM priority or to the incoming VLAN priority if VLANs are being use
294. ity of incoming packets to the incoming WMM priority or to the incoming VLAN priority if VLANs are being used WMM is used to prioritize certain type of traffic such as VOIP Voice Over IP and video streams that are sensitive to network latency and capacity For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 305 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL issues Note The WMMVLAN priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Use DSCP Priorities Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the DSCP priority of the incoming data packets Note The DSCP priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Priority Rules Field Name Description Priority Rule List By default ENCOM STRATOS will assign the highest priority to the radio management traffic Other types of network traffic can be assigned to specific priority queues by creating custom priority rules The Priority Rules list displays the custom priority rules that you have defined When defining a priority rule you specify the type of traffic that the rule is to act upon and the priority to assign to the matching traffic In the following example two priority rules have been defined Name Protocol Port s
295. k 3 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 280 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL To set a new location e Press and hold down the Shift key on your computer s keyboard e Click the left mouse button at the location you want to assign to the radio e The green marker will move to the selected position Note Refer to the Map Panel topic for more information on the embedded map features Street Address Enter the street address of the radio if applicable This information is optional For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 281 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Tab ENCOM mesh radios contain at least one and as many as four wireless radio modules Each wireless radio module is configured in its own tab The first radio module is configured in the Radio 1 tab the second radio is configured in the Radio 2 tab and so on The following screen shot shows the radio settings tab for a mesh radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D8 Radio Network Setup Network Type Mesh Only v Network SSID Encombesh Hide SSID Radio Mode Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Ba
296. k Type The Link Type drop down list box allows you to specify the nature of the wireless links shown between the radios One of the following options can be chosen Link Type Description None No lines are displayed on the map RSSI The lines represent the RSSI signal strength of the wireless links between the radios The color of the line represents the worst of the receive or transmit signal strengths For example if the the receive signal strength is good but the transmit signal strength is poor the line color will represent the poor signal strength The color of the lines are set in the RSSI Thesholds panel of the System Settings form The lines represent the CCQ signal quality of the wireless links between the radios The color of the line represents the worst of the receive or transmit signal quality For example if the the receive signal quality is good but the transmit signal quality is poor the line color will represent the poor signal quality For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 135 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The color of the lines are set in the CCQ Thesholds panel of the System Settings form Note The wireless link lines are only displayed for radios that are licensed See the Licensing topic for more information on obtaining a license for your radio network Click on the Zoom All button to show all of the radios in the map displ
297. k on the at the right of the panel s title bar e Select Radio gt Terminal Disconnect from the STRATOS menu e Enter the quit command in the terminal window Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the features of the Ping Test panel e Terminal Toolbar For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 173 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Terminal Toolbar The terminal toolbar allows you to change the look of the terminal window and to interact with the Windows clipboard Connected to Mesh Radio 1 Color scheme The following table describes the options and controls found in the map toolbar Field Name Connected to The left hand label displays the name of the radio to which the terminal is connected a Click on the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the selected text from the terminal display to the Windows clipboard Copy to Clipboard button To select text in the terminal display 1 Press and hold down the left mouse button at the start of the block of text you want to copy 2 Drag the mouse to the end of the block of text you want to copy 3 Release the left mouse button 4 Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the highlighted text Click the Paste from Clipboard button to paste text from the Windows clipboard to the terminal Paste from Clipboard button Color Scheme The right hand drop down list box allows you
298. ked the Recipient Information panel is enabled New Recipient Information Email address Enable First name Last name Enter the appropriate information and click the Submit button to add the new recipient to the list If you do not wish to add a new recipient click the Cancel button Delete button Click the Delete button to remove the selected recipient from the list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 84 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Change button USER MANUAL Click the Change button to change the information associated with the selected recipient When clicked the Recipient Information panel is enabled and the recipient s information displayed Change Recipient Information Email address johnt mycompany com Enable First name John Last name Tate Make the appropriate changes and click the Submit button to save the changes If you do not wish to make changes click the Cancel button Recipient Information Field Name Email address Enable First name Last name Test button Submit button Cancel button Description Enter the email address of the recipient Check this setting to enable the recipient Notification message are only sent to enabled recipients Enter the first name of the recipient Enter the last name of the recipient Click the Test button to send a tes
299. l Identification Name Description Model Firmware Version 3 30 Regulatory Domain Field Name Country Name IP Address Settings Field Name Obtain an IP address automatically Specify a static IP address Select the country in which the radio is operating Certain countries have limitations on the radio power output allowed frequency ranges and frequency bands Failure to select the appropriate country can result in a radio that is operating outside of the legally allowed ranges If the radio is operating in the United States or Canada you can leave this setting to lt Not Set gt Description Select this option if a DHCP server is available on your radio network and you want the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the radio Select this option to manually assign the radio s IP address ENCOM recommends this option because it provides for a more secure network especially if you have not enabled wireless security Note It is important that each radio in the network is assigned a different IP address Network performance can suffer greatly if two or more radios are assigned the same IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 178 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL IP Address Settings Feld Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the radio This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as show
300. l _ 802 11n Radio 2 McKnight Remote 00 15 6D 85 2A 59 19216812852 130 300 Network SSID ENCOMSEN A Radio 2 Tuxedo Remote 00 15 6D 85 12EE 19216812851 135 0 60 0 Radio Mode Remote Channel Mode 40 MHz Channel Auto Frequency eMax Enabled lt wireless Security Disabled Show RSSI for 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band z x i MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 32 72 AllChains py Rssuidem Wireless Protocol 802 11n Chain 0 Network SSID ENCOMS8N B Chain 2 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Name IPAddress MAC Address ba University Mesh Network Mesh 11 Bandwidth Test Network Traffic Ping Test Spectrum Scan For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 45 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Menu Commands Configure Select Configure from the Radio menu to display the radio s configuration form If the radio is currently on line STRATOS will e Log into the radio e Get the radio s current configuration e Display the radio s current configuration in the radio configuration form If the radio is not currently on line STRATOS will e Inform you that the radio is off line e Prompt you to view the radio s last know configuration e Display the radio s last known configuration in the radio configuration form you will not be able to make changes to the settings The broadband mesh point
301. lar to the following example Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic Authentication Types C WPA Personal Pre Shared Key WPA2 Personal Pre Shared Key C WPA Enterprise C WPA2 Enterprise Encryption Algorithms C RADIUS MAC Authentication THIS SPACE FOR REN JB6 F 3D amp ijG TiFh Unicast Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Group Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 v AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM 9 If you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the Wireless Security sub tab and then repeat steps 5 8 10 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 495 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings A and B G Cards This topic describes the wireless security settings used to secure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios using legacy B G 2 4 GHz or A 4 9 and 5 8 GHz radio cards To configure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Radio
302. ld use the Lowpower setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 344 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master Radio Setup A and B G Cards Select the Master option for the radio that is located closest to the network operations center This radio is usually connected to the network via the Ethernet port The master radio controls the flow of data in the network and serves as the network s synchronization source Each point to multipoint network has only one master radio All the other radios must be configured as either remote or repeater radios If the network contains a repeater radio check the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 Hide SSID Radio Mode Master v C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz si For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 345 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repeater Radio Setup A and B G Cards Select the Repeater option for a radio that provides a link between the master and remote radios When this option is selected the Using Repeater option is automatically checked and the Enable eMax Protocol option is unchecked the eMax protocol cannot be used when there is a repeater in the network Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS58 Hide SSID Radio Mode Hept
303. le Enable C Use WMM Use WMM C Use WMM Use WMM Requirem ent C Use DSCP priorities C Use DSCP priorities M Use DSCP priorities Use DSCP priorities Can be used with eMax be used with eax Must support Wireless N mode Packet priorities must be propagated through cS e Ethernet links VLAN priorities are used e e to prioritize traffic Video and or VOIP integrity must be LA maintained For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 418 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Using Priority Queues to Ensure Access to Radios The following diagram shows a typical ENCOM broadband network In this scenario a large amount of video is being produced by the traffic cameras The quantity of video traffic is great enough to cause issues with STRATOS and is causing timeout issues when trying to communicate with the traffic controllers Ethernet Backbone Master WAL w y J N N 7 NX E a Traffic Traffic Camera Camera eo J Repeater Repeater LH a n 4 Y Remote i Unmanaged Switch Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 419 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus It was decided that the video traffic was less important than timely access to the radios and to the traffic controllers A priority queue based
304. le Radio or Folder e Moving a group of Radios or Folders Moving a Single Radio or Folder To move a single radio or a single folder 1 Click and hold the left mouse button on the item you want to move 2 Drag the item to the folder to which to want to move the item 3 Release the mouse button 4 The item will be moved to the folder on which you released the mouse button Moving a group of Radios or Folders To move a group of radios or folders 1 Select a group of radios or a group of folders as described in the Selecting Radios topic 2 Click and hold the left mouse button on one of the items you selected 3 Drag the items to the folder to which to want to move them 4 Release the mouse button 5 The items will be moved to the folder on which you released the mouse button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 125 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Setting the location of a radio To set the location of a radio on the map 1 2 3 Make sure that the Map View panel is visible Click and hold the left mouse button on the radio you want to locate Drag the radio to the desired location on the map When dragging over the map the drag cursor will show the icon currently associated with the device 1 D 2 Ne Remote we irings Release the mouse button to locate the radio on the map The radio s latitude and longitude are set to the pointed end of t
305. le to update either of those radios No connection To Traffic Management Center TMC al q Master Repeater Remote To recover from this situation you will have to restore the master radio to its original settings This will re establish the wireless link with the repeater and allow STRATOS to communicate with the repeater and remote radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 530 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Correct Update Order Again consider the following working network nn n To Traffic Management Center TMC i el 4 Master Repeater Remote If you update the remote radio first the wireless link to the repeater will be lost since the repeater s wireless settings are no longer compatible with the remote s new settings However STRATOS is still able to communicate with the master and repeater No N N connection N To Traffic Management Center nn nn TMC al A Master Repeater Remote You would then update the repeater The wireless link with the master will be lost since the master s wireless settings are no longer compatible with the repeater s new settings STRATOS will still be able to communicate with the master No connection N N n To Traffic f Management Center a TMC z p ia Master Repeater Remote For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 531
306. less security settings they will be able to connect with each other which is the point of a mesh network The following example shows the MAC Access settings for a typical mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security MAC Access Settings Limit connections to links with RSSI greater than 80 3 dBm 30 to 70 MAC Access Setup Allowed MAC Addresses MAC Address IP Address Radio Name aie Tx Rx Strength dBm C 00 15 6D 55 72 F3 192 168 0 133 Mesh Radio 1 Radio 1 71 4 64 C 001560 55 C2 86 192 168 0172 Mesh Radio 3 Radio 1 78 4 78 Disallowed MAC gt Addresses oe MAC Address IP Address Radio Name You are able to specify the minimum signal strength required for a connection to be established and you can disallow specific radios from being able to connect to the radio These features are used to preventing unwanted connections from developing between the radios that are part of the mesh network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 501 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings This topic describes the wireless security settings used to secure mesh radios To configure mesh radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Ra
307. lick the right mouse button on a link in the Wireless Link Status Table The following context menu is displayed Select Connected Radio The following table describes the commands available in the context menu Select Connected Radio Selects the radio associated with the link The STRATOS user interface will be updated to reflect the newly selected radio You can also select the radio associated with the link by double clicking the left mouse button on the link For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 156 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Bandwith Test Panel The Bandwidth Test panel is used to determine the throughput of the wireless connections between the currently selected radio and the other radio or radios that are connected to it IP Address 192 168 128 6 Radio CommpakBB 58 Single Remote Max Speed Direction Transmit Current Last 10s Average mbps mbps mbps 39 2 38 6 Je To check the throughput of a wireless connection 1 Make sure that the Bandwath Test panel is visible If it is not currently visible In the main menu navigate to the View gt Panels item and verify that the Bandwidth Test option is checked If the Bandwidth Test panel is hidden behind another panel click on the Bandwidth Test tab to bring it to the front of the other panels Click the Bandwidth Test tab Wireless Link Status Bandwidth Test Network
308. ling roaming and setting the parent For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 490 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL MAC address See the Radio Settings N Cards or Radio Settings A and B G Cards topic for more information For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 491 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings N Cards This topic describes the wireless security settings used to secure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios using Wireless N radio cards To configure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Radio 1 tab and the Wireless Security sub tab 5 If you have selected the N Only option in the Network Type option in the Radio Settings tab update the settings using the following guidelines Wireless Security Type Select the Dynamic option Pre Shared Key Enter the password used to secure the wireless links The password should be at least 8 characters long 12 to 16 is preferable and contain a random combination of upper and lowercase letters numbers and punctuation characters except for the and characters For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 P
309. link connection lines The following table describes the individual CCQ threshold settings Note that for all settings e To change the color click the associate M button in the Color column and select the desired color from the color picker that is displayed e To change the threshold enter a new value in the CCQ column or click on the buttons to change the value Setting Name Poor Signal Set the color to display when the signal quality is less than the specified CCQ value A CCQ value below the Poor Signal threshold indicates that the signal quality is bad The connection will probably not be stable and will have low throughput Low Signal Set the color to display when the signal quality is less than the specified CCQ value but higher than the Poor Signal value A CCQ value between the Poor Signal and Low Signal thresholds indicates that the signal quality is low The connection will be marginal For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 76 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL a and may not have good throughput Good Signal Set the color to display when the signal quality is greater than the Low Signal value A CCQ value above the Low Signal value indicates that the signal quality is good The wireless connection should be stable and will have good throughput Inactive Set the color to display when no signal strength information is available for a Stat
310. ll All network traffic will be matched When you select this option one or both of the Source Address and Destination Address fields must be set Otherwise all of the network traffic flowing through the radio would match the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 377 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus rule The rule will only affect UDP traffic The rule will only affect TCP traffic Optionally specify the port or ports associated with the network traffic that the rule will apply to You can specify the ports using one of the following formats Format Example Single Port 1000 Multiple Ports 1000 2000 Port Range 1000 2000 Multiple Port Ranges 1000 2000 3000 4000 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all traffic of the selected protocol type Source Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets must originate from You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Destination Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets are being forwarded to You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168
311. lly sending ICMP messages pings to a group of radios and recording the latency of the responses It is used for getting a qualitative analysis of your network s performance To carry out a ping test 1 Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic 2 Select Add to Ping Test from the Radio menu 3 The Ping Test panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 4 The ping test will automatically start using the radios that you have selected For more information regarding the ping test refer to the Ping Test panel topic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 48 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL RADIUS Monitor Select RADIUS Monitor from the Radio menu to display the current state of the RADIUS requests made by the radio When then RADIUS Monitor menu item is selected the RADIUS Monitor form is displayed RADIUS Monitor Radio Identification Name Point to Multipoint Master IP Address 192 168 128 135 Primary RADIUS Server Backup RADIUS Server Address 192 168 128 237 Address 192 168 128 238 Requests 4 Requests 1 Accepts 1 Accepts 0 Rejects 1 Rejects 0 Resends 6 Resends 3 Timeouts 2 Timeouts Bad Replies 3 Bad Replies The following tables describe information displayed in the RADIUS Monitor form Prima
312. loaded For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 414 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL the packets in the lower priority queues will be dropped before the traffic in the higher priority queues Higher priority traffic will be maintained at the expense of the lower priority traffic ENCOM radio management traffic is always assigned to the highest priority queue This ensures that ENCOM STRATOS can always access the radio in a timely fashion Other types of network traffic can be assigned to specific priority queues by creating custom priority rules Any remaining traffic is assigned to the lowest priority queue In order to apply priority queue based QoS to the entire network each radio in the network must be configured with the same priority rules Use WMM When this option is enabled priorities are automatically assigned to incoming packets based on their Wi Fi Multimedia WMM priority If VLANs Enable are being used packet priorities are automatically assigned from the VLAN Use WMM priority of incoming packets Priority queues are still used to manage the E Use DSCP priorities packets and to ensure that the higher priority traffic is maintained at the expense of the lower priority traffic WMM is a prioritization scheme that is optimized for multimedia applications such as Voice over IP VoIP video streaming and other applications that require low latency and high thro
313. low button to disallow the selected MAC addresses This list contains the list of WDS links that are not allowed to form Click on the Add button to manually add the MAC address of a remote radio to the disallowed list When selected the following form is displayed Add MAC Address Add the following MAC address to the Disallowed MAC Addresses MAC address 00 01 F2 C5 74 1D Specify the MAC address of the radio you want to disallow and press the OK button The new MAC address will be added to the Disallowed MAC Addresses list Note If you add the MAC address for a radio that is not known to ENCOM STRATOS only the MAC address will be displayed in the disallowed list If the radio is known to STRATOS the associated IP Address and radio name will be included Both scenarios are shown in the following example MAC Address IP Address Radio Name C 00 15 6D 65 59 49 192 168 1 60 Mesh Radio 3 C 00 16 3E 16 42 44 Click on the Remove button to remove links from the disallowed list To remove disallowed links For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 287 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remove button 1 Select one or more links in the Disallowed MAC Addresses table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 15 6D 55 57 60 192 168 1 251 Mesh Radio 2
314. lus USER MANUAL Static Security Settings The following screen shot shows the static security options for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static O Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Static Security Options Encryption Level l 128 bit WEP v Encryption Key 1 AE5487ED3494AD45E3494E264D9 Active Key Key 1 v Encryption Key 2 Encryption Key 3 Enter 26 character HEX keys Encryption Key 4 The following table describes the static security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Static Security Options Field Name Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level to use Three options are available Option Description 64 bit WEP Uses a 40 bit encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is considered to be obsolete and should only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit WEP Uses a 104 bit encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is more secure than 64 bit WEP but still suffers from deficiencies in the WEP algorithm It should only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit AES Uses the 128 bit AES block encryption algorithm couple with the CBC MAC block chaining technique for added security This is the most secure of the three static security options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 P
315. ly you want the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the radio Specify a static IP address Select this option to manually assign the radio s IP address ENCOM recommends this option because it provides for a more secure network especially if you have not enabled wireless security Note It is important that each radio in the network is assigned a different IP address Network performance can suffer greatly if two or more radios are assigned the same IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 325 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL IP Address Settings Feld Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the radio This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 151 Network Mask Enter the network mask This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio or router that allows the radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Note that the default gateway s IP address must be in the same subnet as the radio s IP address Power LED
316. m Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Tab The following screen shot shows the network settings tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP GoS RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using Nothing don t synchronize v Primary NTP Server Secondary NTP Server System Clock Time Zone lt Not Set gt Because a large number of configuration options are available the network configuration tab is split up into a number of sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Time Settings e DHCP Server Settings e SNMP Settings e QoS Quality of Service Settings e RADIUS Settings e VLAN Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 250 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Time Settings The following screen shot shows the NTP settings tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Qos RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using NTP Server v Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 System Clock Time Zone GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada v The following table describes the time synchronization settings Time Synchronization Field Name Description Synchronize radio time Select one of the following options
317. m Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Restore Original Layout Select Restore Original Layout from the View menu to reset the user interface panels to their original locations and sizes This function is useful if you have moved and hidden panels and you no longer find the layout useable All but the task panel will be made visible The panels will be laid out as follows Encom Stratos V1 4 0 0 Radio Folder Tools Help Thorncliffe Repeater 5 Identification Name Thomcliffe Repeater A r nna Ana J Description bi Default h Ef 24 Model CommpakBB 58N3 58 Vi ba Nose Hill Broadband Network SU Firmware Version 5 14 rae ob ji PEN gt i Wri f License ID BGIR L4ES Non Haven Uptime 05 03 33 e S a Location Wwe p ET x Latitude 51 09727 sity Highwood 2 gt mr Longitude 114 06023 r 2 HEH Ci fi Street Address Collingwood GPS Not Available i4 Trivood Network Mesh 14 Ya A e Rosemont 2 jr IP Address 192 168 128 62 3 7 f 00 42 BB C5 ber rente DBanf Trail s i MAC Address 00 0C 42 BB C5 63 i 3 Ethernet 1 StreetMap Map data 2073 Opens Link Rate 100 Mbps Ethernet 2 7 N Link Rate No Link Locallignment Enable _ une Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band Status Align Interface Radio Name MAC Address IP Address Tx Rx Rate Mb MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D0 Default Radio 1 Nose Hil Master 00 15 6D 85 5203 19216812861 1200 2400 Wireless Protoco
318. mance of your network and will interfere with the radio configuration process For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 393 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Setting up the Master Radio To set up the master radio 1 Ensure that the radio has been assigned an IP address that is compatible with your local network see the Assigning IP Addresses topic 2 Double click on the radio The Radio Configuration form will be displayed Enter the appropriate login credentials if prompted for them The default user name is admin and the default password is empty a Select the Basic Settings tab Configure the basic settings as required b Select the Location tab Choose the desired icon color and select the Master icon Select the appropriate geographical location on the map c Select the Radio 1 Tab Configure the Radio Network Setup and Radio Parameter Setup sections Because this is a master radio set the Radio Mode option to Master The remaining options can be left to their default values d Press the OK button to save the changes made to the radio configuration Most of the settings in the Radio 1 tab must be the same for both the master and NOTE remote radios If they are different the two radios may not be able to communicate with each other For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 394 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STR
319. master and repeater radios must be set to the same specific frequency Remote radios are always configured to run in Auto Frequency mode They will automatically adjust their operating frequencies to match the master s Wireless Link Rate Select the rates at which the radio will communicate with the other radios in the network The default setting for this option is Adaptive The Adaptive link rate automatically adjusts the radio s data rate to account for the current network conditions It typically provides the most reliable network performance A fixed rate helps reduce data latency and may be used if the performance of the link is more important than the reliability If you select a fixed rate a second drop down list box is displayed as shown in the following example Min 6 Mbps vy Max 24 Mbps v Select the minimum allowed bit rate from the left hand list and the maximum allowed rate from the right hand list Regardless of the range you specify the 6 Mbps rate will always be included in the list of allowable rates This allows the radio to fall back to the lowest bit rate if it is not able to maintain the higher bit rates Output Power Select the wireless radio s output power Unless constrained by the Regulatory Domain that the radio is operating in you should use the Maximum power setting when the radio is deployed in the field If the radio is being provisioned or tested in a bench environment you shou
320. mation is saved e The radios displayed in the radio list panel e The folder structure of the radio list panel e Last known configuration settings of all radios displayed in the radio list panel This function is useful for making backups of the current radio network state Use the Import Radio List function to restore the radio information from a saved database file To export the radio information 1 Select Export gt Radio List from the File menu You will be prompted to save the radio database file Save radio database file Save in CD Encom Stratos Profiles 4 oTiledBvs My Recent Em Radio sdf Documents My Documents My Computer File name Radio_backup sdf e Save as type Database files 2 2 Enter the name of the export file in the File name field and then press the Save button Starting with ENCOM STRATOS V1 3 0 radio list databases are identified with the sdf file extension Previous versions of STRATOS used the s3db file extension For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 41 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Export gt Map Tiles Select Export gt Map Tiles from the File menu to save the currently cached map tiles to a database file This function is useful in cases where you want to use STRATOS on a computer that does not have Internet access Simply export the map tiles from a workstation that has access
321. mit Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 Receive Chain 0 Chain 1 Chain 2 ENCOM offers point to point radios that support up to 3 antennas STRATOS will automatically display the number of antennas that are supported by your radio in the Antenna Chains group The following table describes the settings found in each group in the wireless N settings tab Antenna Chains Field Namo Transmit Specify the antennas to use for transmitting data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio Receive Specify the antennas to use for receiving data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 242 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless security settings tab for a point to point radio Radio Settings Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication The Wireless Security Type group allows you to specify the security protocols used to protect the wireless communication links You can choose from the following options Wireless Security
322. n B Temp z LicenseActivation NACXG DMS7L C2AID R2 D7 HRRS6 4 disc My Recent Documents Filename License ctivaionNaCXG DMS7L CAD A2YD7HARSG A de M My Network Files of type Activation Files dlsc x 4 f the activation was successful a confirmation message will be displayed License Successfully Activated j Your license was successfully activated For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 100 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 Click the OK button to return to the License Details page ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 20 radios Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Request Upgrade Upgrade License Finish Manual Upgrade 6 Click the Close button to return to STRATOS The Radio List panel will be updated to reflect the new license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 101 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Requesting a License Upgrade To request an upgrade for an installation of STRATO
323. n 2 1 71 Page 123 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Selecting Multiple Folders To select multiple folders use the following procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the first folder The folder will be highlighted Name ms p Mac Address i EE La S eer 49 Single 5 i Mesh Network Hon a Mesh Radio 1 fan E Mesh Radio 2 Mesh Radio 3 ty Point to Point Network ka CommpakBB 58 Single en i Point to Point Radio 1 2 Press and hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard 3 Click the left mouse button on each of the other folders to select In the following example the Default and Point to Point Network folders were selected By implication all of the radios in the selected folders will also be selected Name IP Address Mac Address i Ee Q a 49 Single kes Mesh Network o Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 Mesh Radio 3 4 ie Paint to Point Network be E CommpakBB 58 Single es i Point to Point Radio 1 Note All folders must reside in the same parent folder in order for this technique to work For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 124 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Moving Radios and Folders ENCOM STRATOS allows you to arrange the radios and folders in the radio list to suit your requirements Refer to the following topics for more information e Moving a Sing
324. n in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 151 Network Mask Enter the network mask This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio or router that allows the radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 192 168 128 254 Note that the default gateway s IP address must be in the same subnet as the radio s IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 179 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Location Tab The following screen shot shows the location settings tab for a broadband radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Radio Location Hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to choose a new location ve Latitude y 7 51 10533 7 y Dalhousie i Longitude x Dalhousie 114 15477 i Icon Color D Blue i Icon Style Varsity Estates Q Street Address Brentwood The following table describes the settings found in the location tab Field Name Get location from GPS Select this option if you want the radio
325. n the operation of the radio and does not need to be set for normal operation If the time zone is not set the radio defaults to UTC time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 299 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings The following screen shot shows the DHCP server tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol QoS RADIUS VLAN DHCP Server 4 network must have only one active DHCP server Network devices may get conflicting IP addresses if more than one DHCP server is active on the network Enable DHCP Server DHCP Server Settings Start Address 132 168 1 100 EndAddress 192 168 1 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 DNS Server Address 192 168 1 2 WINS Server Address 192 168 1 3 The following table describes the DHCP server settings DHCP Server Field Name Description Enable DHCP Server Check this option to enable the radio s DHCP server When this option is enabled the radio will assign IP addresses to any other radio or any other other device that is configured to obtain their IP addresses dynamically Important Severe network instability can occur if there is more than one DHCP server present in a network or network segment Do not enable this option if a router or another radio is already acting as a DHCP server DHCP Server Setti
326. nchronize its internal clock from the built in GPS receiver Note This option is only available if the radio contains a GPS receiver Primary NTP Server Specify the IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize the radio s internal clock This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 365 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Secondary NTP Server System Clock Field Name Time Zone USER MANUAL Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected If applicable specify the IP address of the secondary NTP server This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 If there is no secondary NTP server in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Note This option is only enabled when the NTP Server option is selected Description Select the time zone in which the radio is operating Note that the time zone has no effect on the operation of the radio and does not need to be set for normal operation If the time zone is not set the radio defaults to UTC time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 366 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM
327. nd The Target Radio Modules column lists the wireless radio modules that are present on the radio The Profile Radio Modules column shows the options that are available for each wireless interface that is present on the radio STRATOS will find the best match between the profile and target radio modules and will assign these by default You can change the default assignments by selecting the appropriate items from the list boxes In the example shown above STRATOS applied the matching radio modules from the profile to the target radio modules If you didn t want to disturb the configuration of the second radio module then you would select the Don t Copy option from the second list box as shown below Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 Radiol 2 4 GHz15M Band Don t Copy Fadio2 5 8 GHz ISM Band For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 228 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 The Settings to Copy options allow you to specify what settings to import from the configuration profile Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network These are described further in the following table Option Deseription o Copy all settings Use this option when you need to configure a radio so that it matches the configuration profile exactly Thi
328. nd 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Wireless Link Rate Channel 5200 MHz v Output Power Maximum v Because the wireless radio settings are somewhat involved the radio configuration tab is split up into three sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Radio Settings sub tab e MAC Access sub tab e Wireless N sub tab e Wireless Security Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 282 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless radio settings tab for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D8 Radio Network Setup Network Type Mesh Only Nj Network SSID EncomMesh Hide SSID Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 5200 MHz v Output Power Maximum v The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the wireless radio settings tab Field Name Enable Radio Uncheck this option to disable the wireless radio card A disabled radio card will not be able to form wireless links with other radios If you uncheck this option all of the other options in the Rad
329. nd signal quality Private Network a 1 EN COM ENCOM Broadband Broadband Master Remote Computers running network Workstation or laptop operations center software running ENCOM STRATOS The following topics describe how to set up the broadband network e Assigning IP Addresses e Setting up the Master Radio e Setting up the Remote Radio e Testing the Wireless Connection e Deploying the Radios e Optimizing to Minimize Noise Interference For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 392 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Assigning IP Addresses If you are using new radios you have to configure them with IP addresses that are compatible with your private local network Perform the following steps for each of the radios 1 Run the ENCOM STRATOS application 2 Connect the radio directly to your workstation or laptop Refer to the Connecting to a Radio topic for more info 3 The radio will automatically be discovered by ENCOM STRATOS and appear in the Radio List panel m 4 Use the Assign Static IP Address function to assign a new IP address to the radio The new address should be compatible with your local network The default IP address assigned by ENCOM is 192 168 0 1 Make sure that you assign different IP addresses to the master and remote radios NOTE Assigning the same IP address to two or more radios will negatively affect the perfor
330. nd to configure it so that each of its Ethernet ports block the STP control traffic between segments Specific information regarding the configuration of the routers is beyond the scope of this document Ethernet Backbone Router Router Router STP Preferred STP Preferred l STP Preferred Root Root i Root n a amp Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 412 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 413 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Appendix D Quality of Service QoS The Quality of Service QoS settings allow you to prioritize network traffic so that important traffic is processed ahead of less important traffic Under normal circumstances QoS will not perceptibly affect the behavior of the radio If the radio becomes heavily loaded and is no longer able to handle all of the network traffic that is flowing through it the QoS features will automatically start discarding packets associated with the lower priority traffic in order to maintain the integrity of the high priority traffic Without QoS all packets would have the same probability of being discarded regardless of their importance Although the QoS features will help alleviate issues caused by heavy network traffic they are not a substitute fo
331. ne has no effect on the operation of the radio and does not need to be set for normal operation If the time zone is not set the radio defaults to UTC time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 252 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings The following screen shot shows the DHCP server tab for a point to point radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Gos RADIUS VLAN DHCP Server network must have only one active DHCP server Network devices may get conflicting IP addresses if more than one DHCP server is active on the network Enable DHCP Server DHCP Server Settings Start Address 132 168 1 100 EndAddress 192 168 1 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 DNS Server Address 192 168 1 2 WINS Server Address 192 168 1 3 The following table describes the DHCP server settings DHCP Server Field Name Description Enable DHCP Server Check this option to enable the radio s DHCP server When this option is enabled the radio will assign IP addresses to any other radio or any other other device that is configured to obtain their IP addresses dynamically Important Severe network instability can occur if there is more than one DHCP server present in a network or network segment Do not enable this option if a router or another radio is already acting as a DHCP server DHCP Serve
332. network monitoring application SNMP Service Settings Field Name Description Host IP Enter the IP address of the computer on which the network monitoring application is running as shown in the following example Host IP 1192 168 1 50 Setting this option will prevent any other computer from being able to access the radio s SNMP information If you want to allow any computer that is on your network to access the radio s SNMP information enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Community Name The community name used to access the radio s SNMP agent This is set For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 211 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus to public and cannot be changed Only read operations are permitted USER MANUAL Contact Information Enter the contact information of the individual responsible for the network if applicable Location Information Enter the location of the radio if applicable For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 212 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL QoS Settings The following screen shot shows the QoS Quality of Service settings tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Prior
333. ngs Field Name Description DHCP Address Range Specify the start and end range of the IP addresses that will be provided by the DHCP server as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 300 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings Field Name Network Mask Gateway Address DNS Server Address WINS Server Address DHCP Address Range 192 168 1 100 to 1192 168 1 200 In this example IP addresses in the 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 range will be assigned to devices that use dynamic addressing IP addresses outside this range would be manually assigned to devices that do not use dynamic addressing Enter the network mask that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Enter the IP Address of the default gateway that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 The default gateway is the radio or router that provides access to devices outside of the local network Enter the IP Address of the DNS server that will be assigned to the devices tha
334. ning Tree Protocol Settings ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the Spanning Tree Protocol settings tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol The Spanning Tree Protocol helps to manage multiple bridges in an extended LAN environment With STP enabled it will automatically bock all IP ports that form a loop situation within the network Spanning Tree Protocol STP v C Prefered Root Bridge Priority 8000 Hex The spanning tree protocols are used to prevent the formation of loops that can interfere with the proper operation of the radio network Refer to Appendix C Spanning Tree Protocol for more information on the this subject and for guidance in designing a radio network that uses STP or RSTP The following table describes the spanning tree protocol settings Spanning Tree Protocol Field Name Description Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that provides link Protocol management to prevent undesirable loops from appearing in the network You can select from one of the following options Disabled STP is enabled Rapid STP For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Rapid STP is STP is not enabled This is the default setting enabled This is an enhanced version of the STP protocol that provides for faster spanning tree convergence af
335. ntered To stop the antenna alignment sound click the Disable button Volume Control The volume control allows you to increase or decrease the volume of the antenna alignment sound With the volume control you can e Use the button to decrease the volume e Use the button to increase the volume e Use the slider to increase or decrease the volume For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 145 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The volume control only affects the antenna alignment sound It will not affect other sounds that are being played through your computer s speaker On Radio Alignment The on radio antenna alignment button allows you to enable the on radio Enable antenna alignment tool On Radio Alignment Enable for 30 minutes a The on radio alignment tool is accessed through the radio s external audio jack The audio jack is compatible with most stereo headphones or ear buds A periodic beep indicates the transmitted signal strength of the radio s wireless links A higher pitch indicates a higher signal strength and a lower pitch indicates a lower signal strength The on radio antenna alignment tool is always active By default the alignment tool reflects the signal strength of the the first link on the first wireless interface Radio 1 identified by the Default indication in the Wireless Link Status table s Align column Status Align Interf
336. ntication request with the user s group name The following table describes the options that are available for this setting Option Deseripon View Settings The user will be able to inspect the radio s configuration settings but will not be able to make any changes Change Settings The user will be able to inspect and change the radio s configuration settings This setting is ignored if the RADIUS server responds to an authentication request with the user s group name Check this option to send RADIUS accounting packets to the RADIUS server This information is normally used for user billing and is not usually needed for typical ENCOM radio networks For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 312 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc P encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL VLAN Settings The following screen shot shows the VLAN settings tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol Qos RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data VLAN ID 400 s VLAN ID 600 VLAN Priority 5 High v Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 100 IP Address 192 168 128 70 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning Prune VLANs VLAN IDs 200 300 VLANs Virtual LANs ar
337. o Configuration The repeater radios radios 2 and 3 in the diagram would be configured as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable C Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Priority Rules Sect SE Prioritization QoS Name Protoco ddress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP and DSCP Priorities When DSCP priorities are enabled the repeater radios will automatically prioritize received packets based on their DSCP values There is no reason to specify the custom traffic rules For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 438 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Using DSCP and WMM to Improve Video Traffic The following diagram shows a slightly more complex ENCOM broadband network In this scenario the radio network carries video and traffic controller data as well as client device data in this case from laptops used by field personnel Ethernet Backbone i S N P Ss S N 9 _ ra 2 Single 2 Single radios used _ radios used as repeater as repeater Client Device Unmanaged Switch Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras Controller For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 439 2010 2015 Encom Wireless D
338. o Sel0p ni nn a EN Rene ee en eee ee 191 WDS Sets dia cas nibe aeuaeeces Aaea dc sde te nd red adar a cas dant tente ride ne 193 Wireless Security Settings nirmeaintnrenannntinnr nn nent nine 196 Static Security Settings masii nans aasaran a si ns irttd rer nnte een es Iran n etes ere 198 Dynamic Security Settings 200 Network Tab nciesiccccccacseseseseceesiscceceeredeendescessous soneseas ice scesseargtececeiuescsatecceseczcteesutensaseticviecededeiesctecasieatesctevaetiecessueieed 203 MANE SEUNOS RE Re nn nr ne deus sauce cavenecaaecyvageneustuedsasaeeeeveassnesaeva A 204 Spanning Tree Protocol Settings sinies aaar eiia area alerter aai enter 206 Network Filter Setting Sanini anere asine nn nm nt a E aR En ERIEN eRe 208 DHCP Server SettingS 4 105 one covet vcvececcteevadeaaaat geste dre EAA a aaraa Ea E EAEE viata adaa ets 209 SNMPSCHINQS nn r E I N E NSA 211 QOS Sein GS ores 228 nanas ideas Guard Armani iaaiaee aeaea apaa 213 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 5 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Specifying a QOS Priority Rule sise 216 RADIUS Sewing aisciai AE EA ARELA EEE AKASA EE AROE SEE Aa AEAEE RENARE 219 ERST Ene E RS S A A E A A A E EE 221 ADOUT An R o ME E T a E E E E E T 224 Export and Import Buttons wicsicsciveccscssicercacicsceccassccvansecscctexsscencsecesscecastevseusevscusensiveteasesusstensseavaevevscstexstvcnsctceesoes 225 Ex
339. o configuration form is displayed Restore to Factory Defaults Select Frequency Band Radio 1 Radio Module Specify Static IP Address Select Radio Model MAC Address 00 0D B9 17 91 4C Radio Model IP Address 1 92 168 1 35 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Cancel 5 Under most circumstances the Frequency Band and Radio Model fields are fixed and cannot be changed In cases where they can be changed select the appropriate options 6 The IP Address Network Mask and Default Gateway fields are populated with the radio s current settings Make the appropriate changes as required 7 Click the OK button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 57 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc enco ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL 8 The Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 9 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the restore process Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At ey Mesh Radiol Restoring to factory defaults Restoring radio 3 2 06 42 PM 10 If the restore process is successful and STRATOS is able to communicate with the radio the task item will indicate that the radio has been restored Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Sta Started At Finished At MeshRadio1 Restoring to factory defaults Done 100 2 06 42 PM 2 07 18 PM For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 58
340. o settings tab Feld Name Enable Radio Uncheck this option to disable the wireless radio card A disabled radio card will not be able to form wireless links with other radios If you uncheck this option all of the other options in the Radio Settings tab will be disabled Identification Radio Model Displays the model number of the wireless radio card This information is useful when troubleshooting issues with the radio Wireless MAC Displays the MAC address assigned to the wireless radio card For Address broadband radios the MAC address of the wireless radio cards are identical to the MAC address of the radio s Ethernet interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 184 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Field Name Network Type Identifies the radio network type This setting cannot be changed for broadband radios Network SSID Enter a name used to identify the network in which the wireless radio will take part The Network SSID is case sensitive and may contain spaces Note You should change the default SSID assigned at the factory to a unique SSID for your network You can minimize interference between adjacent networks by assigning a unique SSID for each network Important All radios that participate in the same network must be assigned the same Network SSID Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the Network SSID from being broadcas
341. o settings tab Feld Name Enable Radio Uncheck this option to disable the wireless radio card A disabled radio card will not be able to form wireless links with other radios If you uncheck this option all of the other options in the Radio Settings tab will be disabled Identification Radio Model Displays the model number of the wireless radio card This information is useful when troubleshooting issues with the radio Wireless MAC Displays the MAC address assigned to the wireless radio card For point Address to multipoint radios the MAC address of the wireless radio cards are different than the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 331 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Field Name Description Network Type Identifies the radio network type This setting cannot be changed for point to multipoint radios Wireless Mode The drop down list at the right of the Network Type setting allows you to specify the 802 11 mode under which the wireless radio card will operate as shown in the following example N Only v Depending on the type of wireless radio card provisioned in your radio one of more of the following options will be available eto er A Only Operate in the standard 802 11a mode in the 5 8 GHz frequency band Client devices cannot attach to the radio G Only Operate in
342. oller data from being routed to the left hand radios VLAN ID 20 is pruned by the radio Only network traffic from VLAN ID 10 and 30 will be allowed on the left hand radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 466 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Radio 3 VLAN Configuration ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The VLAN configuration for Radio 3 would be as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Tagged Management Data VLAN ID 10 3 Management Address Wireless IP Address 1010 1 53 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning C Prune VLANs Client Tagging Tag Client Data VLAN ID 130 lt gt VLAN Priority 5 High v Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 1192 168 1 53 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 The Management VLAN is enabled and set to VLAN ID 10 The IP address of the radio s wireless interface is set to a value that is compatible with the other radios in the network Although the radio s Ethernet interface is not used it is still assigned an IP address that can be used for local on site access As configured the radio will carry network traffic from all VLANs For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 467 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Radio 4 VLAN Configuration ENCOM STRATOS plus USER
343. on Radio Name Enter a name used to identify the radio up to a maximum of 64 characters The name you enter will be displayed in the radio list and in all other places where a reference to the radio is made Name IPAddress Mac Address EB Default 3 i Radio 1 E Point to Point Radio 1 Radio MAC Address Displays the MAC address assigned to the radio This is essentially the MAC address of the radio s first Ethernet adapter For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 276 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Identification Feld Name Description Enter an optional description for the radio This field allows you to keep track of ad hoc information associated with the radio without adding clutter to the radio name The radio description is displayed in the radio properties panel Mesh Radio 1 E Identification Name adio a Description Model BF 5E724 Firmware Version 3 30 Regulatory Domain Field Name Country Name Select the country in which the radio is operating Certain countries have limitations on the radio power output allowed frequency ranges and frequency bands Failure to select the appropriate country can result in a radio that is operating outside of the legally allowed ranges If the radio is operating in the United States or Canada you can leave this setting to lt Not Set gt IP Address Settings Field Name Description Obtain an
344. on 2 1 71 Page 436 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 4 Create the video camera priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Video cameras Enter 4 name that describes the data affected by the rule UDP v Part s Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Assign a high priority DSCP value to the tule use a lower priority than the traffic controller rule 40 CS5 IP Precedence 5 High 5 Press OK to create the new rule Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable C Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C Traffic controllers TCP 6000 7 56 C Video cameras UDP 5000 5 40 New priority rules 3 Note that STRATOS will automatically assign the highest possible priority to the protocols that it uses to communicate with the radios You do not need to add any rules for this traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 437 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repeater Radi
345. on that identifies the type of network traffic associated with the rule Matching Criteria Field Name Description Protocol Specify the protocol that the rule will apply to You can select one of the following values All All network traffic will be matched When you select this option one or both of the Source Address and Destination Address fields must be set Otherwise all of the network traffic flowing through the radio would match the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 260 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus rule The rule will only affect UDP traffic The rule will only affect TCP traffic Optionally specify the port or ports associated with the network traffic that the rule will apply to You can specify the ports using one of the following formats Format Example Single Port 1000 Multiple Ports 1000 2000 Port Range 1000 2000 Multiple Port Ranges 1000 2000 3000 4000 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all traffic of the selected protocol type Source Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets must originate from You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses
346. one of the following values All All network traffic will be matched When you select this option one or both of the Source Address and Destination Address fields must be set Otherwise all of the network traffic flowing through the radio would match the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 308 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus rule The rule will only affect UDP traffic The rule will only affect TCP traffic Optionally specify the port or ports associated with the network traffic that the rule will apply to You can specify the ports using one of the following formats Format Example Single Port 1000 Multiple Ports 1000 2000 Port Range 1000 2000 Multiple Port Ranges 1000 2000 3000 4000 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all traffic of the selected protocol type Source Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets must originate from You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Destination Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets are being forwarded to You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Exampl
347. one of the available frequencies are supported by regular client devices specialized 4 9 GHz client devices do exist For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 499 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc AZ encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Radio Settings sub tab for a mesh radio will look similar to the following example Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros AR5213 Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 55 72 CD Radio Network Setup Network Type Mesh Only L Network SSID AdihNr7 edtik 29 Hide SSID Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 10 MHz Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band wireless Link Rate Adaptive Channel 5775 MHz Output Power Maximum v 7 f you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab and then repeat steps 5 6 8 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 500 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus MAC Access Settings Unlike Broadband or Point to Multipoint radios there is no explicit way to prevent one mesh radio from connecting to another mesh radio As long as the radios are provisioned with the same Network SSID Channel mode Channel frequency and wire
348. only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit WEP Uses a 104 bit encryption key coupled with a 24 bit initialization vector This option is more secure than 64 bit WEP but still suffers from deficiencies in the WEP algorithm It should only be used for compatibility with existing infrastructure 128 bit AES Uses the 128 bit AES block encryption algorithm couple with the CBC MAC block chaining technique for added security This is the most secure of the three static security options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 198 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Active Key Select the encryption key to use Although you can define up to four static encryption keys only one key can be active Encryption Key 1 4 Enter the hexadecimal character sequence to use for the encryption key Hexadecimal characters include the decimal digits 0 9 and the letters A F The number of characters you need to enter depends on the Encryption Level you have specified An indicator located below the Active Key list will indicate the number of characters you have to enter Encryption Level 128 bit AES Active Key Key 1 nter 32 or more character HEX keys ey length must be even For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 199 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Dynamic Security Settings
349. onnected to the repeater H Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description CompakBB 58 Single 00 0D B9 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 Mounted on north most light standard CommpakBB 58 24 Dual 00 0D B9 15 B0 34 192 168 1 250 Installed in gray steel cabinet Note that installing a repeater will reduce the network throughput by half It should only be used when there is no other option available or if the reduction in performance is not important For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 190 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remote Radio Setup Select the Remote option for a radio that is as the end of the broadband network If the network contains a repeater check the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS58 8 Hide SSID Radio Mode Remote v Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v C 802 11 Client By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the remote radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master or repeater Network Type Network SSID ENCOM58 B Hide SSID Using Repeater Radio Mode Remote v Channel Mode 40 MHz v C 802 11 Client If you encounter connectivity issues between the remote radio and the master or repeater you may want to manually select the radio to which the
350. ons center Note that when operating in Wireless N mode the repeater radio mode is not available Refer to the following topics for more information on radio mode options that are available e Master Radio Setup e Repeater Radio Setup e Remote Radio Setup Channel Mode This option allows you to set the width of the frequency channel you are using Selecting a smaller frequency for the Channel Mode increases the distance over which you can establish a wireless link at the cost of reduced bandwidth For most applications 40 MHz is acceptable Enable eMax Protocol Check this option to enable the eMax protocol The eMax protocol is a proprietary protocol that increases bandwidth and security on the wireless network Note Due to compatibility issues the eMax protocol cannot be used if there is a repeater in the network or if 802 11 clients need to be supported by the radio Note When operating in N Only mode the eMax protocol is always enabled Using Repeater Check this option if there is a repeater in the network Note When operating in N Only mode repeaters are not available Enable Roaming Refer to the Radio Mode setup topics see links above for information on this option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 333 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Parent Radio MAC Address Refer to the Radio Mode setup topics see links above
351. or ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 454 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Any devices that are connected to the radio s Ethernet port must be assigned IP addresses and network masks that are compatible with the specified client VLAN For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 455 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Client Tagging with a Management VLAN In this scenario a specific management VLAN is used to access the radios and the network traffic on the radio s Ethernet port is limited to a specific VLAN In this case you will need to configure the Management VLAN Client Tagging Management Address and Access Port Address sections of the radio configuration form s VLAN sub tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management YLAN Client Tagging Tagged Management Data Tag Client Data VLAN ID 10 E VLAN ID 20 a VLAN Priority 5 Hih M Management Address Wireless Access Port Address Ethernet IP Address 10 10 1 50 IP Address 192 168 128 50 Network Mask 255 255 254 0 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 1 Pruning C Prune VLANs Like the case where only the Client Tagging option is enabled the radio will be assigned two IP addresses one address will be used by the radio s wireless interfaces and the other will be
352. or forwarding network traffic associated with specific VLAN IDs VLAN IDs Enter one or more VLAN IDs to prune Separate individual IDs with commas Any incoming network traffic that matches the specified VLAN IDs will be dropped by the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 267 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL About Tab The following screen shot shows the About tab for a point to point radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Hardware Info Model CommpakBB 58N3 PTP Platform e500v2 Architecture powerpc Firmware Info Version 4 17 License ID 8wWR5 TJ36 Upgradable to v7 x This tab displays information regarding the radio s hardware and firmware It does not contain any user editable fields For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 268 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Export and Import Buttons The Export and Import buttons in the lower left hand corner of the radio configuration form allow you to save the radio s configuration settings to a file and to update the radio s configuration settings from a previously saved configuration file Refer to the following topics for more information on these functions e Exporting the Radio Configuration e Importing the Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 26
353. oritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Poit s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C1 Traffic Controller TCP 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 ae S E The Quality of Service settings allow you to prioritize the various types of network traffic so that important traffic is processed ahead of less important traffic Under normal conditions all network data packets have an equal opportunity to be forwarded by the radio This works well for some applications such as file transfers or web browsing but it is not adequate for traffic that is sensitive to network latency and throughput reductions such as voice or video streaming QoS allows you to address this issue by giving the time sensitive traffic a larger share of the network bandwidth Refer to Appendix D Quality of Service for more detailed information on the prioritization mechanisms supported by the ENCOM radios The following tables describe the Quality of Service settings Network Traffic Prioritization Field Name Enable Check this option to enable priority queue based QoS features Priority rules are used to specify the priority of specific types of traffic Lower priority traffic is dropped in preference to higher priority traffic when the radio becomes heavily loaded Use WMM Check this option to set the prior
354. ork operations center The range of the network can be extended by using dual point to multipoint radios or two single point to multipoint radios connected back to back via their Ethernet interfaces The following diagram shows a typical point to multipoint radio network ENCOM Point to Multipoint Remote a L Private Network z r to or Internet Remote el n X ENCOM ENCOM Point to Multipoint Dual Master Point to Multipoint ENCOM Radio Point to Multipoint optional Remote 7 Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS For information on configuring ENCOM point to multipoint radios refer to the following topic e Configuring Point to Multipoint Radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 16 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Chapter 2 Installation System Requirements ENCOM STRATOS was created to run on a wide variety of computers from netbooks that can be used by field personnel to high powered multi monitor workstations used in the network operations center In order to run ENCOM STRATOS your computer must meet the following minimum requirements e Windows XP SP3 Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating system e Microsoft Net Framework 4 0 full version not the client profile e 1 GB RAM e 1 GB free hard drive space e Video card with a minimum 1024 x 600 resolution Downloading STRATOS Software ENCOM STRATOS is available for download
355. ow user to change ___ If checked ENCOM STRATOS will allow you to modify the configuration radio configurations of any radio that is on line If not checked STRATOS will not allow you to modify the configuration of any radio However you will still be able to view the current configuration of radios that are on line Disabling this feature provides a handy way to prevent users from making changes to the radio s configuration but still allow them to view the radio s current configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 73 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL User Interface RSSI Thresholds The following screen shot shows the RSS Thresholds panel of the System Settings form AJB G Wireless N 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 ess1 dom Good Signal The RSSI threshold settings allow you to specify the colors to use for the following items in the STRATOS user interface e Wireless Link Status panel Status column e Wireless Link Status panel RSSI bars e Map View wireless link connection lines Because of differences between the two technologies different thresholds are used for the Wireless N and legacy A B G radio cards Click the Wireless N tab to access the Wireless N settings and click the A B G tab to access the legacy radio card settings The following table describes the individual RSSI threshold settings Note that for all sett
356. p Dynamic WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm C 00 0C 42 72 65 F2 192 168 0 41 CommpakBB 58 58 Dual Radio 1 56 56 C 00 00 89 07 13 0C 192 168 0 200 CommpakBB 58 Single Radio 1 41 4 42 Static WDS Links MAC Address IP Address Radio Name Interface Tx Rx Strength dBm The settings on this tab are used to specify the WDS Wireless Distribution System connections that are allowed to form with other radios in the network The following tables describe the settings found in each group in the WDS Setup tab Field Name Description Disabled No connections from other radios will be accepted This defeats the purpose of a wireless network and is not recommended For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 193 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc WDS Mode Select the method used to determine if an external radio is allowed to form a wireless connection with the radio being configured One of the following options can be used WDS Mode Dynamic All connections from other radios will be accepted This is the default and recommended setting Static Only those connections listed in the Static WDS Links table will be allowed to form D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Field Name Dynamic WDS Links Move button Static WDS Links Add button This list contains the list of WDS links that are currently active Click on the Move button to conver
357. pe This setting cannot be changed for point to point radios Network SSID Enter a name used to identify the network in which the wireless radio will take part The Network SSID is case sensitive and may contain spaces Note You should change the default SSID assigned at the factory to a unique SSID for your network You can minimize interference between adjacent networks by assigning a unique SSID for each network Important Al radios that participate in the same network must be assigned the same Network SSID Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the Network SSID from being broadcast by the wireless radio This prevents external devices from being able to discover the network s SSID and potentially connect to it Radio Mode Select the radio mode based on the location of the radio with respect to the network operations center Select the Master option for the radio that is located closest to the network operations center This radio is usually connected to the network operation center via the Ethernet port Select the Remote option for the remote radio Channel Mode This option allows you to set the width of the frequency channel you are using Selecting a smaller frequency for the Channel Mode increases the distance over which you can establish a wireless link at the cost of reduced bandwidth Since point to point radios are intended for use as high capacity back haul devices a 40 MHz channel mode is recommended under normal circum
358. plus USER MANUAL Connecting Directly to Your Computer When provisioning a new radio or working on a radio in the field you will need to connect the radio directly to your computer The following diagram shows a typical direct connection to the radio Power Cable ENCOM Radio D Ethemet PoE Cable Injector Ethemet Crossover Cable Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS In this scenario the computer is connected to the Ethernet port of a Power over Ethernet PoE injector using an Ethernet crossover cable A standard Ethernet cable is used to connect the radio to the PoE injector For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 25 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus CA encom p USER MANUAL Connecting Using a Switch or Router If you have access to an Ethernet switch you can set up the connection to the radio using the switch This removes the need for an Ethernet crossover cable The same type of connection is also used if the radio has been deployed and is already connected to your network infrastructure The following diagram shows a typical connection using a switch a router could also be used Power Fa i ENCOM Ethemet Radio Switch Ethernet Cable gt Ethernet PoE Cable Injector Ethemet Cable Workstation or laptop running ENCOM STRATOS In this scenario the computer and the PoE injector are connected to the switch using stand
359. plus USER MANUAL Selecting Radios The radio tree view allows you to select one or more radios using the mouse Refer to the following topics for more information e Selecting Single Radios e Selecting a Single Folder e Selecting a Range of Radios e Selecting Multiple Radios e Selecting a Range of Folders e Selecting Multiple Folders Selecting Single Radios To select a single radio simply click the left mouse button on the radio name The contents of the Map View panel Item Properties panel Wireless Link Status panel and Network Traffic panel are automatically update to reflect the newly selected radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 120 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Selecting a Single Folder ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL To select a single folder click the left mouse button on the folder name The Wireless Link Status panel and Network Traffic panel are automatically disabled The contents of the Item Properties panel are automatically updated to provide information on the newly selected folder Selecting a folder will automatically select all of the radios found in that folder and in any sub folders within the selected folder This provides an easy way to select a group of radios to use with certain ENCOM STRATOS functions such as the Ping Test In the following example the Mesh Network folder has been selected which implies that the Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 and Mesh R
360. porting the Radio Configurations naa E eri teas E ar a E A E ENE 226 Importing the Radio Configuration ss 227 Configuring Point to Point Radios sssssssssssreeenseeeeeneneneennneeneeneneenee 230 Basic Settings Wal E E A E A E E A E T E 232 Locati n TaD Reese ee 235 RAdIG TA rie ctv A E E EE E E T T E E neslvndeiee 238 FRAGIO Settings 42488584 Annee nr ee a a aea aaaea aa a ne AE acta Rita S nt 239 Wirel ss N S ttings 5 tete nent nr E A 242 Wireless Security S8ttingS 522 4 susiedetscsecedeced cede rides serons Us da nie ans strain ea en init tes aurana eds rive 243 Static Securty Seting Sasann cis dede rene red es E A sd der ele De rites rentes f e Ara Ea oa AdE TEESE aii 245 Dynamic Security Settings 247 Network Tab nl ee ee eee eee 250 me SENS she ob ann e Renan dre amie bids ae ii sn ee sig derniere en en cated 251 DHCP Server Settings 4h eaae vice aah een ERa dense es einen rene fan R eeater nets t rite teen n 253 SNMP Settings ste nn ramener nina ane et 255 OS SENGS ARR ANR RE SR RE eine A NT ENT ae 257 Specifying a QoSPrionty RUIS 2 acscceag nai ari raa a usine hen tante 260 RADIUS SO tins sain nn Annee ee tee re Rte emma er andere detre der ie see tee Rte 263 VILAN Seitings 222488 en een ee a ee viv A A a 265 Aout Tab 2 25 nn E E E See EDS este taste 268 Export and Import Button iaseccscctisscssiscccsscccsissnssscecstuescsssvextercavtcesasbesssstzcsesessosseattccuscsvvestessseedivetedecstessoecazeresanes
361. puter i Encom Stratos Welcome to the Encom Stratos Setup Wizard es x The installer will guide you through the steps required to install Encom Stratos on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Press the Next button to proceed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 18 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 Select the folder on your computer where you would like ENCOM STRATOS to be installed You can also instruct the setup wizard to install STRATOS for all users or the currently logged in user Note that in both cases you still need to have administrator privileges in order to successfully install the application i Encom Stratos Select Installation Folder The installer will install Encom Stratos to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files Encom Wireless Encom Stratos Install Encom Stratos for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer Everyone O Just me Cancel Press the Next button to proceed 4 Check the desired shortcut options Note that a shortcut will always b
362. quency to assign to the radio In most situations you want to use a frequency that has the least amount of traffic as interference from external sources will adversely affect a wireless connection s effective bandwidth The spectrum scan function uses one of the radio s wireless interface cards to scan for external wireless traffic When the spectrum scan function is started any wireless connections associated with that wireless interface are dropped If you are not directly connected to the radio using an Ethernet cable and the wireless interface you selected for the scan is the only connection between the radio and your network you will either e Temporarily lose connection to the radio when you start the scan e Permanently lose connection to the radio when it switches to a channel mode that is different from channel mode of the repeater or master radio with which it communicates Because of these scenarios ENCOM recommends that this function only be used when STRATOS is directly connected to the radio with an Ethernet cable A typical Spectrum Scan panel is shown below Radio Mesh Radio 1 Scan Channel Modes 5MHz 10MHz 20MHz C 40MHz Scanning 20 MHz Noise Floor 93 dBm 2407 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 2467 To view the wireless traffic in the vicinity of a radio 1 Make sure that the Spectrum Scan panel is visible If it is not currently visible lt In the main menu navigate to t
363. r Settings Field Name Description DHCP Address Range Specify the start and end range of the IP addresses that will be provided by the DHCP server as shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 253 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL DHCP Server Settings Field Name Network Mask Gateway Address DNS Server Address WINS Server Address DHCP Address Range 192 168 1 100 to 1192 168 1 200 In this example IP addresses in the 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 range will be assigned to devices that use dynamic addressing IP addresses outside this range would be manually assigned to devices that do not use dynamic addressing Enter the network mask that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Enter the IP Address of the default gateway that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 The default gateway is the radio or router that provides access to devices outside of the local network Enter the IP Address of the DNS server that will be assigned to the devi
364. r a point to multipoint radio when the Wireless Mode option in the Radio Settings tab is set to A Mode or G Mode Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Authentication Types C WPA Personal Pre Shared Key HIS SPACE FOR RENT WP42 Personal Pre Shared Key The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog C WPA Enterprise EAP Method EAP TLS v WP42 Enterprise TLS Mode Use Dynamic Certificates v Encryption Algorithms Unicast Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Group Ciphers C Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP AES with CBC_MAC AES CCM Miscellaneous Group Key Update Time 5 minutes 1 60 The following tables describe the dynamic security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Authentication Types WPA Personal Check this option to enable WPA personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA2 Personal Check this option to enable WPA2 personal authentication You must also enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process WPA Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre shared key WPA2 Enterprise Check this option to enable WPA2 enterprise authentication This option does not require a pre sh
365. r both of the Source Address and Destination Address fields must be set Otherwise all of the network traffic flowing through the radio would match the For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 216 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus rule The rule will only affect UDP traffic The rule will only affect TCP traffic Optionally specify the port or ports associated with the network traffic that the rule will apply to You can specify the ports using one of the following formats Format Example Single Port 1000 Multiple Ports 1000 2000 Port Range 1000 2000 Multiple Port Ranges 1000 2000 3000 4000 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all traffic of the selected protocol type Source Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets must originate from You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 IPV4 Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 200 IPV4 CIDR Subnet 192 168 1 1 24 If this value is not specified the rule will apply to all destination addresses Destination Address es Optionally specify the address or addresses that the data packets are being forwarded to You can specify the addresses using one of the following formats Format Example Single IPV4 Address 192 168 1 100 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 217 2010 2015 En
366. r proper network capacity planning If you find that your NOTE network is constantly congested you should look at partitioning the network into smaller segments adding extra radios to provide more capacity or replacing existing radios with higher capacity radios ENCOM Radios support several QoS options as shown in the following screenshot of the radio configuration form s QoS tab Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities The options are described in the following table None If you leave the Enable option unchecked no QoS features are enabled C Enable The network traffic will not be prioritized Under high load conditions all packets have the same probability of being discarded regardless of their importance This can lead to difficulties managing the radio with ENCOM STRATOS drop outs in video and audio streams and generally poor response Priority Queues If you check the Enable option priority queue based QoS features are enabled Enable C Use WMM When priority queues are enabled 8 priority queues are used to manage the network traffic Each queue is assigned a distinct priority level in the L Use DSCP priorities range of 0 to 7 where 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority Data packets flowing through the radio are assigned to the appropriate queues based on priority rules When the radio becomes heavily
367. red by STRATOS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 86 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Status Logging STRATOS allows you to log various types of communications between STRATOS and ENCOM radios This feature is useful in diagnosing issues in radios that have been installed in the field Note that logging should only be turned on when requested by ENCOM technical support personnel The logging function should be disabled as soon as it is no longer required It can create very large files and can significantly reduce the performance of STRATOS The following screen shot shows the Logging panel of the System Settings form Logging options Enable Log file folder C temp Radio filtering MAC address es 00 0C 42 F5 64 70 Interface options SSH command interface C FTP Transfers C API command interface C MAC Telnet interface The following table describes the logging settings Logging options Field Name Description Enable Check to enable logging of data sent between STRATOS and one or more radios Log file folder Enter or select the folder in which the log files will be placed The name of the log files that are created are of the form yyyymmdd hhmmss log where For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 87 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL yyyy is the year in wh
368. rks with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C1 Traffic controller TC 2773 7 C Video cameras UDP 8000 8009 5 Be 5 The Quality of Service settings allow you to prioritize the various types of network traffic so that important traffic is processed ahead of less important traffic Under normal conditions all network data packets have an equal opportunity to be forwarded by the radio This works well for some applications such as file transfers or web browsing but it is not adequate for traffic that is sensitive to network latency and throughput reductions such as voice or video streaming QoS allows you to address this issue by giving the time sensitive traffic a larger share of the network bandwidth Refer to Appendix D Quality of Service for more detailed information on the prioritization mechanisms supported by the ENCOM radios The following tables describe the Quality of Service settings Network Traffic Prioritization Field Name Enable Check this option to enable priority queue based QoS features Priority rules are used to specify the priority of specific types of traffic Lower priority traffic is dropped in preference to higher priority traffic when the radio becomes heavily loaded Use WMM Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the incoming
369. rom the pop up menu that is displayed Search Name IP Address Mac Address Change Password Ping Test Delete Del Alternatively you can either double click the left mouse button on the radio name or click the left mouse button on the radio name and select Radio gt Configure from the main menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 274 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 STRATOS will download the radio s current configuration This process will normally take a few seconds to complete During this time a wait form is displayed Please wait 14 Retrieving configuration from radio Cancel 4 When the radio s configuration has been obtained the radio configuration form is displayed E Configure Mesh Radio 1 Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Identification Radio Name Mesh Radio 1 Radio MAC Address 00 00 Description Housed in low profile case B9 16 74 14 Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set gt IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway
370. rsion 2 1 71 Page 108 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL C 3 Click the Import Upgrade File button and select the license upgrade file that you received from ENCOM when prompted Import upgrade file Look in E LicenseUpgrade NACXG DMS7L C2AID R2D7 HRRS6 4 dlsc My Recent Documents Filename Licenselpgrade NACXG DM57L C24JD R2YD7 HARS6 4 dsc 1 My Network Files of type Upgrade Files disc x 4 If the upgrade was successful a confirmation message will be displayed License Successfully Upgraded 1 Your license was successfully upgraded For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 109 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 Click the OK button to return to the License Details page ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 50 radios Serial number NACXG DM57L C2AJD R2YD7 HRRS6 4 To increase the number of radios that can be used with the ENCOM STRATOS plus advanced features please click on the Request Upgrade button and follow the instructions shown Request Upgrade Upgrade License Finish Manual Upgrade 6 Click the Close button to return to STRATOS The Radio List panel will be
371. rsion 2 1 71 Page 200 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Authentication Types Field Name EAP Method Specify the authentication protocol to use Two options are available Option Description Pass Through Authentication requests are relayed to a RADIUS server EAP TLS TLS certificates are used for authentication This option is only used by the WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise authentication types It is hidden if no enterprise option is selected TLS Mode Specify how TLS certificates are to be used Two options are available option Description Use Dynamic TLS certificates are negotiated dynamically using Certificates anonymous Diffie Hellman MODP 2048 bit algorithm Use Imported A TLS certificate that has been imported into the Certificates radio is used This option is only used when the EAP Method is set to EAP TLS It is hidden if the EAP TLS option is not selected For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 201 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Encryption Algorithms Field Name Description Unicast Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames sent to individual radios Two options are available Option Description Temporal Key Integrity Protocol An encryption protocol that is compatible with legacy WEP equipment but enhanced to correct some WEP flaws This option s
372. ry RADIUS Server Backup RADIUS Server Address The IP address of the RADIUS server against which the radio is authenticating The number of authentication requests made by the radio to the RADIUS server For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 49 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Accepts The number of authentication requests that were accepted by the RADIUS server Rejects The number of authentication requests that were rejected by the RADIUS server This normally means that users tried to log in using invalid credentials user name or password Resends The number of times that the radio had to resubmit authentication requests Alarge quantity of resends typically means that the RADIUS Timeout setting in the radio configuration form is too low and needs to be increased Timeouts The number of times that authentication requests timed out waiting for the RADIUS server to respond This usually indicates that the RADIUS server could not be reached e g the server may not be working it may be blocked by a firewall the RADIUS Server Address setting in the radio configuration form is incorrect Bad Replies This normally indicates that the RADIUS Shared Secret setting in the radio configuration form is incorrect Reset Button Click the Reset button to clear all of the RADIUS monitor statistics Click the Close button to hide the RADIUS Monitor form The RADIUS Mon
373. s Any incoming network traffic that matches the specified VLAN IDs will be dropped by the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 384 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL About Tab The following screen shot shows the About tab for a point to multipoint radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Hardware Info Model CommpakBB 58N3 PTMP Platform e500v2 Architecture powerpc Firmware Info Version 15 9 License ID SWR5 TJ36 Upgradable to V7 x This tab displays information regarding the radio s hardware and firmware It does not contain any user editable fields For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 385 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Export and Import Buttons The Export and Import buttons in the lower left hand corner of the radio configuration form allow you to save the radio s configuration settings to a file and to update the radio s configuration settings from a previously saved configuration file Refer to the following topics for more information on these functions e Exporting the Radio Configuration e Importing the Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 386 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Exporting the Radio Configuration The Export f
374. s Version 2 1 71 Page 328 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL To set a new location e Press and hold down the Shift key on your computer s keyboard e Click the left mouse button at the location you want to assign to the radio e The green marker will move to the selected position Note Refer to the Map Panel topic for more information on the embedded map features Street Address Enter the street address of the radio if applicable This information is optional For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 329 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Tab ENCOM mesh radios contain at least one and as many as four wireless radio modules Each wireless radio module is configured in its own tab The first radio module is configured in the Radio 1 tab the second radio is configured in the Radio 2 tab and so on The following screen shot shows the radio settings tab for a point to multipoint radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 3 1N Wireless MAC Address 100 15 6D 84 F5 8B Radio Network Setup Network Type NO nly M Network SSID ENCOMS8N Hide SSID Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 40 MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 58 GHz
375. s displayed Search N ame IP Address MAC Address ba Default mit Change Password Ping Test Delete Del Alternatively you can either double click the left mouse button on the radio name or click the left mouse button on the radio name and select Radio gt Configure from the main menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 322 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 STRATOS will download the radio s current configuration This process will normally take a few seconds to complete During this time a wait form is displayed Please wait 14 Retrieving configuration from radio Cancel 4 When the radio s configuration has been obtained the radio configuration form is displayed E Configure Point to Multipoint Master Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Identification Radio Name Point to Multipoint Master Radio MAC Address 00 0C 42 72 65 F2 Description Housed in low profile case Regulatory Domain Country Name lt Not Set gt IP Address Settings You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you will need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 250 Specify a static IP address recommended Network Mask 255 255 255 0
376. s most often used when configuring a replacement radio or you want to restore the radio s configuration from a backup Copy common Use this option to exclude those settings that are unique to the settings radio This option is most often used when you are adding a new radio to a network and you want to configure it to match the other radios in the network The following items will not get copied over from the profile file to the radio e Radio name e Radio Description e Radio latitude longitude and street address e Radio static IP address e Disallowed MAC addresses 6 Press the OK button to apply the profile settings to the radio 7 Make any changes to the imported settings in the radio configuration form 8 Press the Save button on the radio configuration form to save the settings to the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 321 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Configuring Point to Multipoint Radios To configure a point to multipoint radio 1 Locate the radio you would like to configure in the Radio List Ensure that it is currently on line a green icon is displayed at the left of an on line radio Search Name IPAddress MAC Address _ gg Default i Point to Multipoint Master Point to Multipoint Remote 2 Click the right mouse button on the radio name and select Configure from the pop up menu that i
377. s option is most often used when configuring a replacement radio or you want to restore the radio s configuration from a backup Copy common Use this option to exclude those settings that are unique to the settings radio This option is most often used when you are adding a new radio to a network and you want to configure it to match the other radios in the network The following items will not get copied over from the profile file to the radio e Radio name e Radio Description e Radio latitude longitude and street address e Radio static IP address e Parent radio MAC address e Static WDS assignments 6 Press the OK button to apply the profile settings to the radio 7 Make any changes to the imported settings in the radio configuration form 8 Press the Save button on the radio configuration form to save the settings to the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 229 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Configuring Point to Point Radios To configure a point to point radio 1 Locate the radio you would like to configure in the Radio List Ensure that it is currently on line a green icon is displayed at the left of an on line radio Search N ane IP Address Mac Address H 3 Default H 3 Mesh Network 5 Point to Point Network CA Point to Point Radio 1 i Point to Point Radio 2 2 Click the right mouse button
378. s will fail and the radio will not be added to the radio list Delete Select Delete from the Radio menu to remove the selected radio from the radio list This function can be used to remove radios that are no longer active Note If you remove an active radio from the list STRATOS will add it back when it receives a heartbeat message from the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 54 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Assign Static IP Address Select Assign Static IP Address from the Radio menu to change the radio s IP address This function is used to change the IP address of a radio when its IP address is incompatible with the network on which STRATOS is running Acommon use for this function is to change the IP address of a radio that you have just received from ENCOM A new radio will be configured with a default IP address usually 192 168 0 250 If your local network is not compatible with the radio s default IP address the radio may be discovered by STRATOS but it will not be possible for STRATOS to communicate with it You have to change the default address to an address that is compatible with your local network in order to be able to communicate with the radio Note This function should not be used when STRATOS can communicate with the radio In this case use the Configure function to change the radio s IP address To assign a static IP Address to
379. scribes these in more detail e Dynamic Security Options For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 355 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Dynamic Security Settings N Mode The following screen shot shows the dynamic security options for a point to multipoint radio when the Wireless Mode option in the Radio Settings tab is set to N Mode Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication Wireless N Security Pre Shared Key My pre shared key The following table describes the dynamic security options found in the Wireless Security Settings tab Wireless N Security Types Pre Shared Key Enter a pre shared key used for the authentication process For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 356 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Wireless Security Settings A and B G Modes The following screen shot shows the wireless security settings tab for a point to multipoint radio when the Wireless Mode option in the Radio Settings tab is set to A Mode or G Mode Radio Settings WDS Setup Wireless N Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication The Wireless Security Type group allows you to specify the security protocols used to protect the wireless
380. se 1 Enter the serial number you received from ENCOM Wireless H H H H 2 Click the Activate License button to activate your license If the attempt fails you will be prompted to perform a manual activation For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 95 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 Enter the serial number you received from ENCOM in the serial number field Alternatively you can copy and paste the serial number from your email to the serial number field 1 Enter the serial number you received from ENCOM Wireless INACXG Homsz Hcp R2v07 HRRS6 H4 Paste 4 Click on the Activate License button to activate your license STRATOS will attempt to contact the ENCOM licensing server to perform the activation Please wait M Attempting to activate your license 5 If the activation was successful a confirmation message will be displayed License Successfully Activated l Your license was successfully activated For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 96 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 6 Click the OK button to return to the License Details page ENCOM STRATOS plus Licensing License Details ENCOM STRATOS plus is licensed on this computer as follows Company name My Company Customer name My Name E mail address me mycompany com License details Support for 20 radios
381. se sensitive and may contain spaces Note You should change the default SSID assigned at the factory to a unique SSID for your network You can minimize interference between adjacent networks by assigning a unique SSID for each network Important All radios that participate in the same network must be assigned the same Network SSID Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the Network SSID from being broadcast by the wireless radio This prevents external devices from being able to discover the network s SSID and potentially connect to it Radio Mode Mesh radios are always considered to be master radios This setting is for your information only and cannot be changed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 284 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus RELESS USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Feld Name Channel Mode This option allows you to set the width of the frequency channel you are using Selecting a smaller frequency for the Channel Mode increases the distance over which you can establish a wireless link at the cost of reduced bandwidth For most applications 40 MHz is acceptable Radio Parameter Setup Feld Name Frequency Band Displays the nominal frequency at which the radio operates This option can be changed if the radio card supports more than one band Channel Select the radio s operating frequency Note All of the radios in the network must be set to the same frequency
382. serves as the networks synchronization source Each broadband network has only one master radio All the other radios must be configured as either remote or repeater radios If the network contains a repeater radio check the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled and only when running in A Mode or G Mode Network Type Network SSID Radio Mode Channel Mode For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 x x Page 336 v Using Repeater 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 72 encom Repeater Radio Setup N Cards Select the Repeater option for a radio that provides a link between the master and remote radios Note that a repeater is only available when running in A Mode or G Mode When this option is selected the Using Repeater option is automatically checked and the Enable eMax Protocol option is unchecked the eMax protocol cannot be used when there is a repeater in the network Network Type 4 Only Network SSID ENCOMS58N Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v Channel Mode 20 MHz v By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the repeater radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master radio Network Type 4 Only v Network SSID ENCOMS58N Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v Channel Mode 20 MHz v If you encounter connectivity issues between the repeater and
383. settings are applied Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Radiol 5 8 GHz1SM Band The Target Radio Modules column lists the wireless radio modules that are present on the radio The Profile Radio Modules column shows the options that are available for each wireless interface that is present on the radio STRATOS will find the best match between the profile and target radio modules and will assign these by default You can change the default assignments by selecting the appropriate items from the list boxes In the example shown above STRATOS applied the matching radio modules from the profile to the target radio modules If you didn t want to disturb the configuration of the wireless radio module then you would select the Don t Copy option from the list box as shown below Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Dont Copy v Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 272 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 5 The Settings to Copy options allow you to specify what settings to import from the configuration profile Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network These are described further in the following table Option Deseription o Copy all settings Use this option when you need to configure a
384. shown in the map i en 49 Single B CommpakBB 58 Single Mesh Network Mesh Radio 1 Mesh Radio 2 Mesh Radio 3 Point to Point Network L Point to Point Radio 1 i Point to Point Radio 2 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 129 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL In the following example the Default and Point to Point Network folders are unchecked Only the icons for the radios in the Mesh Network folder are shown in the map 2 Server And Cache M 2 Hidden Hamptons Royal Oak Te w Valley a eZ i CommpakBB 49 Single ye Per a H 4 CommpakBB 58 Single Z Mesh Network Ty E Mesh Radio 1 4 7 TES Mesh Radio 2 i Mesh Radio 3 C a Point to Point Network Point to Point Radio 1 i Point to Point Radio 2 For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 130 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio List Context Menu To display the radio list context menu click the right mouse button anywhere inside of the radio tree view Depending on where you click the appropriate menu will be displayed Add to Ping Test Rename F2 If you click on a folder the following Add Folder context menu is displayed Add Radio Find Radios Delete Del Configure Change Password If you
385. shown in the panel will be lost If you want to keep a history of the alerts generated by STRATOS you should define a recipient and set up a connection to an e mail server You can then keep records of the alerts using your email client For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 112 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Sorting the Alerts List You can sort the Alerts list by clicking the left mouse button on any of the table headers When you click on one of the headers an arrow is displayed that indicates the direction of the sort Radio MAC Address IP Address McKnight Remote O0 00 42 60 A5 37 192 168 128 52 Nose_Hill Master 00 0C 42 ED CB 67 192 168 96 40 Mesh 13 00 00 89 12 03 20 192 168 128 13 Mesh 11 00 0D B9 16 77 F8 192 168 128 11 Click once to sort in ascending order and click again to sort in descending order Alerts Panel Context Menu To display the Alerts Panel context menu click the right mouse button anywhere on the Alerts Panel panel The following context menu is displayed Select Radio Remove Selected Alerts Del Remove All Alerts The following table describes the commands available in the context menu Select Radio Selects the radio that is associated with the selected alert This option is grayed out if an alert is not currently selected or if more than one alert is currently selected Alternatively you can double
386. sirei dan nan stecactts aaa Eaa EAA aai AAA terne din ie 156 BandWwiTeS Panel idae aana aA ERAS AESi ARa fa SAA AN EANA adan at AE AE AaS aAA A F AIEA 157 Network Traffic Pamel tects sccses sens cnrs a a E ar E meer E N 161 Png testpanel sree e aeae E a A A Aana a eaaa lente en este re aTa E dre sde nn EERE 162 Carrying Out a Ang TeStisscsssscesciiavsitecadcisasiadeadeceasacssusssvsinsdaseatonsassdvaasasaiediissnssneeadeiavusassviitaaesiaviiaediedeccids 164 SOMUMGMMNE FING TestliS tyre ee aani E apa eaha aaa eA aa eme ete dt trs tiers Res den 165 Ping Test Context Menu FE Tasks PARLES reines ed es ee ia a ie EEA E nase Task List Context Menu SEC IEUN SCAN PANNE hist RE atean e fade dede a anaa Aea Rire Rte titi este ae nel ane T rminal Panel ses anmmnnineernnrnnereneraninieeinennnnemeranaininnsernennnininetenninarene Terminal Toolbar Configuring Broadband Radios Basic Settings Tab nn tecvecevesaapshesscvecesvceassuadcuusdeevssiveagunevocsechaudescbsdudaceveasevseciaveed cvasesvaaucessereeaeaee 177 Location Tab 22 5525255ss0680522scnescreneiehenss sans ceed sansineer nrenn arende mnt esnperanssnp ane TAES Dr ennemi Sra riai nent ane sensen saisai 180 FRAGIO A EE TR E O 183 FRAGIO SEINS ians creer ntssit estes covstwdvedevceyeuaeagaas dcsuaseevevercivcdveseiessdtased ines der ner niet datent de en 184 Master Radio S tUpi ssnte nine ten en mn eens esa nade eevee intense lentes 188 Repeater Radio Setup 189 Remote Radi
387. specific types of traffic Lower priority traffic is dropped in preference to higher priority traffic when the radio becomes heavily loaded Use WMM Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the incoming WMM priority or to the incoming VLAN priority if VLANs are being used WMM is used to prioritize certain type of traffic such as VOIP Voice Over IP and video streams that are sensitive to network latency and capacity For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 257 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL issues Note The WMMVLAN priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Use DSCP Priorities Check this option to set the priority of incoming packets to the DSCP priority of the incoming data packets Note The DSCP priorities must be set by the device that creates the network data packets or by the router or switch that provides access to the ENCOM radio network Priority Rules Field Name Description Priority Rule List By default ENCOM STRATOS will assign the highest priority to the radio management traffic Other types of network traffic can be assigned to specific priority queues by creating custom priority rules The Priority Rules list displays the custom priority rules that you have defined When defining a priority rule you specify the type
388. ss Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Parameter Setup Field Name panel to determine the channel that has the least amount of activity in the vicinity of the radio If a repeater is present in the network both the master and repeater radios must be set to the same specific frequency Remote radios are always configured to run in Auto Frequency mode They will automatically adjust their operating frequencies to match the master s Wireless Link Rate Select the rates at which the radio will communicate with the other radios in the network The default setting for this option is Adaptive The Adaptive link rate automatically adjusts the radio s data rate to account for the current network conditions It typically provides the most reliable network performance A fixed rate helps reduce data latency and may be used if the performance of the link is more important than the reliability If you select a fixed rate a second drop down list box is displayed as shown in the following example Min 6 Mbps vy Max 24 Mbps v Select the minimum allowed bit rate from the left hand list and the maximum allowed rate from the right hand list Regardless of the range you specify the 6 Mbps rate will always be included in the list of allowable rates This allows the radio to fall back to the lowest bit rate if it is not able to maintain the higher bit rates Output Power Select the wirele
389. ss Data Solutions Inc enco ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Item Properties Panel The tem Properties panel displays a list of useful information associated with the selected folder or radio Point to Point Network CommpakBB 58 Mesh Identification Identification Name Point to Point Network CommpakBB 58 Mesh Description Folder Description Model CommpakBB 58 Mesh Firmware Version 3 30 License ID BYF6 594 05 21 54 Number of radios In current folder In sub folders Offline radios Latitude 0 00000 Longitude 0 00000 Street Address Number of radios IP Address 192 168 1 143 Number of radios in this folder and in its subfolders MAC Address 00 0D B9 16 82 B0 5 Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band MAC Address 00 15 6D 44 42 43 Folder Properties Network SSID EncomMesh Radio Mode Master Channel Mode 40 MHz Channel 5210 MHz Wireless Security Disabled Name Name used to identify the radio Radio Properties The panel is divided into two sections e The top section contains the list of properties and their current values e The bottom section contains a more detailed description of the currently selected property To select a property simply click the left mouse button on the property name or value in the top section The example at the left shows the properties listed for a folder that is selected in the Radio List panel The bottom section contains the description of the Number of Radios property that
390. ss radio s output power Unless constrained by the Regulatory Domain that the radio is operating in you should use the Maximum power setting when the radio is deployed in the field If the radio is being provisioned or tested in a bench environment you should use the Lowpower setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 187 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master Radio Setup Select the Master option for the radio that is located closest to the network operations center This radio is usually connected to the network via the Ethernet port The master radio controls the flow of data in the network and serves as the network s synchronization source Each broadband network has only one master radio All the other radios must be configured as either remote or repeater radios If the network contains a repeater radio check the Using Repeater option note that this option is only available when the eMax Protocol is disabled Network Type Network SSID ENCOM24 4 Hide SSID Radio Mode Master v C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40 MHz i For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 188 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repeater Radio Setup Select the Repeater option for a radio that provides a link between the master and remote radios When this option is selected the Using Repeater option is automaticall
391. ssaudncesaibdetustsevacnbaddena 126 Adding Radios to a Ping Test 128 Show ing and Hiding Radios on the Map iii 129 Radio ist Context Menu 2m a a a ESA Aaaa Eea e t anne in een 131 Map View Panel ciones aare n xsadetn dsennccducnecdaasacke cata Secneesvsaacucetadesdenddncesnisdensendevactiassacs 132 Map Toolbar piisas araa Aa hka a Er Eare raai ARRESE E ea EA Ea EATA REA SEa ETES Reia 133 Map Display sassi ercon EE ER RAEO ARE aE 137 Map Popup Helper aaiae iaa aE ANERE LEE AEAEE E aR KEEA Eiaa 138 Panning and ZOOMING EPEA AEE EET A E A eons da 138 Selecting a Radio Map Context Menu Setting the Location Of a Radio sise 141 Moving a Radio On the Map cc ciaciscsccesseciessecccssenscesedsaicucsvesadanvesiecsensd counsnedaccnesdeaes2s AR a Ainaa Ea aniihi aiai 142 kem Properties Panel asordenat inaina a Ea Anaa E Aaa E aAA EAEEREN AAEE EA EA ASA AES SEARE AEA Eia 143 Wireless Link Status Panel 144 Wireless Link Status TOO Darana aana E a ennemie rie 145 Wireless Link Status Table si srerctese eibi Lea cancsnusszcsus ev ssnaccsaedasst E AEE SataNa R aa PAEA AEAEE E ESES 148 Wireless Link Status Bars st nent rea aaa a i aa a a eee 152 Wireless ink RSSIGOIONS ssie sssren eirean sadnite an E Aa a NEA Aaaa Radea NAANA RE EaR 153 Wireless Link GCQ Colors irsin ch chien dace aaa Eea AAA ange cendres rade detente en eneesaeeeee 155 Sorting the Wireless Link Status List ss 156 Wireless Link Context Men zi
392. st be blocked Otherwise video traffic forwarded by the other master radio would in turn be forwarded to the master radio s downstream radios In the example we do not want the video traffic from Master B radio being forwarded to the Master A radio and its downstream radios e Ethernet Backbone Network Operation Master Master Center Workstation ABAD Must block incoming Ethernet traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 475 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus e Multicast traffic entering one of the master radio s wireless interfaces must not be forwarded to the radio s other wireless interfaces This prevents the traffic from one downstream radio from being forwarded to another downstream radio e TT O S Ethernet Backbone Network Operation a Center Workstation A r rp A Must soe ores s f pig N gt NS to wireless traffic ji Repeater Remote t M A1 2 Blocking the wireless to wireless traffic will block multicast traffic between physical radio cards the WDS links that form between the master radio and its downstream radios and the wireless connections that form between wireless client devices such as laptops or wireless cameras and the radios In the case where the master radio contains a single radio card but has wireless connections to two remote radios blocking wireless to wireless traffic will prevent multicast tra
393. stances Radio Parameter Setup Field Name Frequency Band Displays the nominal frequency at which the radio operates This option is set at the factory and cannot be changed Channel Select the radio s operating frequency Note You can set the frequency of the master radio to a specific value For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 240 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CR encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL Radio Parameter Setup Feld Name Remote radios can only be set to Auto Frequency since they are designed to follow the frequency of the master radio Wireless Link Rate Point to point radios use an adaptive algorithm to choose the best bit rate for the current link conditions This setting is for your information only and cannot be changed Output Power Select the wireless radio s output power Unless constrained by the Regulatory Domain that the radio is operating in you should use the Maximum power setting when the radio is deployed in the field If the radio is being provisioned or tested in a bench environment you should use the Lowpower setting For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 241 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Wireless N Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless N settings tab for a point to point radio Radio Settings Wireless N Wireless Security Antenna Chains Trans
394. ster i D4 CA 6D 69 D8 CB Remote See the Recovering from an IP Address Conflict topic for information on addressing the issue Postpone for Select the amount of time to wait before the P Address Conflict form is re displayed if the address conflict has not been resolved OK button Press the OK button to postpone the re display of the P Address Conflict form if the address conflict has not been resolved Cancel button Press the Cancel button to close the P Address Conflict form The form will be re displayed at the next IP Address Check interval if the address conflict is not resolved For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 69 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus lf radios are assigned the same IP address STRATOS will have great difficulty interacting with them Anything that communicates with the radio via its IP address including the radio configuration form will not work reliably Because of this you will need to change the IP address of the radios so that they are no longer in conflict One or more of the following procedures can be used to do this 1 If there is no router between the computer running STRATOS and the radios use the Assign Static IP Address function to change the IP address of one or more or the radios that are in conflict 2 If you cannot use the Assign Static IP Address function a Power off all but one of the radios that are in conflict b
395. still able to communicate Ethernet Backbone Failed Radio Pe 4 S Restored J Connection For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 408 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Selecting the STP Preferred Root When STP or RSTP is enabled the radios will decide amongst themselves which radio is the STP root radio The STP root radio is the radio toward which all other radios will send their network traffic In some cases the radios may not make an optimal decision and may lead to a network that is not operating at peak efficiency The Preferred Root option allows you to force the network to elect a specific radio as the STP root radio You would normally use the following two criteria to determine if a radio should be configured as an STP preferred root e The radio is physically connected to the network operation center s Ethernet backbone e The radio is physically located at the center of a large radio network In the first case it is logical that a radio connected to the Ethernet backbone i e a gateway radio be used as the STP root radio Most of the network traffic will flow through this radio as commands and controls are sent from the network operations center to the radios and data is sent from the radios to the network operations center Making this radio the STP root will force the radios in the network to choose the shortest possible path to the network op
396. successful and STRATOS is able to communicate with the radio the task item will indicate that the radio is available Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At MeshRadio1 Assigning static IP address 192 168 0 250 Done 100 Radio available 912 54 20PM 12 54 50 PM 9 If the task was not successful make sure that you are assigning a compatible IP address Also make sure that any routers or firewalls that are between the radio and STRATOS are configured properly see the Network Setup topic for more details For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 56 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Restore to Factory Defaults Select Restore to Factory Defaults from the Radio menu to return the radio to its initial from the factory state This function is useful if a radio has been misconfigured and is no longer working properly This function will restore it to a basic operating state To restore a radio to its factory default configuration 1 Select the radio you want to restore from the Radio List panel 2 Select Restore to Factory Defaults from the Radio menu 3 STRATOS will download the radio s current configuration This process will normally take a few seconds to complete During this time a wait form is displayed Please wait 14 Retrieving configuration from radio Cancel 4 When the radio s configuration has been obtained the radi
397. successively closer to the TMC For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 533 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Securing the Network This section describes the procedures required to secure your network The most important changes to make are to e Configure the radios to use the WPA2 Personal wireless encryption scheme e Assign a secure administrative password to the radios For a more detailed description of the security options refer to the General Security Considerations topic Configuring WPA2 Wireless Encryption Radios should be configured to use the WPA2 encryption scheme using the update order discussed in the Prerequisites topic You should always start with the radios farthest from the Traffic Management Center TMC followed by the radios that are successively closer to the TMC To secure the wireless links 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your radio network 2 Select the radio you want to secure a Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio b In the Configure form that is displayed i Select the Radio 1 tab ii Select the Wireless Security sub tab iii Select the Dynamic security option iv Make sure that the WPA2 Personal option is checked v Make sure that the WPA Personal WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise options remain unchecked vi Enter a strong password in the Pre Shared Key field
398. sword are not encrypted Digest MD5 DIGEST MD5 authentication is used CRAM MD5 CRAMMD5 authentication is used iain LOGIN authentication is used the user name and g password are not encrypted NTLM Authentication used by Microsoft servers GSSAPI Kerberos based authentication User Name Enter the user name used to log into the SMTP server This is often the user name of an account created on the mail server specifically for STRATOS Password Enter the password used to log into the SMTP server From Address Enter the e mail address that will be used to identify the source of the e mail This is often the e mail address of an account created on the mail server specifically for STRATOS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 79 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Networking Proxy Server The Map View panel requires an Internet connection to access the map tiles from the various map service providers If the computer on which STRATOS is running is directly connected to the Internet there is usually no problem in accessing the tiles If a proxy server is being used and your computer is properly configured STRATOS can normally make use of the system proxy settings to access the tiles via the proxy server In some cases STRATOS may not be able to use your computer s proxy settings and will not be able to access the Internet In such cases you may need to configure
399. t 802 11 compliant devices you should choose the 20 MHz channel mode 802 11 Client Check this option if the radio needs to connect to a non Encom WiFi network Enable eMax Protocol Check this option to enable the eMax protocol The eMax protocol is a proprietary protocol that increases bandwidth and security on the wireless network Note Due to compatibility issues the eMax protocol cannot be used if there is a repeater in the network or if 802 11 clients need to be supported by the radio Using Repeater Check this option if there is a repeater in the network Enable Roaming Refer to the Radio Mode topics see links above for information on this option Parent Radio MAC Refer to the Radio Mode topics see links above or information on this Address option Radio Parameter a Field Name Description ss s sY Frequency Band Displays the nominal frequency at which the radio operates This option can be changed if the radio card supports more than one band Channel Select the radio s operating frequency In Auto Frequency mode a master radio automatically searches for the frequency that has the least activity It then selects that frequency and uses it to communicate with the repeater or remote radios For the most stable link you should select a specific frequency from the list of available frequencies You can use the STRATOS Spectrum Scan For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 186 2010 2015 Encom Wirele
400. t by the wireless radio This prevents external devices from being able to discover the network s SSID and potentially connect to it Radio Mode Select the radio mode based on the location of the radio with respect to the network operations center Refer to the following topics for more information on radio mode options that are available e Master Radio Setup e Repeater Radio Setup e Remote Radio Setup Allow Clients Check this option to allow external 802 11 compliant devices such as laptops WiFi cameras etc to connect to the radio Note This option is not compatible with the eMax protocol If checked the eMax protocol is automatically disabled Note Since most 802 11 compliant devices only support 20 MHz channels you should set the Channel Mode option to 20 MHz when you select this option Note This option is only available for Master and Repeater radios Remote radios do not support client devices For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 185 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Feld Name Channel Mode This option allows you to set the width of the frequency channel you are using Selecting a smaller frequency for the Channel Mode increases the distance over which you can establish a wireless link at the cost of reduced bandwidth For most applications a 40 MHz channel mode is acceptable Note If you check the Allow Clients option to suppor
401. t contain a GPS receiver Manually specify Select this option if you want to manually specify the location of the radio location Latitude Enter the latitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the northern hemisphere and negative in the southern hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Latitude field Longitude Enter the longitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the eastern hemisphere and negative in the western hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 279 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 7 WIRELESS USER MANUAL the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Longitude field Icon Color Select the color of the radio icon You can use the icon color to visually group radios by radio type geographical location VLAN association etc Icon Style Select the style of the radio icon Four icon styles are currently available Radio Type Master radio Repeater radio Dual radio Embedded map The embedded map allows you to see the current location of the radio A green marker shows the location assigned to the radio Google Map y i i Industrial Par
402. t devices can only detect networks that are using 20 MHz or 40 MHz channel modes For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 484 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Channel Enable eMax Protocol Enable Roaming For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL If you do not need to support client devices and your network does not need to handle a high amount of network traffic you can set the channel mode to 5 MHz or 10 MHz This will prevent casual discovery of your network If using a 5 8 GHz radio and you do not need to support client devices set the channel to a frequency that is not supported by client devices This will prevent unauthorized devices from being able to detect your network The following is a list of the 5 8 GHz band frequencies that are normally supported by client devices in North America e 5180 MHz e 5200 MHz e 5220 MHz e 5240 MHz e 5745 MHz e 5765 MHz e 5785 MHz e 5805 MHz e 5825 MHz If using a 2 4 GHz radio all of the available frequencies are supported by client devices If using a 4 9 GHz radio none of the available frequencies are supported by regular client devices specialized 4 9 GHz client devices do exist eMax is a proprietary protocol that increases the bandwidth of the wireless links Since the protocol is not compatible with standard client devices these devices will not be able to connect to a network that is using the eMa
403. t dynamic WDS links to static links The links will be transferred from the Dynamic WDS Links list to the Static WDS Links list To convert dynamic WDS links to static WDS links 1 Select one or more links in the Dynamic WDS Links table To select a link check the associated check box In the following example the first WDS link is selected MAC Address IP Address Radio Name 00 00 B9 17 91 04 192 168 1 81 CommpakBB 58 58 Dual C 00 00 89 17 91 4C 192 168 1 35 CompakBB 58 Single 2 Click on the Move button to convert the selected dynamic links to static links This list contains the list of WDS links that are allowed to form Click on the Add button to manually add the MAC address of a remote radio to the static WDS list When selected the following form is displayed Add MAC Address Add the following MAC address to the Static WDS Links MAC address 00 01 1C ED 8D 53 Specify the MAC address of the radio you want to allow and press the OK button The new MAC address will be added to the Static WDS Links list Note ff you add the MAC address of a radio that is not known to ENCOM STRATOS only the MAC address will be displayed in the disallowed list If the radio is known to STRATOS the associated IP Address and radio name will be included Both scenarios are shown in the following example For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 194 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM
404. t email to the recipient using the SMTP server specified in the Mail Server panel The Test button is disabled if the mail server is not enabled Click the Submit button to accept a new recipient or changes made to an existing recipient Click the Cancel button if you do not want to add or change a recipient For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 85 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Miscellaneous Database USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the Database panel of the System Settings form Radio Database Automatically save radio information to the database The following table describes the individual database settings Radio Database Field Name Automatically save radio information to the database Description When checked ENCOM STRATOS will automatically save all of the radio information that it has collected to a database When STRATOS is shut down and subsequently run it will use this stored information to populate the Radio List panel Map View panel and other user interface elements It will also allow you to view the last known configuration of radios that are off line If this option is not checked no radio data is saved If STRATOS is shut down and subsequently run the radio list will be empty Disabling this option is useful in factory and bench provisioning settings where it is not desirable to retain the list of radios that have been configu
405. t need to add any rules for this traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 425 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Repeater Radio Configuration The repeater radios radios 2 and 3 in the diagram would be configured as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Prioritization QoS and WMM options Priority Rules Name en dress es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP When WMM is enabled the repeater radios will automatically prioritize the packets received on their wireless interfaces There is no reason to specify the custom traffic rules For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 426 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Using WMM to Improve Video Traffic The following diagram shows a slightly more complex ENCOM broadband network In this scenario the radio network carries video and traffic controller data as well as client device data in this case from laptops used by field personnel Ethernet Backbone S im a Repeater Ly p 1 i Client Device O Unmanagec Switch Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Cameras Controller Cameras
406. t the video traffic was less important than timely access to the radios and to the traffic controllers Because VLANs are already being used to segregate the various types of network traffic they can also be used to prioritize the traffic To do this the VLAN enabled switches A B and C in the diagram would be configured to give the appropriate priorities to the camera and controller traffic Network Traffic Type VLAN Priority Traffic Controller 7 highest priority Traffic Cameras 5 high priority The WMM prioritization mechanism would be used to prioritize the network traffic over the wireless links to ensure that the high priority traffic controller packets are sent at the expense of the lower priority camera traffic Each of the 5 radios in the network would be configured as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol C Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Prioritization QoS and WMM options Priority Rules Name Protocol Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP x For more information on the VLAN capabilities of ENCOM radios refer to Appendix E VLAN Support Because WMM is not compatible with the eMax protocol you must disable eMax in the wireless radio cards and lose the throughput enhancements available w
407. t use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example DNS Server Address 1 92 168 1 2 If there is no DNS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field Enter the IP Address of the WINS server that will be assigned to the devices that use dynamic IP addressing This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example WINS Server Address 192 1 68 1 3 If there is no WINS server available in your network enter 0 0 0 0 in this field For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 301 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL SNMP Settings The following screen shot shows the SNMP tab for a mesh radio Time DHCP Server SNMP Encom Mesh Protocol Qos RADIUS VLAN SNMP Service SNMP is an application layer protocol The management station makes a request and the managed device SNMP agent replies to this request In SNMP version 1 there are three main actions Get Set and Trap Commpak Broadband radios only support the Get action Because of this the SNMP service can only be used for network monitoring purposes Enable SNMP Service SNMP Service Settings Host IP 192 168 1 50 Read only community name public Contact information Michael Smith Location
408. tabase file Please select a valid map tile database file and try again For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 39 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 4 f you selected a valid map tile database file the Task List panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden 5 Anew task will be added to the task list It will show the progress of the import function Radio Name Task Phase Progress Final Status Started At Finished At lt Not Applicable gt Importing Map Tiles Copying database file 10 12 18 37 PM 6 If the import is successful the computer s map tile database will have been updated The task item will indicate that the map tiles have been successfully imported Radio Name Task Progress Final Status Started At Finished At lt Not Applicable gt Importing Map Tiles 100 12 18 37 PM 12 18 38 PM Starting with ENCOM STRATOS V1 4 0 map tile databases are identified with the gmdb file extension Previous versions of STRATOS used the s3db file extension The s3db map tile databases are no longer compatible with ENCOM STRATOS and attempts to import these files will fail For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 40 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Export gt Radio List Select Export gt Radio List from the File menu to save the current radio information to a database file The following infor
409. te 1 om Ed iL The green arrows highlight the directions in which the video traffic can flow By default the video traffic will flow unimpeded from any radio to any radio Due to the bridging architecture used by the Encom radio network the video traffic generated by each camera is automatically forwarded to all of the radios in the network This can lead to significant network congestion if a large number of cameras are present in the network For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 472 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For example consider the video collected by the camera attached to the Remote A2 radio To reach the network operation center workstations the video traffic needs to pass through the Repeater A1 and Master A radios There is no need for the video to be forwarded to any other radio in the network The path required by the video is highlighted in green in the following diagram Ethernet Backbone Master Master om ee N S N S NX da Remote Remote Remote A1 B1 B2 emote r 7 a By applying the appropriate multicast network filters you can prevent the video from being forwarded to radios that do not require it The following topics describe how to configure the radios to prevent unnecessary video traffic in the network e Master Radio Configuration e Repeater Radio Configura
410. ted to the new STP root radio to ensure that all functioning radios can still access the network operations center Ethemet Backbone STP Preferred n Root lt e u Packet Fiw Direction STP Preferred Root fa gt 4 a x For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 411 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL STP RSTP Network Considerations STP and RSTP work best when the network contains a limited number of radios The larger the network the longer it will take for it to stabilize and the less stable it will be The following guidelines should be followed in order to deploy a trouble free network e Keep the number of radios in the network below 25 If you need to deploy more radios you should create several smaller networks that are isolated by routers Ensure that radios in different networks cannot form WDS connections to each other e g by physically separating the radios and using directional antennas e Ensure that there is a maximum of 7 connections separating any two radios in the network The following example shows a large network that has been divided into 3 separate segments In this example each segment is connected to the Ethernet backbone via a router The router prevents STP control traffic in one segment from interfering with the other segments Depending on the capabilities of your router it would be possible to use a single router a
411. ter 00 15 6D 85 52 03 192 168 96 40 60 0 60 0 70 62 44 49 00 05 24 Radio 2 McKnight Remote 00 15 60 85 24 59 192 168 12852 130 195 89 82 15 24 00 05 29 Radio 2 Tuxedo Remote 00 15 6D 85 12 EE 192 168 128 51 600 600 58 50 49 49 00 05 29 i gt The following table describes the information that is displayed for each wireless connection Status Displays the status of the wireless connection based on the connection s current signal strength reading The color of the status indicator matches the color displayed in the signal strength RSSI graph The colors can be changed in the RSSI Threshold panel of the System Settings graph Indicates the wireless link that the On Radio Alignment tool is currently monitoring Under normal circumstances the first link on the first wireless interface Radio 1 is automatically selected for monitoring This link is identified by the Default indication in the Align column Status Align Interface Radio Name BE default DRadiol Nose Hill Master Er Radio 2 Tuxedo Remote Ba Radio 2 McKnight Remote If you send a command instructing the radio to monitor a specific link using the Enable for 30 minutes button in the Wireless Link Status toolbar the Align column will show a countdown timer on the link for which the alignment tool is active Status Align Interface Radio Name fy Radio 1 Nose Hill Master Radio 2 McKnight Remote Den En Gmtet DR adio 2 Tuxedo Remote Note that the Ali
412. ter a topology change You would normally use this option if you want to Page 206 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Preferred Root Check this option if you want the radio to be preferred over other radios when the network is negotiating which radio to use as the STP root Bridge Priority The STP priority that is assigned to the radio This setting is managed by STRATOS and cannot be changed manually This information can be useful if you have other STP or RSTP enabled devices in your network such as switches and routers and you need to configure them to interact with the ENCOM radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 207 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Filter Settings The following screen shot shows the Network Filter tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP gos RADIUS VLAN Multicast Traffic To achieve better radio performance you may be able to reduce the amount of radio traffic by blocking out filtering unwanted multicast packets 1 Block incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 2 C Block outgoing multicast traffic on the Ethemet port 3 Block multicast traffic between wireless connections Wireless Connections oflte Ethernet Interface The network filters are used to block multic
413. tes radio is used This option is only used when the EAP Method is set to EAP TLS It is hidden if the EAP TLS option is not selected CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Encryption Algorithms Field Name Description Unicast Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames sent to individual radios Two options are available Option Description Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network This TKIP option is not available in mesh devices Group Ciphers Check the ciphers that can be used to encrypt frames broadcast to all radios Two options are available Option Description Amore secure WPA encryption protocol based on the reliable AES Advanced Encryption Standard Use this option is preferred if the there are no legacy WEP devices in the network This TKIP option is not available in mesh devices For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 295 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc e ENCOM STRATOS plus WIRELESS USER MANUAL Miscellaneous Field Name Group Key Update The interval at which the dynamically generated keys are updated Time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 296 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Network Tab The following screen shot shows the network settings tab for a
414. tes with the traffic controllers on TCP port 6000 e The video cameras stream video on UDP port 5000 The master and remote radios radios 1 4 and 5 in the diagram would be configured as follows 1 Enable the Network Traffic Prioritization and DSCP priorities options in the radio configuration form s QoS tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable C Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Enable Network Traffic Priority Rules He Nety Prioritization QoS an ddress es Destination Address es New Priorit New DSCP DSCP Priorities fes es For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 435 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus j NIRELESS USER MANUAL 2 Create the traffic controller priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Traffic controllers Enter a name that describes the data affected by the rule TCP v Partis Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Destination Address es DSCP Assign a high priority DSCP value to the rule 56 CS IP Precedence 7 Highest 3 Press OK to create the new rule For ENCOM STRATOS plus Versi
415. that the signal strength of one or more wireless links have been lower than the specified value for the specified amount of time CCQ reading Check this option to get notified that the signal quality of one or more wireless links have been lower than the specified value for the specified amount of time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 82 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Data rate Check this option to get notified that the data rate of one or more wireless links have been lower than the specified value for the specified amount of time For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 83 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc C2 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Notifications Recipients The following screen shot shows the Recipients panel of the System Settings form Recipients johnt mycompany com TE N davep mycompany com Recipient Information timg mycompany com Email address hnt mycompany cor First name lohn Last name Tate The following table describes the individual recipient settings Recipient List Field Name Description Recipient list Contains the list of recipients that have been defined Notifications will be sent to all recipients in the list if the mail server and the recipient are enabled Add button Click the Add button to add a new recipient to the list When clic
416. that they are compatible with other radios in the network To configure a radio using a saved configuration file 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Import button The Select configuration profile file form is displayed Select configuration profile file to import Look in Profiles E CommpakB6 S8N2_S8N2 PTMP profile My Recent Documents File name CommpakBB 58N2_58N2 PTMP profile j My Network Files of type Profile files 2 Select the configuration profile you want to import and press the Open button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 388 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 3 The Import Radio Settings form will be displayed Import Radio Settings Instructions The default import options have been selected Make any changes required and press the OK button to proceed Radio Module Assignments Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band Radiol 5 8 GHz ISM Band Radio 2 5 8 GHz ISM Band Radio2 5 8 GHz ISM Band Settings to Copy Copy all settings use when replacing a radio or restoring its configuration Copy common settings use when adding a radio to a network 4 The Radio Module Assignments group allows you to specify how the radio module settings are applied Profile Radio Modules Target Radio Modules Radio 1 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Ra
417. the Antenna Chains group The following table describes the settings found in each group in the wireless N settings tab Antenna Chains Field Name Transmit Specify the antennas to use for transmitting data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio card Receive Specify the antennas to use for receiving data Check the Chain option to enable the associated antenna and uncheck it to disable the antenna For optimal performance you should enable all of the antennas supported by your radio card For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 289 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Security Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless security settings tab for a mesh radio Radio Settings MAC Access Wireless Security Wireless Security Type Disabled O Static Dynamic C RADIUS MAC Authentication The Wireless Security Type group allows you to specify the security protocols used to protect the wireless communication links You can choose from the following options Wireless Security Types Option Description O O Disabled Select this option if you do not want to enable security This option is not recommended since it allows anyone that has knowledge of the Network s SSID to connect to the network Stat
418. the master radio you may want to manually select the master radio to which the remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type A Only v Network SSID ENCOM58N Hide SSID Sra Repeater a C Enable Roaming Channel Mode 20 MHz v Enter the MAC address of the master radio in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 337 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the master from the list of radios that are currently connected to the repeater ES Select Radio Select the parent radio Radio Name Mac Address IP Address Description Point to Multipoint Master 00 0C 42 72 65 F2 192 168 128 135 House in low profile case Note that installing a repeater will reduce the network throughput by half It should only be used when there is no other option available or if the reduction in performance is not important For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 338 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remote Radio Setup N Cards Select the Remote option for a radio that is as the far end of the point to multipoint network If the network contains a repeater ch
419. the proxy settings manually to gain access to the map tiles Configuring the proxy settings requires knowledge of your network environment and of the proxy server in particular You will need to consult your I T department for the required settings The following screen shot shows the Proxy Server panel of the System Settings form Proxy Server Settings Use system proxy settings Manual proxy configuration Server address 192 168 1 201 Port 3128 lt User name proxy Password The following table describes the individual proxy server settings Proxy Server Settings Use system proxy This is the default setting STRATOS will attempt to access the Internet settings using your computer s proxy settings Manual proxy Select this option if STRATOS is not able to access the map tiles You configuration will need to configure the remaining options in order to access the Internet through your proxy server Server Address Enter the IP or DNS address of your proxy server Enter the port number on the proxy server used to access the Internet using the HTTP protocol For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 80 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL User Name Enter the user name used to authenticate with the proxy server if authentication is used Password Enter the password used to authenticate with the proxy server if authentic
420. the standard 802 11g mode in the 2 4 GHz frequency band Client devices cannot attach to the radio N Only Operate in the 802 11n Wireless N mode in either the 2 4 or 5 8 GHz frequency band Client devices cannot attach to the radio AN Clients Operate in the standard 802 11a and 802 11n modes in the 5 8 GHz frequency band Client devices are able to attach to the radio B G N Clients Operate in the standard 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n modes in the 2 4 GHz frequency band Client devices are able to attach to the radio Network SSID Enter a name used to identify the network in which the wireless radio will take part The Network SSID is case sensitive and may contain spaces Note You should change the default SSID assigned at the factory to a For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 332 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup unique SSID for your network You can minimize interference between adjacent networks by assigning a unique SSID to each network Important Al radios that participate in the same network must be assigned the same Network SSID Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the Network SSID from being broadcast by the wireless radio This prevents external devices from being able to discover the network s SSID and potentially connect to it Radio Mode Select the radio mode based on the location of the radio with respect to the network operati
421. these services In particular the following ports must be opened between the radios and the computer on which ENCOM STRATOS is running Ge een Je ENCOM Radio Heartbeat packets are broadcast packets Because of this they are not able to pass through routers or firewalls This means that the STRATOS automatic radio discovery feature may not work if a router or firewall is present between the computer running STRATOS and the radios In this case you need to use the Add or Find radio functions to manually add the radios to the radio list For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 21 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 22 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Chapter 3 Connecting to a Radio In order to communicate with a radio ENCOM STRATOS needs either e Adirect connection to the radio s ethernet port e Adirect connection to the ethernet port of a master or gateway radio that has a wireless connection to the radio you want to connect to The following topics describe how to set up a direct connection to the radio e Powering the Radio e Connecting Directly to Your Computer e Connecting Using a Switch or Router For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 23 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Powering the Radio
422. timal range The wireless connection should be stable and will have good throughput The signal strength is too high The connection will be marginal and may not have good throughput For Wireless N radio cards the following levels are used by default 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 Tx RSSI dBm Signal Strength ER 75 dBm or lower mm above 35 dBm For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 153 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus For other radio cards the following levels are used by default 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 Signal Strength EC 85 dBm or lower EC 70 dBm to 40 dBm CH above 40 dBm You can change the default colors and thresholds in the RSSI Threshold panel in the System Settings form For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 154 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Wireless Link CCQ Colors The color of the client connection quality CCQ bars in the Wireless Link Status panel indicate the relative quality of the signal By default The following colors are used The signal quality is bad The connection will probably not be stable and will have low throughput The signal quality is not very good The connection will be marginal and may not have good throughput The signal quality is good The wireless connection should be stable and will
423. tion e Remote Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 473 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL When the network filters have been properly configured the multicast traffic will only be forwarded to the required upstream radios as shown in the following diagram Ethernet Backbone Master Master A B tl iit ti it Remote Pi M L N a t X Pa S PF KV t oe Pra t Era dec T Remote 4 Wy ne The green arrows show the direction in which the video traffic can flow Note that the traffic flows cleanly between the radios that collect the video and the workstations connected to the network operation center backbone Because the unnecessary network traffic has been eliminated the network will be able to support more cameras than a network where the multicast traffic is not filtered For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 474 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Master Radio Configuration The master radios collect the video data from their downstream radios repeaters and remotes and forward it to the network operation center workstations via the Ethernet backbone In order to prevent unnecessary video traffic from being forwarded to other radios it is necessary to filter out the following traffic e Multicast traffic entering the master radio s Ethernet port mu
424. tion e VLAN Enabled Switch 2 Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 463 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL VLAN Enabled Switch 1 Configuration VLAN enabled switch 1 would normally be located in the Network Operations Center The switch is configured to support the management traffic monitoring and traffic control VLANs on the first three Ethernet ports respectively Workstations connected to the first Ethernet port will only see network management data workstations connected to the second Ethernet port will only see traffic monitoring data and workstations connected to the third Ethernet port will only see traffic control data The bottom Ethernet port is configured as a trunking port and carries data from all VLANs For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 464 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 72 encom Radio 1 VLAN Configuration ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The VLAN configuration for Radio 1 would be as follows Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Filter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Management VLAN Tagged Management Data VLAN ID 10 z Management Address Tagged IP Address 10 10 1 50 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 1 254 Pruning C Prune VLANs Client Tagging C Tag Client Data Access Port Address Untagged IP Address 192 168 1 50
425. tion on the embedded map features Street Address Enter the street address of the radio if applicable This information is optional For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 237 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Tab ENCOM point to point radios contain a single wireless radio module This module is configured in the Radio 1 tab The following screen shot shows the radio settings tab for a point to point radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Network About Radio Settings wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address 00 15 6D 84 50 D0 Radio Network Setup Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS8N Hide SSID Radio Mode Master v Channel Mode 40 MH z Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band Wireless Link Rate Channel 5280 MHz v Output Power Maximum J Because the wireless radio settings are somewhat involved the radio configuration tab is split up into three sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Radio Settings sub tab e Wireless N sub tab e Wireless Security sub tab For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 238 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Settings The following screen shot shows the wireless radio settings tab for a point to point radio
426. tions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL 4 Create the video camera priority rule To do this click on the button at the right of the priority rule list and enter the following information in the QoS Priority Rule form QoS Priority Rule Video cameras Enter 4 name that describes the data affected by the rule UDP v Part s Specify the protocol Source Address es type and port Assign a high priority DSCP value to the tule use a lower priority than the traffic controller rule 40 CS5 IP Precedence 5 High 5 Press OK to create the new rule Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP QoS RADIUS VLAN Network Traffic Prioritization Enable Use WMM only works with radio cards not using the eMax protocol Use DSCP priorities Priority Rules Name Protocol Port s DSCP Source Address es Destination Address es New Priority New DSCP C Traffic controllers TCP 6000 7 56 C Video cameras UDP 5000 5 40 New priority rules 3 Note that STRATOS will automatically assign the highest possible priority to the protocols that it uses to communicate with the radios You do not need to add any rules for this traffic For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 443 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Repeater Radio Configuration The repeater radios radios 2 and 3 in t
427. to Support VLAN Priority Traffic sis 445 Appendix E VLAN Support VLAN Com pone ints wisi chiscicsscenedestctivet a Eaa aaa aa aa A A aaa a Eaa a AA a aR Eaa E aa a EEEa Example VLAN Setup i sisticccecssedcsucecccscnscsdtenscetacensesaceasenebinscnceuxe dense souseqeaceeeesiesenvewesepaeenscetecebesteaties ENCOM Radio VLAN Suppolt ccceececeeeeeee ener ee eeeeae ee eeeeeeeeee sean esse ee eeaaeeseeeeeaaaeseae esses esaaeeseeeeeaees Specifying a Management VLAN Clie nt Tagging Client Tagging with a Management VLAN ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeeeas 456 Pruning VLANS iesiissccisccsscssscctsaccsccscsssseeveccesazassndeneisacaventedessecasstetenscanssecssaisucasdensneevsscerauecoustaeisdcdusatecasseeassiateceseester VLAN Pruning for Performance VLAN Pr ning for Secur srein annee raaa a aE E AAAA EAEE Aa AAEE DERRER ERATES Detailed VLAN Configuration Example ss sssssssssssssssseeeneeeeennneeeennenns VLAN Enabled Switch 1 Configuration iii 464 Radio 1 VLAN Configuration Radio 2 VLAN Configuration Radio 3 VLAN Configuration Radio 4 VLAN Configuration Radio 5 VLAN Configuration VLAN Enabled Switch 2 Configuration ie 470 Appendix F Network Filters 472 Master Radio Configuration s sssssssssiosssccesossccssonsscessonsccssanscnetasneceiensscetennssueiensseuneasnses 475 Repeater
428. to a Radio 23 Powering th Ra Gis ciiscciigcctaccstevweteateevetcnts nue m senuethne uebeuesa dures nania raaraa te tee ntn ets niee dat e etant 24 Connecting Directly to Your Computer ss ssssssssssnrennnneeeeennneeeennnneeeeneneeeeeennes 25 Connecting Using a Switch or Router isssssseeeeeeeseeeeneees 26 Chapter 4 Using ENCOM STRATOS 27 Running ENCOM STRATOS c5sscsssosassssssoanussosanuerrabanesresanessenaneerrpanatsranbanuranaunesaspagee roses 27 Radio Login POM iis sccss ccc 55252 2ens duree see ae susesace se aleLa des noaa uerogecp ne EADE REENEN tenes ONA NNA essences 28 USe Interfaces rroaren easa Aa a a nie An ane seen nets anima ea reine mns eme sam at cards mesrine 29 C stomizing the Us rInterface visscccesccsccccescesersssncsccecesssevssscesececeseassssoncscccecescsssesctseceveseisedsseecztersaseessszevsessrvacdsrs 31 Resizing a Panel Repositioning a Panel iss loess iaa aara aa EA aaaea e aaa eadera is ata evan as 33 Menu Bar seine e eaaa ina Aa a aeiee Ea a iaa ete lego sine ser ria ane en E Oaa EOE ia Aaina aeS File Menu Commands Change Login Credentials sse sssene mener fem rte rene te trans EECCA E ASE AEE RIETER TEE 36 aa atola aain O o LISE a A A A E E E E E ET 37 Import gt Map Tiles Export gt Radio LISE aranan a Ea ra aa aiai a a eaaa gen ns iarain aED Expo t gt Map TGS sai aeea e aE e a a a r nn Ean a aaaea tres ua Exit E scree sedges E E dA a View Menu Commands
429. to get its location from the built in GPS receiver This option is not available if the radio does not contain a GPS receiver Manually specify Select this option if you want to manually specify the location of the radio location Latitude Enter the latitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the northern hemisphere and negative in the southern hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update the Latitude field Longitude Enter the longitude at which the radio is located in decimal degrees This value is positive in the eastern hemisphere and negative in the western hemisphere Alternatively hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button on the map to set the radio s position This process will automatically update For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 180 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc encom ENCOM STRATOS plus ZLE USER MANUAL Icon Color Select the color of the radio icon You can use the icon color to visually group radios by radio type geographical location VLAN association etc Icon Style Select the style of the radio icon Four icon styles are currently available Radio Type Master radio Repeater radio Dual radio Embedded map The embedded map allows you to see the current location of the radio A green marker shows the
430. to point and point to multipoint radios have very different configuration settings Because of this a separate configuration section is provided for each radio type Refer to the appropriate section for more information e Configuring Broadband Radios e Configuring Point to Point Radios e Configuring Mesh Radios e Configuring Point to Multipoint Radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 46 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VD encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Change Password Select Change Password from the Radio menu to change the radio s current login password When then Change Password menu item is selected the Change Password form is displayed Change Password Change password for the specified user User Name admin New Password Confirm Password Enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields and press OK to proceed A wait form will be displayed while the radio s login password is changed Please wait 14 Saving password to radio Cancel After the password has been successfully changed the Change Password form is automatically closed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 47 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Add to Ping Test Select Add to Ping Test from the Radio menu to add the selected radios to a ping test session A ping test consists of periodica
431. to the following topics for more information on radio mode options that are available e Master Radio Setup e Repeater Radio Setup e Remote Radio Setup Allow Clients Check this option to allow external 802 11 compliant devices such as laptops WiFi cameras etc to connect to the radio Note This option is not compatible with the eMax protocol If checked the eMax protocol is automatically disabled Note Since most 802 11 compliant devices only support 20 MHz channels you should set the Channel Mode option to 20 MHz when you select this option Note This option is only available for Master and Repeater radios Remote radios do not support client devices For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 342 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Radio Network Setup Feld Name Channel Mode This option allows you to set the width of the frequency channel you are using Selecting a smaller frequency for the Channel Mode increases the distance over which you can establish a wireless link at the cost of reduced bandwidth For most applications a 40 MHz channel mode is acceptable Note If you check the Allow Clients option to support 802 11 compliant devices you should choose the 20 MHz channel mode 802 11 Client Check this option if the radio needs to connect to a non Encom WiFi network Enable eMax Protocol Check this option to enable the eMax protocol The eMax protocol is
432. traffic controllers By analyzing the network it was noted that the repeater radios are only used to transfer network traffic between the network operation center and the devices connected to the remote radios Because of this it is possible to use the WMM QoS option to simplify the configuration of the repeater radios The QoS configuration settings for each of the 5 radios are described in the following topics e Master and Remote Radio Configuration e Repeater Radio Configuration Because WMM is not compatible with the eMax protocol you must disable eMax in the wireless radio cards and lose the throughput enhancements available when eMax is enabled If you are using Point to Multipoint radios configured for N Mode operation you cannot disable eMax and therefore cannot use WMM In that case use the priority queue mechanism to implement QoS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 423 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Master and Remote Radio Configuration Assuming that the network operations center communicates with the traffic controllers on TCP port 6000 you would configure the master and remote radios radios 1 4 and 5 in the diagram as follows 1 Enable the Network Traffic Prioritization and WMM options in the radio configuration form s QoS tab Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP oS RADIUS VLAN Network Traf
433. transmitted on the interface The number of bytes received on the interface Tx Packets The number of packets transmitted on the interface Rx Packets The number of packets received on the interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 161 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Ping Test Panel The Ping Test panel displays the results of an on going ping test Radio IP Address Sent Received 1 min ms max ms avg ms cur ms Dalhousie Remote 192 168 128 50 9 9 100 7 56 31 38 amp McKnight Remote 192 168 128 52 Ep Nose Hill Master 192 168 96 40 Thotneliffe Repeater 192 168 128 62 9 8 8 Tuxedo Remote 192 168 128 517 8 A ping test consists of periodically sending ICMP message pings to a group of radios and recording the latency of the responses The latency is the interval between the time at which the ICMP message is sent and the time at which the response is received To stop the ping test click on the Stop button The button text will automatically change to Start To start the ping test click on the Start button The button text will automatically change to Stop The Reset button allows you to restart the test while it is running All of the statistics shown in the list are automatically reset to 0 The following table describes the information that is displayed for each radio participating in the ping test The name assigned to th
434. ts where two conflict every or more radios that have been assigned the same IP address If an IP address conflict is detected an IP Address Conflict form is For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 67 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus displayed that indicates the radios that have been assigned the same IP address Note This feature only checks for IP address conflicts between ENCOM radios Other devices in the network such as cameras traffic controllers and other devices could be assigned the same IP address but STRATOS would not be able to detect such conflicts For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 68 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc VC encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The P Address Conflict form displays the radios that have been assigned the same IP address as shown in the following example IP Address Conflict The following radios have the same IP address assigned with them 192 168 128 117 00 0C 42 F5 8A 70 Master i D4 CA 6D 69 D8 CB Remote Postpone for 15 minutes M The following table describes the fields found in the P Address Conflict form Field Name IP address conflict list The IP address conflict list shows the IP addresses that are in conflict and the MAC addresses and names of the radios that have been assigned the same IP address El 192 168 128 11 00 0C 42 F5 84 70 Ma
435. ttings N Cards This topic describes the radio settings used to secure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios using Wireless N radio cards To configure Broadband and Point to Multipoint radios with secure settings 1 Run ENCOM STRATOS to access your network 2 Select the radio you want to secure 3 Select Radio gt Configure from the main menu Alternatively just double click the radio 4 Select the Radio 1 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab 5 Update the settings using the following guidelines Network Type If you don t need to support wireless client devices e g laptops smart phones wireless cameras set this option to N Only or A Only This prevents client devices from being able to connect to the radio making your network harder to compromise Network SSID Use an innocuous word or phrase or a random combination of letters numbers and punctuation except for the and characters This prevents someone that discovers the network from easily determining the type of radios in the network who the network belongs to or what the network is being used for Hide SSID Check this option to prevent the network SSID from being broadcast This will prevent unauthorized client devices from detecting your network and will prevent casual discovery of your network If client devices are allowed to connect to the network they will have to be manually configured with the SSID Channel Mode Most wireless N clien
436. tures of the Ping Test panel e Task List Context Menu For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 167 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Task List Context Menu To display the Task List context menu click the right mouse button anywhere on the Task List panel The following context menu is displayed Remove Task Remove Finished Tasks The following table describes the commands available in the context menu Remove Task Removes the currently selected and finished task from the list This option is grayed out if a finished task is not currently selected Remove Finished Tasks Removes all finished tasks from the list Cancel Task Allows you to cancel the task that is currently selected This option is grayed out if a task is not currently selected or if the selected task is already finished Note Canceling a task during the Restart Radio phase will not have any effect on the outcome of the task since the actual operation has already been carried out STRATOS is simply waiting for the radio to come back on line after being restarted For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 168 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Spectrum Scan Panel The Spectrum Scan panel allows you to visualize the external wireless traffic that exists in a radio s frequency band You can use this information to decide the best fre
437. u can leave this setting to lt Not Set gt Description Select this option if a DHCP server is available on your radio network and you want the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the radio Select this option to manually assign the radio s IP address ENCOM recommends this option because it provides for a more secure network especially if you have not enabled wireless security Note It is important that each radio in the network is assigned a different IP address Network performance can suffer greatly if two or more radios are assigned the same IP address For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 233 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL IP Address Settings Feld Name IP Address Enter the IP address of the radio This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example IP Address 192 168 128 151 Network Mask Enter the network mask This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the radio or router that allows the radio to connect with devices that are outside of their local LAN or VLAN This is an Internet Protocol version 4 IPv4 address specified in dotted notation as shown in the following example Default Gateway 192 168 1 254
438. ughput Even if the radio is not heavily loaded WMM can improve the quality of audio and video streams by lessening the effect of potentially bursty lower priority traffic The following table shows the type of traffic that is normally assigned to the WMM priorities Priority Traffic Type 0 3 Traffic from devices that lack QoS capabilities or traffic that is less sensitive to latency but may be affected by long delays Low priority traffic that does not have strict latency or throughput requirements e g file downloads Higher priority traffic Normally used for video streams to prevent dropped frames and jittery playback Highest priority Normally used for VoIP traffic DSCP priorities When this option is enabled priorities are automatically assigned to For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 415 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Enable incoming packets based on their DSCP values Priority queues are still C Use WMM used to manage the packets and to ensure that the higher priority traffic is maintained at the expense of the lower priority traffic Use DSCP priorities The following table shows the priorities that are assigned based for the commonly used DSCP values As usual the higher the priority value the higher the priority DSCP Name DSCP Value Priority CSO 0 7 CS1 AF11 AF12 AF13 8 15 CS2 AF21 AF22 AF23 16 23 CS3 AF31 AF32 AF3
439. unction is used to save the radio s current settings to a configuration profile file This allows you to e Make a backup copy of the radio s configuration e Save the radio s configuration to a profile or template file for use in configuring other radios To export a radio s configuration 1 From the radio s configuration form click on the Export button The Save configuration profile file form is displayed Save radio configuration to profile file Save in O Profiles Ee My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer a File name CommpakBB 58N2_58N2 PTMP lt 3 z My Network Save as type Profile files 2 Specify the name of the file you want to save the radio s configuration settings to and then press the Save button to save the settings By default STRATOS saves configuration profile files in the My Documents Encom Wireless Profiles folder For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 387 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Importing the Radio Configuration The Import function allows you to update the radio s settings from a previously saved configuration profile file This function allows you to e Restore the radio s configuration from a backup file This can be useful when you have to replace a radio in the field e Apply the settings from one radio to another This can be used to provision new radios quickly and ensure
440. updated to reflect the new license For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 110 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL About Select About from the Help menu to display information about ENCOM STRATOS For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 111 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Panels Alerts Panel The Alerts panel displays alert messages that have been generated by STRATOS It is normally hidden and is automatically displayed when an alert is generated The background of the Alerts panel is normally white but turns red when alerts are present MAC Address IP Address Alert Started At McKnight Remote 00 0C 42 6D 45 37 192 168 128 52 Offline for 10 or more minutes Apr 05 2013 03 28 51 PM Bee Bee Ee eee eee The following table describes the information that is displayed for each alert shown in the list The name of the radio that caused the alert to be generated If the alert is not associated with a particular radio lt Not Applicable gt is displayed The condition that caused the alert to be generated Started At The time at which the condition was detected Refer to the following topics for more information regarding the features of the Ping Test panel e Sorting the Alerts List e Alerts Panel Context Menu Alerts are not stored in the STRATOS database If STRATOS is shut down all alerts
441. upgrade to a larger number as your network grows Support for 20 radios v 2 Contact your ENCOM sales representative to order your license LA licensing encomwireless com www encomwireless com contact encom T 1 800 617 3487 or 1 972 885 5170 3 Make sure that you provide a valid e mail address when you submit your order The serial number used to activate your license will be e mailed to that address when your order has been processed For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 93 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus 3 Select the license that supports the number of radios in your network You can start with a small license and upgrade to a larger license as you add more radios to your network 1 Determine the license that best matches the number of radios in your network You can start with a small number of radios and later upgrade to a larger number as your network grows Support for 20 radios v 4 Order your license from your ENCOM sales representative or use the contact information shown in step 2 If an e mail client is installed on your computer click on the licensing encomwireless com link to create a pre populated license request e mail Stratos license request Support for 20 radios DER File Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help ay D X AE O L SRS To licensing encomwireless com GA Ce Subject Stratos license r
442. uple of minutes 9 Press the Stop button to stop the scan The button text will automatically change to Start Due to the way in which Wireless N technology is implemented the 20 MHz and NOTE 40 MHz channel modes will display the same information when the spectrum scan is being performed with a Wireless N radio card For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 172 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc 7 encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Terminal Panel The Terminal panel allows you to interact with the currently selected radio using an SSH based terminal session The panel is only visible when the terminal session is active Connected to Mesh Radio 1 Color scheme v EEEEEEEEEEEE NNNN NNN EEEEEEEEEEEE N N NNN EEE r EEEEEEE NNN EEEEEEE NNN EEE NNN EEEEEEEEEEEE NNN EEEEEEEEEEEE Encomos Router Cadmin mesh Radio 1 The terminal panel is meant to be used for troubleshooting issues with the help of ENCOM technical support personnel A description of the terminal commands available to the radio is beyond the scope of this document To connect to a radio using the terminal panel 1 Select the radio you want to connect to from the Radio List 2 Select Radio gt Terminal Connect from the STRATOS menu 3 When connected enter the appropriate commands using the keyboard Press the Enter key to execute the command s To disconnect from the radio perform one of the following e Clic
443. us USER MANUAL Carrying Out a Ping Test To carry out a ping test 1 Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Select Add to Ping Test from the Radio menu The Ping Test panel will be activated and shown if it was hidden The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders that were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running Alternatively 1 O a A Make sure that the Ping Test panel is visible Select one or more radios or one of more folders in the Radio List panel For information on selecting multiple radios or folders refer to the Selecting Radios topic Click and hold the left mouse button on one of the items you selected Drag the items to the Ping Test panel Release the mouse button The radios that were selected or that are found in the folders that were selected will be added to the Ping Test panel The ping test will automatically start if it is not already running For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 164 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Sorting the Ping Test List You can sort the ping test list by clicking the left mouse button on any of the table headers When you click on one of the hea
444. us WIRELESS USER MANUAL Optimizing to Minimize Noise Interference You can minimize noise interference in your network by changing the polarization of the antennas to the horizontal plane e For integrated antenna systems Mount the antenna so the polarization sticker is in the horizontal direction There is a sticker on the back of each broadband integrated radio that allows you to determine the direction of the polarization When the radio is mounted with the Ethernet connector facing down the antenna has a vertical polarization To change to horizontal polarization rotate the radio s mounting position 90 degrees so that the Ethernet connector is facing to the right or to the left of the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 399 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL e For non integrated antenna systems Non integrated units do not have polarization stickers but can be properly oriented by changing the direction the antenna elements are facing If a non integrated antenna s elements are pointing up and down the elements are running parallel to the pole it is in the vertical position and has vertical polarization To change the polarization to horizontal rotate the antenna 90 degrees so the antenna s elements are parallel to the ground NOTE If possible mount the antenna away from other radio equipment It is important to hermetically seal the
445. us versions of STRATOS used the s3db file extension For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 38 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc USER MANUAL CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Import gt Map Tiles Select Import gt Map Tiles from the File menu to add the contents of a previously saved map tile database to the local map tile cache Use the Export Map Tiles function to create such a database file This function is useful in cases where you want to use STRATOS on a computer that does not have Internet access Simply export the map tiles from a workstation that has access to on line maps and import them into the computer that does not have Internet access That way you will have access to those sections of the map that have been cached To import a map tile database 1 Select Import gt Map Tiles from the File menu You will be prompted to open a map tile database file Open map tile database file Look in B Encom Stratos Profiles CrileDBvs My Recent MapTiles_backup gmdb Documents ter File name MapTiles_backup gmdb Files of type Database files My Network Help 2 Select the file that contains the map tiles you want to import and then press the Open button 3 STRATOS will check the file you selected to ensure that it contains a valid map tile database If the file is not valid the following prompt is displayed Could not import The file you selected is not a map tile da
446. vent multicast traffic from being forwarded from one remote radio to another For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 479 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the the network filter configuration to use for the repeater radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fitter DHCP Server SNMP gos RADIUS VLAN Multicast Traffic To achieve better radio performance you may be able to reduce the amount of radio traffic by blocking out filtering unwanted multicast packets 1 C Block incoming multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 2 Block outgoing multicast traffic on the Ethernet port 3 Block multicast traffic between wireless connections Wireless Connections ofite Ethernet Interface For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 480 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Remote Radio Configuration The remote radios collect video data from one or more cameras directly connected to their Ethernet ports and forward it to the network operation center workstations via the upstream repeater or master radios Since a remote radio will normally maintain a single wireless link to the upstream radio there is usually no reason to block wireless to wireless traffic If you have wireless client devices such as laptops or wireless cameras connected to the remote radio you m
447. view panel only if e A valid geographical location has been assigned to the radio e The checkbox associated with the folder that contains the radio is checked For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 71 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus Z WIRELESS USER MANUAL Name IP Address Mac Address ve CommpakBB 49 Single CommpakBB 58 Single Hi fn Mesh Network A Ga Point to Point Network HL Point to Point Radio 1 amp i Point to Point Radio 2 If not checked checkboxes are not displayed in the radio list panel as shown in the example below Icons for all radios that have been assigned valid geographical locations will be shown on the map view panel Name IP Address Mac Address Fi CommpakBB 49 Single H Mesh Network cae Point to Point Network E Point to Point Radio 1 amp i Point to Point Radio 2 Radios are assigned a geographical location in the Location tab of the Radio Configuration form Audio Prompts Field Namo Play a sound when a If checked STRATOS will beep when a task that takes a significant long running task has amount of time to complete is finished Examples of such tasks include completed e Assign Static IP Address e Upgrade Firmware e Find Radios For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 72 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Field Name Description All
448. warded to DSCP The DSCP value of the incoming packets to match If blank the DSCP priority is ignored by the rule New Priority The priority to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria New DSCP The DSCP value to assign to the packets that match the specified criteria Click the Add button to create a new priority rule Enter the appropriate rule settings in the QoS Priority Rule form that is displayed Add button Select a priority rule and then click on the Edit button to modify the rule settings Edit button Alternatively you can double click on the rule you want to modify 3 To delete a rule first check it and then click on the Remove button to actually delete it Remove button For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 259 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc L encom ENCOM STRATOS plus L WIRELESS USER MANUAL Specifying a QoS Priority Rule The following screen shot shows the QoS Priority Rule form for a point to point radio QoS Priority Rule Name Traffic controller Matching Criteria Protocol Port s 2773 Source Address es Destination Address es DSCP Action Set priority to 7 Highest Set DSCP to The QoS Priority Rule form allows you to define a traffic priority rule The following tables describe the QoS rule settings Field Name Description Name Enter a short descripti
449. x protocol If the radio is configured as a remote it will by default connect to any compatible master radio it detects To force the remote radio to connect to a specific master radio uncheck the Enable Roaming option and enter or select the Page 485 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL MAC address of the master radio in the Parent Radio MAC Address field This will prevent the remote radio from connecting to an unauthorized master radio that is placed in the vicinity of the remote 6 If you follow all of the guidelines the Radio Settings sub tab for a master radio will look similar to the following example Radio Settings wos Setup Wireless N Wireless Security General Identification Enable Radio Radio Model Atheros 11N Wireless MAC Address D4 CA 6D 10 35 DE Radio Network Setup Network Type NO nly j v Network SSID k6 amp sEW3cD Hi Hide SSID Radio Mode Master v Channel Mode 1 O MHz v Radio Parameter Setup Frequency Band 5 8 GHz ISM Band v Wireless Link Rate 7 Channel 5775 MHz v Output Power Maximum v 7 f you are securing a dual radio select the Radio 2 tab and the Radio Settings sub tab and then repeat steps 5 6 8 Press the OK button to save the new radio settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 486 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc D encom ENCOM STRAT
450. y NTP Server System Clock Time Zone lt Not Set gt v Because a large number of configuration options are available the network configuration tab is split up into a number of sub tabs The following topics describe the settings found in each sub tab e Time Settings e Spanning Tree Protocol Settings e Network Filter Settings e DHCP Server Settings e SNMP Settings e QoS Quality of Service Settings e RADIUS Settings e VLAN Settings For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 203 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Time Settings The following screen shot shows the Time settings tab for a broadband radio Time Spanning Tree Protocol Network Fiter DHCP Server SNMP aos RADIUS VLAN Time Synchronization Synchronize radio time using NTP Server v Primary NTP Server 192 168 1 254 Secondary NTP Server 192 168 1 253 System Clock Time Zone GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada v The following table describes the time settings Time Synchronization Field Name Description Synchronize radio time Select one of the following options to set the system clock Nothing The radio s time will only be synchronized when a configuration change is made by STRATOS NTP Server The radio will synchronize its internal clock to the specified NTP server time at regular intervals GPS Receiver The r
451. y checked and the Enable eMax Protocol option is unchecked the eMax protocol cannot be used when there is a repeater in the network Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS58 8 Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz x By default the Enable Roaming option is checked This causes the repeater radio to automatically detect and communicate with the master radio Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS88 lt Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients Channel Mode 40MHz2 v If you encounter connectivity issues between the repeater and the master radio you may want to manually select the master radio to which the remote will connect To do this uncheck the Enable Roaming option The Parent Radio MAC Address option will be displayed Network Type Network SSID ENCOMS58 8 E Hide SSID Radio Mode Repeater v C Allow Clients C Enable Roaming Channel Mode 40 MHz v Parent Radio MAC Address 00 05 F 4 1D 3D 0F Enter the MAC address of the master radio in the Parent Radio MAC Address option For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 189 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Alternatively click on the J button at the right of the MAC address field The Select Radio form will be displayed This form lets you choose the master from the list of radios that are currently c
452. y manage your network you should use the same administrative password for all of your radios 4 The next time you run STRATOS you will have to log in using the new administrative password For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 536 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc
453. y the radio For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 223 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus About Tab USER MANUAL The following screen shot shows the About tab for a broadband radio Basic Settings Location Radio 1 Radio 2 Network About Hardware Info Model Platform Architecture Firmware Info Version License ID Upgradable to CommpakBB 24 58 Dual Geode TM 86 3 30 MV89 SLI12 vB x This tab displays information regarding the radio s hardware and firmware It does not contain any user editable fields For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 224 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc CA encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Export and Import Buttons The Export and Import buttons in the lower left hand corner of the radio configuration form allow you to save the radio s configuration settings to a file and to update the radio s configuration settings from a previously saved configuration file Refer to the following topics for more information on these functions e Exporting the Radio Configuration e Importing the Radio Configuration For ENCOM STRATOS plus Version 2 1 71 Page 225 2010 2015 Encom Wireless Data Solutions Inc A encom ENCOM STRATOS plus USER MANUAL Exporting the Radio Configuration The Export function is used to save the radio s current settings to a con

Encom Stratos User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents